Skip to main content Accessibility help
×
Hostname: page-component-76fb5796d-x4r87 Total loading time: 0 Render date: 2024-04-27T05:43:01.743Z Has data issue: false hasContentIssue false

Part I - Sovereignty

Published online by Cambridge University Press:  05 February 2015

Christine Chinkin
Affiliation:
London School of Economics and Political Science
Freya Baetens
Affiliation:
Universiteit Leiden

Summary

Type
Chapter
Information
Sovereignty, Statehood and State Responsibility
Essays in Honour of James Crawford
, pp. 1 - 152
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Print publication year: 2015

Part I Sovereignty

1 The war against cliché: dispatches from the international legal front

Karen Knop
Susan Marks *

To idealize’, writes Martin Amis, ‘all writing is a campaign against cliché. Not just clichés of the pen, but clichés of the mind and clichés of the heart.’ He goes on: ‘When I dispraise, I am usually quoting clichés. When I praise, I am usually quoting the opposed qualities of freshness, energy, and reverberation of voice.’1 Amis is a justly respected leader in the war against cliché. But if we, the authors of this chapter, hope to consider ourselves partisans of that campaign, in our case the spur to enlist came from another source.

It was at the time when we were both doctoral students working under the supervision of James Crawford. One of us was busy finding the devil in the detail. The other was wondering whether at the end of the day everything really was so cut and dried. Well, suffice it to say (for clichés are surely hard to avoid altogether), we changed our tune (ditto) when there began to appear in the margins of our drafts that shaming rebuke, that call to arms: ‘cliché’.

We wish to use the present occasion to explore a little further what happened then. What exactly was it that James was signalling to us as aspiring scholars of international law when he cautioned us against cliché? Are the clichés of international legal field clichés of the pen, or also clichés of the mind and even clichés of the heart? Why are they to be deprecated? And if, once deprecated, they still remain (as we have already suggested) hard to avoid, why is that so? Does cliché always stand opposed to freshness, energy and reverberation of voice, or might it be that, behind the over-familiarity, there is potential for vitality and insight yet?

It is a cliché of writing about cliché that, while we think we know a cliché when we’re confronted with one, that is not always the case. Perhaps because of this, much work on the subject takes the form of inventories or ‘dictionaries’ of clichés.2 We do not offer here a list of international legal clichés (assuming such could exist). The issue for us is, rather, cliché – the phenomenon of cliché – as a problem of international law. What does it mean, we ask, and what does it not mean, to wage the war against cliché on the international legal front?

I

We begin with the concept of cliché itself. In the introduction to a dictionary of clichés that is now in its fifth edition, Eric Partridge writes that a cliché is ‘an outworn commonplace; a phrase or short sentence that has become so hackneyed that careful speakers and scrupulous writers shrink from it because they feel that its use is an insult to the intelligence of their audience or public’.3 This definition highlights a number of features. In the first place, there is the hackneyed character of the cliché. Clichés are banal, trite, ho-hum. Secondly, the concept of cliché brings with it the idea of loss or degeneration.4 A cliché is an outworn commonplace, in the sense that it originally had a point but repetition has now blunted that point and effaced the meaning and intensity which the cliché once had. And thirdly, cliché is a pejorative term. To apply the label is to condemn that to which it is applied as boring, predictable, inane, jejune and/or specious – an insult to the collective intelligence.

Partridge’s concern is the verbal cliché – the phrase or short sentence – but, at any rate today, the concept of cliché plainly extends much further than that. Thus, for instance, we speak of musical clichés, architectural clichés, theatrical clichés and culinary clichés. We take cliché to apply not only to language, but also to the aural, visual and other sensory domains, as well as to the realm of gestures and actions. Underlying all this is an idea of cliché as a particular mode of thought – a markedly unreflective mode of thought, indeed a mode of non-thought, a kind of automatism. For Walter Redfern, the central characteristic of cliché is ‘dependence’ in this sense.5 When you use a cliché, you short-circuit cognition. You renounce your independent-mindedness and obviate the inconvenience and effort of thinking for yourself. There is felt to be a laziness about the use of cliché. There is also felt to be an undertone of self-legitimation, inasmuch as clichés tie us to normality, to respectability, to authority. In her study of the trial of Adolf Eichmann, Hannah Arendt remarks on Eichmann’s tendency to repeat ‘word for word the same stock phrases and self-invented clichés’, observing that ‘when he did succeed in constructing a sentence of his own, he repeated it until it became a cliché’.6

At the same time, Gillian Beer poses a fair question when she asks: ‘[H]ow would we live or communicate without clichés?’7 Clichés frequently belong to the category of phatic communication, meeting the need for general sociability, rather than putting across any specific proposition. As Beer explains, ‘cliché assures us that we all belong together…It wards off extreme intimacy of encounter’, while signalling comfortable ‘communality’.8 Redfern recalls that the French word ‘répétition’ has the double sense of reiteration and rehearsal.9 The repetition of familiar tropes facilitates the performance of social interaction. The darker side of that is, of course, that cliché is also exclusionary. Outworn, it is by no means washed-up; there is a potency in its very banality. Thus, clichés function as shibboleths that distinguish those in the know from those who fail to understand the clichéd expression or to appreciate its character as a cliché. At the same time, clichés serve as carriers of ideology that uphold the status quo by making the received version of right-thinking common sense too banal to question. Arendt’s attention to Eichmann’s patterns of speech has been read in this light: ‘To identify the cliché is to try to open up the possibility of dissent in the domain of the obvious.’10 Finally, clichés give expression to stereotypes that reinforce prejudices and perpetuate the marginalisation of low-status groups.

The concept of the stereotype takes us directly to the origin of the word ‘cliché’. Borrowed from French, the term comes from the world of printing. It refers to a moulded metal plate – a stereotype – cast for printing blocks of text. Whereas at first individual letters had always to be set one by one, in the early nineteenth century a process developed whereby phrases that were likely to appear frequently could be prefabricated as single units – ‘clichés’. The word is believed to be onomatopoeic: clicher is a variant of the more common cliquer (to click), and is understood to evoke the ‘click-clack’ sound made by the moulding matrix when it struck the surface of the molten metal to produce the plate. By extension, cliché came also to refer to plates for the printing of images, and later to other printing technologies, including photographic negatives. The figurative usage of cliché as a ‘prefabricated’ or stereotyped mode of expression had apparently gained currency in France by the 1860s. That figurative usage (though not, it seems, the literal usage) was then imported into English.11 The Oxford English Dictionary dates the first occurrence in English to 1892.

The cliché, then, is a phenomenon of the nineteenth century that is bound up with processes of mechanisation, industrialisation and rationalisation, and with the emergence of a print culture enabling the mass circulation of texts. In tracing its history, Elizabeth Barry highlights the shift from the positively or neutrally coded ‘commonplace’ to the negatively coded ‘cliché’.12 In classical antiquity commonplaces formed part of the study of rhetoric, and referred to particular starting points or thematics to be used in formal argument (topoi). Early modern European thought likewise embraced the idea of the commonplace, though not so much as an aspect of rhetoric, which fell widely out of favour insofar as it came to be associated with manipulative and insincere speech. Instead, the activity of ‘commonplacing’ and the ‘commonplace book’ became private pursuits, the collection of material in personal scrapbooks. According to Barry, what set the scene for the concept of cliché was the emergence of a mass market for the consumption of texts. Anxiety about vulgarisation, banalisation and inauthenticity arose as a concomitant of the increasingly wide and fast dissemination of words and ideas that was made possible by the new technologies of mechanical reproduction. Barry reports that an analogy became prevalent in Romantic literary aesthetics between ‘a mechanical use of language and the technical equipment of printing’.13

The first work thematising the concept of the cliché is often said to be Gustave Flaubert’s satirical novel Bouvard and Pécuchet, written in 1880, in which two copy-clerks embark on a search for knowledge that brings only errors, failures and disasters.14 The clerks’ putative commonplace book – published separately under the title of Dictionary of Received Ideas – catalogues clichés in such entries as ‘Rhyme: Never in accord with reason’; ‘Thicket: Always “dark and impenetrable”’; and ‘Unleash: Applied to dogs and evil passions’.15 By the middle of the next century, the denunciation of cliché had become considerably less subtle – a trend perhaps nowhere better exemplified than in George Orwell’s famously intemperate essay on politics and the English language.16

For Orwell, ‘the English language is in a bad way’, and a key aspect of the pathology is the prevalence of clichés.17 All too often, and especially in the discourse of politics and government, recourse is had to ‘ready-made phrases’ and ‘worn-out metaphors which have lost all evocative power and are merely used because they save people the trouble of inventing phrases for themselves’.18 Echoing the association mentioned above of ‘mechanical’ language with printing technology, Orwell writes that a ‘speaker who uses that kind of phraseology has gone some distance towards turning himself into a machine. The appropriate noises are coming out of his larynx, but his brain is not involved as it would be if he were choosing his words for himself.’19 The essay culminates in a series of rules for overcoming this state of affairs, of which rule 1 is ‘Never use a metaphor, simile or other figure of speech which you are used to seeing in print.’20

II

Let us now begin to connect this discussion to international law.21 In doing so, we should note one further feature of cliché on which we have not yet touched. This is that cliché is, as Ruth Amossy and Elisheva Rosen observe, an inescapably relative phenomenon.22 There is no such thing as a ‘cliché in itself’.23 Rather, clichés are specific to particular times. We mentioned earlier Partridge’s dictionary of clichés. It runs to some 250 pages, and puts asterisks next to clichés that are ‘particularly hackneyed or objectionable’.24 Yet who today speaks of ‘heaping coals of fire on a person’s head’, or of ‘Lares and Penates’, ‘the clerk of the weather’, ‘in one’s palmy days’ or ‘hewers of wood and drawers of water’ – all of them asterisked as especially egregious clichés in Partridge’s most recent edition of 1978?

Clichés are also specific to particular places. To stay with verbal clichés, ‘Monday morning quarterback’, ‘fall off the turnip truck’, ‘blow this pop stand’ and ‘talk turkey’ might be – or once have been – used and understood by some people in the United Kingdom, but if so, these phrases would not be likely to be – or have been – heard as particularly clichéd. That said, the global circulation of language, or at any rate English, and perhaps especially American English, is a widely remarked phenomenon of our time, and it may be accelerating. As Hephzibah Anderson remarks, ‘Twitter, digital memes and the 24-hour news cycle can coin a cliché overnight, it seems.’25

Finally, clichés are specific to particular contexts and communities. Hence Redfern’s remark near the beginning of his book on cliché that there is ‘no way of knowing whether my clichés are yours’.26 Amossy and Rosen explain that clichés depend on conditions of reception that permit them to be recognised as such.27 Along with the other aspects of relativity, this is, of course, a feature shared by the related phenomenon of idiom. But whereas idioms are unmarked lexical items, we have seen that it belongs with the distinctiveness of the cliché that it gives off an aura of loss or degeneration.28 In order for that to occur, there must exist a situation in which, and an audience by whom, it is apprehended as exhausted, stale and devitalised, something that once fired the imagination, but does so no longer.

Learning to sort a field’s clichés from its idioms is an important competence that may serve as a badge of proficiency for those who have it and a handicap and barrier to entry for those who don’t. It is a competence that is often acquired through relationships of training or apprenticeship. We have already mentioned the training which we both received from James Crawford. Of course, that training was not limited to specialised international legal language. The clichés of international law are the clichés of everyday communication – and they are the clichés of policy debate, legal practice, institutional organisation and academic life as well. On the other hand, those wider terrains are not all-encompassing. As with Orwell’s domain of politics, there also exist clichés that are rooted in the distinctive history, literature, institutions and traditions of international law itself.

Thinking about cliché as a problem of international law, we might start by recalling the usage in international legal communication of banal and specious phases in general currency. ‘The reality on the ground’, ‘all the stakeholders’, ‘going forward’ and ‘drill down’ are a few contemporary examples. We can then notice the emergence of clichés peculiar to international law. These mostly arise from the overuse of language borrowed from academic literature or from the pronouncements of courts and tribunals. ‘The invisible college’,29 ‘compliance pull’,30 ‘a legal black hole’31 and ‘the dark sides’32 are some phrases that may be thought to exemplify this turn of events whereby resonant expressions become, in some sense, victims of their own success. To these figurative noun-phrases, one might add sentence-length propositions. It is now trite to say – as the cliché of legal discourse would have it – that ‘almost all nations observe almost all principles of international law and almost all of their obligations almost all of the time’.33 So too, repetition has dimmed the rhetorical power of Judge Dillard’s chiasmus: ‘It is for the people to determine the destiny of the territory and not the territory the destiny of the people.’34

But the clichés of international law are not, of course, only verbal. Perhaps the most notorious international legal clichés lie, in fact, in the visual domain – the domain of book covers, website homepages, institute logos and the like. Robert Musil once wrote that ‘[t]here is nothing in this world as invisible as a monument’,35 and certainly the iconography of international law is replete with ‘monuments’ that have become more or less invisible. Maps are one example. Their overuse on the dust jackets of international legal books has largely drained them of the capacity to engage us imaginatively. We register them, of course, as images of the global scale of international law or of its preoccupation with boundaries, spaces and territories, but they do not detain us for long. They do not hold our attention or invite our scrutiny. Their evocative spark has gone faint. Yellowing antique maps, favoured in recent times to emphasise international law’s Eurocentric viewpoint (whether to place it comfortingly in the past or disturbingly in the present), scarcely escape this fate.

Images of justice – the blindfolded goddess Justitia or the set of scales she holds – together with the Earth as a globe are another example. A staple of logos of programmes, journals and professional associations in the international legal field, these once-inspiring representations now project reassuring normality, safe respectability and a rather bland, humdrum authority. As a final example, we might take the scenes of important people doing momentous things in settings of international law-making and adjudication that adorn international legal publications and promotional materials for international legal activities – statesmen shaking hands, diplomats negotiating around a table, Heads of State signing documents, representatives voting at the United Nations, international judges on the bench and other similar images. Are we to focus on who is present at these occasions or on who is absent from them? The images are so familiar that it becomes hard to remember even to ask such questions.

Alongside verbal and visual clichés, any discussion of cliché as a problem of international law must reckon with a further category of clichés that come rather less neatly packaged for inspection. We shall call this the category of ‘conceptual clichés’. Inasmuch as they are expressed through language, conceptual clichés might, of course, be assimilated to verbal clichés. But the focus here is less on the manner of speaking than on the manner of conceptualising things. Conceptual clichés are outworn ways of framing, analysing, thematising or otherwise thinking about the issues under investigation. In expressing conceptual clichés, we can usefully take our cue from Flaubert’s copy-clerks. Thus, some international legal examples might be ‘State sovereignty: Either eroding or persisting’; ‘The individual: Always emerging as a subject of international law’; ‘International legal system: Young, embryonic, primitive’; and ‘Balancing: Applied to freedom and security, state sovereignty and human rights, military necessity and humanitarian protection, etc.’ Stamped machine-like on the texts of international law, these topoi operate as stereotypes, shibboleths and performances of comfortable ‘communality’.

III

On the basis of what we have said so far, it seems that international law is as problematic when it comes to cliché as Orwell took politics to be. Rule 1 may well be more honoured in the breach than the observance. And, of course, there we go breaching it yet again. Orwell concedes that he breaches it too. ‘The debased language I have been discussing is in some ways very convenient’, he writes. ‘Look back through this essay, and for certain you will find that I have again and again committed the very faults I am protesting against.’36 Does that make Orwell a hypocrite? For Christopher Ricks, the ‘only way to speak of a cliché is with a cliché’, with the result that ‘even the best writers against clichés are awkwardly placed’.37 The problem, as he sees it, is that some of them do not always ‘winc[e] enough’.38 But Ricks also shows that the issue is not only about wincing enough. Orwell is surely one of the best writers against clichés, and Ricks has something very interesting to say about the passage with which Orwell’s essay ‘Politics and the English Language’ ends.

The passage goes like this:

One cannot change this all in a moment, but one can at least change one’s own habits, and from time to time one can even, if one jeers loudly enough, send some worn-out and useless phrase – some jackboot, Achilles’ heel, hotbed, melting pot, acid test, veritable inferno or other lump of verbal refuse – into the dustbin where it belongs.39

Ricks comments that ‘Orwell’s darkest urgings’ have, in these words, a ‘weirdly bright undertow’.40 How so? Because ‘what is most alive in that sentence is not the sequence where Orwell consciously put his polemical energy’ – the ‘argumentative train of serviceable clichés’ that takes him from ‘worn-out and useless’, through ‘lump of verbal refuse’, to ‘into the dustbin where it belongs’ – but rather the sequence that lists the spurned clichés themselves:

The jackboot has, hard on its heels, Achilles’ heel; then the hotbed at once melts in the heat, into melting pot, and then again (a different melting) into acid test – with perhaps some memory of Achilles, held by the heel when he was dipped into the Styx; and then finally the veritable inferno, which not only consumes hotbed and melting pot but also, because of veritable, confronts the truth-testing acid test.41

Ricks concludes that ‘Orwell may have set his face against those clichés, but his mind…was another matter.’42 For even as Orwell disdains and dismisses this language as a useless heap of verbal rubbish, even as he sets schoolmasterish rules designed to ban it, he uses it to ‘create a bizarre vitality of poetry’.43 The key word in that last sentence is actually ‘uses’. Ricks explains: ‘[u]sing is the nub’; the point is to use clichés, not be ‘used by them’.44 Orwell proposes that clichés ‘anaesthetize a portion of one’s brain’,45 but on the evidence of Orwell’s own writing, Ricks demonstrates that the great essayist is wrong. ‘Clichés invite you not to think’, Ricks writes, ‘but you may always decline the invitation’.46 In a similar vein, Redfern remarks that ‘clichés are first thoughts’, but ‘we have the capacity for second thoughts’.47

Ricks and Redfern belong to a critical tradition that urges contemplation of the imaginative possibilities of clichés. Rather than simply banning clichés, for these critics the more productive approach is often to do something with them. In any case, experience teaches us that a ban will not work. It will only serve to make everyone feel bad. As Redfern rightly avers, ‘we are all vulgarians’.48 We can’t and won’t avoid using metaphors, similes and other figures of speech which we are used to seeing in print, even if it were a good idea for us to try. That means we also need to be careful as critics. For if clichés can serve as shibboleths – door-openers that also shut out those not in the know – so too the criticism of cliché can risk spilling over into self-delusion and snobbery. Besides, if clichés were really so worthless, why would they have such tenacity?

We have mentioned more than once that it is a characteristic feature of clichés that they are taken to be outworn and degraded, the trace of something once potent that has been dissipated through overuse. In the case of verbal clichés, what has been dissipated often seems to be their figurative charge. When we speak of an ‘acid test’, the acid is no longer vivid in our mind’s eye (or ear or nose). Because of this, clichés are sometimes thought of as ‘dead metaphors’ – that is to say, metaphors that we no longer recognise as figurative, metaphors in respect of which the comparison made in the metaphor is no longer imaginatively registered. The classic examples are expressions like ‘the foot of a mountain, ‘the leg of a table’, ‘to run in the family’. Some analysts of language dispute this concept, arguing that even in expressions of that kind there is some ‘bare spark of life’.49 But certainly, when it comes to clichés, those who highlight the possibility of their creative deployment insist that ‘dead metaphor’ is not, in fact, the right way to think of them. Of course, no one disputes that it is a defining feature of cliché that it has lost vigour, but rather than taking clichés for dead, these scholars encourage us to see them as merely ‘sleeping’.50

The implications of seeing metaphors as sleeping are explored by Chaim Perelman and Lucie Olbrechts-Tyteca in their celebrated treatise on the ‘new rhetoric’.51 (The term actually used in the English edition of their book is ‘dormant’.) To characterise a metaphor as dormant, they propose, is to intimate that it is inactive, but that ‘this state of inactivity may only be transitory’, so that ‘the metaphor can be awakened and become active again’.52 We can be led again to see, hear and smell the fizz of the unverified substance as it hits the acid, and through that, we can be led to reflect on the imagery of the ‘acid test’ and on how it directs, channels and frames our thinking about the nature of truth and of truth-testing. Perelman and Olbrechts-Tyteca describe a number of ways in which dormant metaphors may be awakened. They may be awakened by being placed in a context that is different from their usual one (recontextualisation).53 They may be awakened by being set alongside another cliché or other clichés (juxtaposition). They may be awakened by being developed or extended in a new way (development or extension). And they may be awakened by being taken literally (literalisation).

The awakening of dormant metaphors is the stuff of much everyday playfulness and humour.54 It can make us laugh, but in doing so, it can also make us think. In a book about cliché published in 1970, Marshall McLuhan reports a funny story that illustrates the first of Perelman and Olbrechts-Tyteca’s methods of metaphor-awakening – recontextualisation:

A teacher asked her class to use a familiar word in a new way. One boy read: ‘The boy returned home with a cliché on his face.’ Asked to explain his phrase, he said, ‘the dictionary defines cliché as a “worn-out expression”’.55

The boy in this story has placed the cliché of clichés as ‘worn-out expressions’ in a context that is different from its usual one, and in so doing, he has jolted it awake. To be sure, the awakening took a bit of explanation. But once it happened, the imagery of exhaustion and expression would have become, for his teacher and classmates, at once strikingly vivid and newly, comically strange.

Many of the authors to whom we have referred in this section, McLuhan included, highlight the prominence of metaphor-awakening in the work of modernist writers like James Joyce, T. S. Eliot, Eugene Ionesco and Samuel Beckett. Here is one example from Beckett’s Happy Days:

Winnie: Oh well what does it matter, that is what I always say, it will come back, that is what I find so wonderful, all comes back…Floats up, one fine day, out of the blue…The comb is here. The brush is here. Perhaps I put them back after use. But normally I do not put things back after use, no, I leave them lying about and put them back all together, at the end of the day. To speak in the old style. The sweet old style…That is what I find so wonderful, that not a day goes by – to speak in the old style – without some blessing in disguise.56

Beckett uses here the second of Perelman and Olbrechts-Tyteca’s methods – juxtaposition. The clichés tumble out, one on top of the other, in a way that draws attention to their clichéness: the ‘old style’ of speaking. What is that old style? Is it really ‘old’ – or also new? Sweet – or also bitter? A style – or also a regime of knowledge and power? H. Porter Abbott observes that, in passages such as this, Beckett exposes ‘a still-active power in clichés, a power that works on us in our slumber’. For, Abbott suggests, ‘it is not really the metaphors that sleep but we who use them’.57

IV

To recognise international law as a domain of cliché is also to grasp international law as a domain in which things can be – and have been – done with cliché. In this final section, we want to illustrate the potential for rousing (or, as the case may be, not rousing, even further enervating) international legal clichés by returning to some of the verbal, visual and conceptual clichés to which we referred earlier. In particular, we want to return to ‘the invisible college’, the erosion or persistence of sovereignty, ‘a legal black hole’ and images of maps and important people. Beginning, then, with the first of these, it is part of the cliché of the invisible college to recall that this phrase was coined by Oscar Schachter in an article published in 1977.58 Schachter wrote that ‘the professional community of international lawyers…, though dispersed throughout the world and engaged in diverse occupations, constitutes a kind of invisible college dedicated to a common intellectual enterprise’.59 He referred to this community’s role in giving ‘meaning and effect’ to the conception of ‘la conscience juridique’,60 but said that, in order to fulfil that role, it had to become more visible to State officials. There was also a need for wider ‘participation embracing persons from various parts of the world and from diverse political and cultural groupings’.61

In 2001 the American Society of International Law chose as the theme of its annual meeting ‘The Visible College of International Law’. The organisers explained that they found:

Professor Oscar Schachter’s famous observation, made nearly a quarter century ago in 1977…to be an intriguing characterization, one that demanded a kind of reflection particularly suitable for observance of the (true) millennium and the extraordinary changes that had occurred in the nature of international law – and its practice – over the past quarter century.62

They said that their theme was designed to focus attention on the ‘historical evolution, our current status, and our future prospects as a college, we submit, an increasingly visible college, of international legal scholars, practitioners, policy makers, and social scientists’.63 To speak of the ‘visible’ college of international law is to develop the cliché by replacing ‘invisible’ with ‘visible’. In Beckett’s Waiting for Godot Estragon similarly replaces the usual terms of a cliché with different ones when he says: ‘On the other hand it might be better to strike the iron before it freezes.’64

What makes Beckett’s formulation arresting is that he plays against the cliché about striking while the iron is hot (and also perhaps adds into the mix another cliché about hell freezing over). Suddenly we see again the blacksmith sweating over his forge – the image that had become displaced by the idea of acting while conditions are right. In contrast, the American Society of International Law plays into the clichéd call for transparency and diversity in the discipline of international law, leaving that call largely undisturbed. The same may be said of a blog that recontextualises the cliché of the invisible college by taking it as its name. The ‘Invisible College’ blog is linked to the Netherlands School of Human Rights Research.65 Again evoking ‘Schachter’s famous article of 1977’, its stated aim is to provide interesting commentary on international law and also to serve as a community resource for the contemporary invisible college, publicising courses, job opportunities, web materials etc.

More promising, perhaps, is the title given by Hilary Charlesworth to an article on ‘feminist futures for the United Nations’: ‘Transforming the United Men’s Club’.66 In substituting the openly exclusive concept of the club, and combining it with both ‘United Nations’ and ‘(gentle)men’s club’, Charlesworth literalises the invisible college of international lawyers. That is to say, she makes it not simply a metaphor for relative opacity and homogeneity, but an actual body or institution, like the College of Cardinals or the Garrick Club. Schachter has said that he chose the metaphor of a college because the ‘group that formed the international law community in the past…used to be a fairly small community made up almost entirely of upper-class, European, French-speaking, male lawyers who knew or were related to one another’.67 Charlesworth restores the whiff of cigars, bringing it into the present and implicitly reminding us that colleges, like clubs, permit only so much democratisation. In her hands, the ‘college’ becomes less a project to be advanced than a reality to be transformed.

Passing now to sovereignty, Louis Henkin once declared his belief that this word should be dropped from the vocabulary of international law.68 ‘[I]t is time’, he wrote, ‘to bring “sovereignty” down to earth, cut it down to size, discard its overblown rhetoric…; to repackage it, even rename it, and slowly ease the term out of polite language in international relations, surely in law.’69 Henkin’s approach to the clichés that cluster around the concept of sovereignty highlights a point on which we have not yet had occasion to touch, though it may have been implicit in our discussion so far. This is that if, as we have seen, clichés are apprehended as exhausted, stale and devitalised, they are indeed apprehended as so exhausted, stale and devitalised that they are not only unworthy of use; they are unworthy even of critical interrogation. They are simply to be avoided, banished, abjured. This explains why, to a much greater extent than other kinds of self-evident truth or taken-for-granted representation, clichés fly under the critical radar, escaping all forms of consideration other than censure.

In contrast, David Kennedy has the cliché firmly in his sights when he characterises sovereignty as ‘a rhetorical toolkit, a glimmering and shifting style of presentation and address, at once fashionable and passé, fighting words and cliché’.70 He goes on: ‘We could call it [sovereignty] a shrewd balance, a recurring contradiction, an enduring problem at the core of the discipline, updated in each era.’71 And again: ‘A thousand calls for [sovereignty’s] elimination over the last hundred years, its death announced a thousand times in speeches and articles about the “new” interdependence, still it continues to structure our legal positions, our political alliances, our discipline’s imagination.’72 Finally: ‘[H]owever much we love to hate sovereignty, it reappears in our dreams as desire.’73 As in Happy Days, the clichés come tumbling out here, producing – as Ricks discerns also in Orwell’s writing – a bizarre vitality of poetry. The ‘shrewd balance’ corrects the ‘recurring contradiction’, which results from the ‘enduring problem at the core’. ‘Reports of my death are greatly exaggerated’ by the ‘thousand calls’. The ‘face that launched a thousand ships’ is someone we ‘love to hate’, but would marry ‘in our dreams’. Far from censuring the clichéd ‘issues’ of State sovereignty, Kennedy embeds them in a series of juxtapositions that invite attention to, and interest in, the sovereignty tropes as clichés.

Our next cliché – that of Guantánamo Bay as a legal black hole – exemplifies the speed with which clichés may arise. First coined in the context of a judgment rendered by the English Court of Appeal in 2002,74 and used again a year later by the English judge Johan Steyn as part of the title of a lecture on the detentions at Guantánamo Bay,75 the image of the legal black hole became timeworn very quickly. Along the way, it attracted more than the usual amount of critical attention. In one of the most insightful critiques, Fleur Johns argued that the metaphor was flawed and misleading, insofar as it implied that Guantánamo Bay was a lawless zone or a place empty of law.76 In fact, as she reminded us, the United States’s island prison was not at all lawless or legally empty; it was ‘filled to the brim’77 with law, whether as a result of the processes of international, constitutional, administrative, military, regulatory, immigration or some other kind of law. It followed that the problems of arbitrary detention, unfair trials and abusive treatment could not simply be solved by the application of law.

Although it was not part of Johns’s purpose to propose that people should stop using the phrase ‘legal black hole’ to describe Guantánamo Bay and similar spaces, her analysis pointed in that direction. But what if the metaphor had layers of meaning that were not specious in this context? And what if, with regard to those layers, it was simply dormant, and could be awakened? The US National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) explains black holes in the following terms:

Don’t let the name fool you: a black hole is anything but empty space. Rather, it is a great amount of matter packed into a very small area – think of a star ten times more massive than the Sun squeezed into a sphere approximately the diameter of New York City. The result is a gravitational field so strong that nothing, not even light, can escape.78

NASA also explains that:

[s]cientists can’t directly observe black holes with telescopes that detect x-rays, light, or other forms of electromagnetic radiation. We can, however, infer the presence of black holes and study them by detecting their effect on other matter nearby.79

In a recent book on the Black Hole of Calcutta, Partha Chatterjee shows that, in that very different context, the phrase ‘black hole’ has somewhat analogous connotations.80 On the one hand, the Black Hole of Calcutta was a cell in which 123 British soldiers taken prisoner by the Nawab of Bengal allegedly died by suffocation in 1756. (By extension, ‘the black hole of Calcutta’ later became synonymous with any confined and suffocating space.) On the other hand, very little is directly known about the Black Hole of Calcutta. Inasmuch as there are conflicting accounts of where exactly it was located, and what happened inside it, it remains obscure.

All this points to the possibility that the ‘legal black hole’ might be made actually to align with Johns’s critique. Instead of jettisoning the metaphor, we might extend it so as to recover and reawaken a twofold sense of being stuffed full and not easily comprehended.81 As in Johns’s analysis, Guantánamo Bay could then seem a highly legalised space, not one empty of law. And as in her analysis too, the challenge it throws up could be less to secure the application of law than to understand the law’s complicities and limitations. But, of course, the ‘legal black hole’ does not only express the condition of the law. It also expresses the condition of the people held. In a never-ending war on terror, these detainees cannot be released, any more than light can escape from a black hole. Moreover, like the prisoners of the Nawab in the story of the Black Hole of Calcutta, they have been cruelly treated. Is the scandal of the ‘legal black hole’ that the administration of the United States is being likened to an ‘uncivilised’ eighteenth-century Bengali ruler? Or does the parallel work the other way, chiming with criticism that the most high-profile detainees at Guantánamo Bay have been citizens of Western countries whose governments have intervened on their behalf or whose cases have been aired in the Western media?

To complete this brief illustrative review, let us turn finally to visual clichés. We referred earlier to the overuse in connection with international legal publications of maps and of scenes of important people in international law-related settings. Consider the following cover image. A man is sitting at his desk in a high-backed leather chair. He is white, in late middle age, and is wearing a three-piece mid-grey suit with wide 1950s-style lapels. His arms are folded, and his face is expressionless. His gaze is directed off to one side. He leans back in his chair. On the wall behind the man is a map. It takes up the entirety of the space behind him. The North Atlantic Ocean is to his right, the Indian Ocean to his left. The scale of the picture is such that his head is about the same size as West-Central Africa. Indeed, his head largely blocks those regions from view, along with the rest of the sub-Saharan continent. In front of the man, on the desk, is a large blurry shape that appears to be an open hard-sided attaché case. We see an extended diagonal hinge, again out of focus, ending at about Washington DC. This is the image on the cover of Sundhya Pahuja’s Decolonising International Law. It’s a black and white photograph, and a note on the back of the book informs us that the man is Eugene R. Black, president of the World Bank from 1949 to 1963.82

Pahuja’s cover reawakens the visual clichés of international legal publishing by literalising them and inviting attention to the material realities behind them. One of the characteristics of cliché, as we have seen, is evanescence; clichés fade into the background, unable to hold our attention or induce us to examine their detail. In the photograph on the cover of Pahuja’s book, the map is literally in the background. Furthermore, the map itself is not a representation of a map; it is a literal map hanging on the wall of Black’s office. As Black sits with his back to it, he literally claims a place in the order of international development before, or in front of, Africa. The fact that he obscures most of the continent also makes literal the old cliché of the ‘dark continent’. The hinge of the attaché case connects Black’s chair with the approximate location on the map of Washington DC, similarly literalising the seat of the World Bank. We get a good view of Black’s face, but the rest of his body is partly obscured by the attaché case and desk. He is literally a Head. What then of the organisation of which he is head – is the World Bank literally a world bank? The picture’s blurry foreground suggests that, on certain questions raised by an enquiry into the decolonisation of international law, we currently have no clear answers.

Conclusion

Faced with the phenomenon of cliché, we have contrasted two approaches which we have found in the literature on this subject. One approach is to say ‘Away with cliché!’. This is epitomised by George Orwell in his essay ‘Politics and the English Language’, with its injunction never to use phrases which you are accustomed to seeing in print. The other approach is to say ‘Do something with cliché!’. Samuel Beckett was a master of this, but Christopher Ricks encapsulates the point of it when he speaks of using clichés, rather than allowing oneself to be used by them. The first of these two approaches is – to us, at least – the more familiar; the second, the more challenging. Together, they express what Elizabeth Barry has termed ‘the impasse of attraction and resistance to cliché’.83

International law designates a field of cliché. That field overlaps with, or is partly encompassed by, other fields of cliché, both specialised and everyday. But it is also partly distinct. Clichés specific to international law often originate as quotations from academic literature, from the pronouncements of courts and tribunals, or from the language of international institutions. Quotation – repetition – is key to the emergence of clichés. Of course, repetition also has a wider significance in law, including international law. The click-clack of cliché is integral to all jurisgenerative processes. As a problem of international law, however, cliché is fundamentally about international legal thought – its independence, vitality and creativity.

A ‘war against cliché’ has been declared, and is going on around us. What is, or should be, the situation on the international legal front? As we approach now the end of our discussion, we confine ourselves to one further observation. This is that it is among the clichés of clichés that they need to be ‘attacked’ and defeated militarily.84 That is to say, the ‘war against cliché’ is itself a cliché. To engage in it is to be undermined in one’s efforts to pursue it by that very gesture. And if, somehow, the war could be won, what would victory look like? Would it not serve only, as Ricks puts it, to replace ‘tyranny-by-clichés’ with ‘tyranny-over-clichés’?85 Here is Redfern’s friendly advice: ‘Clichés will not go away, nor should we even desire them to. Use them. Know them. Use them knowingly.’86

* We thank Simon Stern for his valuable suggestions on the subject of cliché and the Global Law Students Association, Melbourne Law School for the opportunity to discuss a draft of this chapter.

1 Martin Amis, The War against Cliché (London: Vintage, 2002), xv.

2 See e.g. Eric Partridge, A Dictionary of Clichés, 5th edn (London: Routledge, 1978); James Rogers, The Dictionary of Clichés (New York: Ballantine, 1991); and Lucy Fisher, Clichés: A Dictionary of Received Ideas (Kindle, 2012).

3 Partridge, A Dictionary of Clichés, 2.

4 On this, see Elizabeth Barry, Beckett and Authority: The Uses of Cliché (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2006), 3.

5 Walter Redfern, Clichés and Coinages (Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1989), 16.

6 Hannah Arendt, Eichmann in Jerusalem (London: Penguin, 1994 [1963]), 49. See further Jakob Norberg, ‘The Political Theory of Cliché: Hannah Arendt Reading Adolf Eichmann’, Cultural Critique, 76 (2010), 74.

7 Gillian Beer, ‘The Making of a Cliché: “No Man is an Island”’, European Journal of English Studies, 1 (1997), 33.

9 Redfern, Clichés and Coinages, 8.

10 Norberg, ‘The Political Theory of Cliché’, 81.

11 The Oxford English Dictionary refers to cliché in its literal sense as the French name for what in English is simply called a cast or, in a more technical idiom, a ‘dab’.

12 Barry, Beckett and Authority, 11 et seq.

13 Ibid., 16.

14 Gustave Flaubert, Bouvard and Pécuchet, with Dictionary of Received Ideas, tr. A. Krailsheimer (London: Penguin, 1976).

15 Ibid., 324, 328.

16 George Orwell, ‘Politics and the English Language’, reprinted in Why I Write (London: Penguin, 2004), 102.

18 Ibid., 112, 106.

19 Ibid., 114.

20 Ibid., 119.

21 We join here a wider literature on law as rhetoric and the roles of imagery in law, including international law. What distinguishes clichés is that they involve failed metaphors, whereas the legal literature tends to focus on successful imagery.

22 Ruth Amossy and Elisheva Rosen, Le Discours du cliché (Paris: Société d’édition d’enseignement supérieur, 1982), 9.

24 Partridge, A Dictionary of Clichés, 9.

25 Hephzibah Anderson, ‘In Praise of the Cliché’, Prospect, 14 November 2012.

26 Redfern, Clichés and Coinages, 3.

27 Amossy and Rosen, Le Discours du cliché, 9.

28 On the distinction between cliché and idiom, see further Barry, Beckett and Authority, 4.

29 Oscar Schachter, ‘The Invisible College of International Lawyers’, Northwestern University Law Review, 72 (1977–8), 217.

30 Thomas Franck, The Power of Legitimacy among Nations (New York: Oxford University Press, 1990), 16.

31 R (Abassi) v. Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs [2002] EWCA Civ 1598, para. 64; Johan Steyn, ‘Guantanamo Bay: The Legal Black Hole’, International and Comparative Law Quarterly, 53 (2004), 1.

32 David Kennedy, The Dark Sides of Virtue: Reassessing International Humanitarianism (Princeton University Press, 2004).

33 Louis Henkin, How Nations Behave: Law and Foreign Policy, 2nd edn (New York: Council on Foreign Relations, 1979), 47 (emphasis omitted).

34 Western Sahara, Advisory Opinion, 16 October 1975, ICJ Reports (1975), 12, 116.

35 Robert Musil, ‘Monuments’ in Posthumous Papers of a Living Author, tr. Peter Wortsman (London: Penguin, 1993), 61.

36 Orwell, ‘Politics and the English Language’, 116.

37 Christopher Ricks, ‘Clichés’ in Leonard Michaels and Christopher Ricks (eds.), The State of the Language (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1980), 54.

38 Ibid., 55.

39 Orwell, ‘Politics and the English Language’, 120.

40 Ricks, ‘Clichés’, 55.

41 Ibid., 55–6.

42 Ibid., 56.

43 Ibid., 55.

44 Ibid., 57.

45 Orwell, ‘Politics and the English Language’, 117.

46 Ricks, ‘Clichés’, 58.

47 Redfern, Clichés and Coinages, 7.

48 Ibid., 5.

49 George Lakoff and Mark Johnson, Metaphors We Live By (University of Chicago Press, 1980), 55.

50 See esp. Barry, Beckett and Authority, 3. On the idea that metaphors may be ‘not dead but sleeping’, see William Empson, Seven Types of Ambiguity (London: Hogarth Press, 1991), 25.

51 Chaim Perelman and Lucie Olbrechts-Tyteca, The New Rhetoric: A Treatise on Argumentation, tr. John Wilkinson and Purcell Weaver (London: Notre Dame Press, 1969), 405et seq.

52 Ibid., 405.

53 The bracketed terms are our own.

54 As Ricks, among others, observes. See Ricks, ‘Clichés’, 58.

55 Marshall McLuhan with Wilfred Watson, From Cliché to Archetype (New York: Viking Press, 1970), 54 (quoted by Ricks, ‘Clichés’, 59).

56 Samuel Beckett, The Complete Dramatic Works (London: Faber and Faber, 1986), 135, 144, 146–7.

57 H. Porter Abbott, ‘The Art of Making it New, Revisited: Beckett and Cliché’, Poetics Today, 29 (2008), 596.

58 Schachter, ‘The Invisible College of International Lawyers’, 217.

60 Ibid., 226.

61 Ibid., 222.

62 David Bederman and Lucy Reed, ‘The Visible College of International Law: An Introduction’, American Society of International Law Proceedings, 95 (2001), ix.

64 Samuel Beckett, Waiting for Godot, 2nd edn (London: Faber and Faber, 1965), 18. See Barry, Beckett and Authority, 206. For an account of this passage as an illustration of the strategy of literalisation, see Abbott, ‘The Art of Making it New, Revisited’, 596–7.

66 Hilary Charlesworth, ‘Transforming the United Men’s Club: Feminist Futures for the United Nations’, Transnational Law and Contemporary Problems, 4 (1994), 421.

67 Mieke Clincy, ‘An Interview with Oscar Schachter’, American Society of International Law Proceedings, 95 (2001), 18.

68 Louis Henkin, ‘The Mythology of Sovereignty’, Canadian Council on International Law Proceedings, 21 (1992), 16. See also Louis Henkin, ‘That “S” Word: Sovereignty, and Globalization, and Human Rights, Et Cetera’, Fordham Law Review, 68 (1999), 1.

69 Ibid., 16.

70 David Kennedy, ‘Some Reflections on “The Role of Sovereignty in the New International Order”’, Canadian Council on International Law Proceedings, 21 (1992), 245.

71 Ibid., 244.

72 Ibid., 238.

73 Ibid., 239.

74 R (Abassi) v. Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs, para. 64.

75 Steyn, ‘Guantanamo Bay’, 1.

76 Fleur Johns, ‘Guantánamo Bay and the Annihilation of the Exception’, European Journal of International Law, 16 (2005), 613. See also Fleur Johns, Non-Legality in International Law (Cambridge University Press, 2012), ch. 3.

77 Ibid., 618.

80 Partha Chatterjee, The Black Hole of Empire (Princeton University Press, 2012), xi, 1.

81 For a play on the clichéd meaning, see David Dyzenhaus, ‘Schmitt v. Dicey: Are States of Emergency Inside or Outside the Legal Order’, Cardozo Law Review, 27 (2006), 2018 (‘grey holes’).

82 Sundhya Pahuja, Decolonising International Law (Cambridge University Press, 2011).

83 Barry, Beckett and Authority, 5.

84 See Ricks, ‘Clichés’, 58.

86 Redfern, Clichés and Coinages, 256.

2 International law and the responsibility to protect

Michael Byers

Introduction

‘[W]e surely have a responsibility to act when a nation’s people are subjected to a regime such as Saddam’s.’1 During its short life, the ‘responsibility to protect’ (R2P) has experienced gains and setbacks, with the greatest setback coming in March 2004 when Tony Blair invoked the concept in an attempt to justify the previous year’s invasion of Iraq.

R2P is of interest to international lawyers and international relations scholars alike. It is a result of ‘norm entrepreneurship’.2 It achieved prominence quickly, with only four years separating its birth in 2001 from its inclusion in the United Nations World Summit Outcome Document in 2005. But with success came controversy and compromise. On the key issue of the use of military force, R2P has – by widespread agreement – been confined to the context of UN Security Council decision-making, where it remains non-binding.

This chapter examines the interaction between R2P, the prohibition on the use of force set out in the UN Charter, and the discretionary power of the Security Council to determine the existence of a ‘threat to the peace’ and authorise military action.3 It asks: to what degree, if any, has R2P become part of contemporary international law concerning the use of force? And what does the history of R2P tell us, more generally, about ‘norm entrepreneurship’ and processes of legal change?

The chapter concludes that R2P has neither acquired legal status as a new exception to the prohibition on the use of force, nor exerted much influence on the rest of the international legal system. At the same time, the concept may – on an ad hoc basis – be influencing how States respond when another State violates the law while seeking to prevent atrocities. If so, the principal legal effect of R2P might concern mitigation of the consequences of rule-breaking, rather than any changes to the rules themselves.

Development of R2P

The central obligation of the UN Charter is set out in Article 2(4):

All Members shall refrain in their international relations from the threat or use of force against the territorial integrity or political independence of any state, or in any other manner inconsistent with the Purposes of the United Nations.4

According to the international rules on treaty interpretation, a treaty ‘shall be interpreted in good faith in accordance with the ordinary meaning to be given to the terms of the treaty in their context and in the light of its object and purpose’.5 The ordinary meaning of Article 2(4) is clear: the use of force across borders is prohibited. This meaning is supported by the context of the terms and the object and purpose of the treaty, with the Charter’s preamble affirming the determination of its members ‘to ensure by the acceptance of principles and the institution of methods, that armed force shall not be used, save in the common interest’.6 The Charter allows only two exceptions to the prohibition: Security Council authorisation and the right of self-defence. Only the first of these exceptions is of much relevance to R2P.

Under Chapter VII of the UN Charter, the Security Council has wide powers to ‘determine the existence of any threat to the peace, breach of the peace, or act of aggression’ and authorise military action. These powers went unexercised during the Cold War, apart from a possible authorisation in Korea in 1950 and a clear but tightly constrained authorisation concerning Southern Rhodesia in 1966. In the latter situation, the Security Council took a significant step in determining that human rights violations – in this case the racist policies of a white minority government – constituted a threat to the peace. It imposed a wide-reaching embargo and, in Resolution 221, called upon the United Kingdom ‘to prevent, by the use of force if necessary, the arrival of vessels reasonably believed to be carrying oil destined for Southern Rhodesia’.7

Somalia (1992–3)

After the Cold War, the Security Council used Chapter VII in a number of human rights or humanitarian crises. In January 1992, the Council determined that civil strife and famine in Somalia constituted a threat to the peace and imposed an arms embargo.8 Later that year, the Council authorised a UN-led peacekeeping force9 as well as a second, US-led, force with a broad mandate to ‘use all necessary means to establish as soon as possible a secure environment for humanitarian relief operations’.10

One year later, the killing of eighteen US Army Rangers in Mogadishu prompted a public outcry in the United States that led to the collapse of both the US- and UN-led operations. But Somalia nevertheless represented an important step for the Security Council, which for the first time in the post-Cold War era had authorised the use of force for humanitarian ends.

Bosnia (1992–5)

The post-Cold War break-up of Yugoslavia resulted in bloody cleavages between ethnic groups. In 1992, the Security Council used Chapter VII to establish the United Nations Protection Force (UNPROFOR) to provide basic peacekeeping.11 The next year, it extended UNPROFOR’s mandate to include the creation and protection of so-called ‘safe havens’ for Bosnian civilians.12 Later in 1993, Security Council Resolution 836 authorised NATO aircraft to bomb Serbian weapons and supply lines, but only after specific targeting decisions were co-ordinated and approved by both NATO and the UN Secretary-General.13 As with the Somalia resolutions, Resolution 836 was significant in authorising force for humanitarian ends. But the complex mandate proved ineffective and, in 1995, more than 7,000 men and boys were slaughtered in Srebrenica as UN peacekeepers stood by, their pleas for NATO air support unanswered.

Rwanda (1994)

As the Rwandan genocide began in April 1994, the commander of a small UN peacekeeping operation desperately requested more troops. The Security Council responded by reducing his force from 2,500 to 270 peacekeepers. The withdrawal cannot be attributed to any lack of knowledge on the part of Security Council members. On 23 April, a classified document prepared for senior US officials spoke matter-of-factly about ‘the genocide, which relief workers say is spreading south’.14 Six days later, during a Security Council meeting, the British ambassador reportedly cautioned against designating the massacre as ‘genocide’ because doing so might compel a response.15 As in Bosnia, where inadequate and complex mandates hindered action, the problem was a lack of political will. And yet the failure to act in Rwanda might subsequently have shamed some countries into action in Kosovo.

Kosovo (1999)

In 1999, NATO countries launched an air campaign to protect the Albanian population of Kosovo from Serbian forces. The intervention took place without Security Council authorisation and over the strong objections of Russia, China and numerous developing countries. Although the United Kingdom claimed a right of ‘unilateral’ (i.e. not Security Council-authorised) humanitarian intervention,16 the United States was more circumspect, referring repeatedly to ‘humanitarian concerns’ but never explicitly claiming a third exception to the prohibition on the use of force.17 Germany supported the NATO action but insisted it ‘must not be allowed to become a precedent’.18

The Kosovo War put proponents of human rights and humanitarian assistance in a difficult position. UN Secretary-General Kofi Annan’s initial reaction was to say: ‘Emerging slowly, but I believe surely, is an international norm against the violent repression of minorities that will and must take precedent over concerns of State sovereignty.’19 Following the war, the United Kingdom proposed a framework for a limited right of unilateral humanitarian intervention. According to the British criteria, armed force should only be used as a last resort, in the face of ‘an overwhelming humanitarian catastrophe, which the government has shown it is unwilling or unable to prevent or is actively promoting’. The force ‘should be proportionate to achieving the humanitarian purpose’, carried out ‘in accordance with international law’, and ‘collective’.20 But the Kosovo War did nothing to alleviate concerns about powerful states abusing any new right to intervene. In 1999 and 2000, the 133 developing states of the Group of 77 twice adopted declarations that unequivocally affirmed the illegality of humanitarian interventions not specifically authorised by the Security Council.21

This negative reaction was likely what caused Annan, later in 1999, to acknowledge that any norm of unilateral humanitarian intervention had not yet achieved legal status and could have undesirable consequences for the international order: ‘What is clear is that enforcement action without Security Council authorisation threatens the very core of the international security system founded on the Charter of the UN. Only the Charter provides a universally accepted legal basis for the use of force.’22

International Commission on Intervention and State Sovereignty (2001)

After the Kosovo War, the Canadian government established the International Commission on Intervention and State Sovereignty (ICISS) and charged it with finding ‘some new common ground’.23 However, a careful reading of the ICISS report, released in December 2001 and entitled ‘The Responsibility to Protect’, shows the commissioners failing to agree on the central issue of the use of force. Some passages seem to favour a right of humanitarian intervention in the absence of Security Council authorisation:

Based on our reading of state practice, Security Council precedent, established norms, emerging guiding principles, and evolving customary international law, the Commission believes that the Charter’s strong bias against military intervention is not to be regarded as absolute when decisive action is required on human protection grounds.24

Other passages lean the other way, albeit with a nod to the ‘Uniting for Peace’ Resolution adopted by the General Assembly in 1950:

As a matter of political reality, it would be impossible to find consensus…around any set of proposals for military intervention which acknowledge the validity of any intervention not authorized by the Security Council or General Assembly.25

In addition to coining the term ‘responsibility to protect’, the ICISS usefully expanded the focus of attention to include preventive and post-crisis measures. But it did little to resolve the controversy over unilateral humanitarian intervention, leaving that for states to decide.

Constitutive Act of the African Union (2002)

In 2002, the Organisation of African Unity renamed and reconstituted itself through the Constitutive Act of the African Union.26 Part of the reconstitution was a provision described by Dan Kuwali as ‘by and large, on all fours with the notion of R2P’.27 Article 4(h) asserts the ‘right of the Union to intervene in a Member State pursuant to a decision of the Assembly [of Heads of State and Government] in respect of grave circumstances, namely: war crimes, genocide and crimes against humanity’.28 Article 4(h) also implies that African Union member states do not consider themselves bound to obtain UN Security Council authorisation when using force collectively in response to such atrocities.29

Despite having faced some major human rights and humanitarian crises, the African Union has yet to invoke Article 4(h). Paul Williams has identified three possible reasons for this: ‘first, the strength of the host state; second, the residual power of the principles of non-interference and anti-imperialism within the African society of states; and third, the AU’s lack of practical military capacity for humanitarian intervention’.30 A fourth and equally important reason may be that, whenever the African Union has wished to intervene in a human rights or humanitarian crisis, the UN Security Council has provided a Chapter VII resolution.

There may well be a causal connection between the 2001 ICISS report and the Constitutive Act of the African Union, since the former preceded the latter by just six months. At the same time, the right asserted in Article 4(h) is entirely consistent with established international law because the member states of the African Union, when ratifying the Constitutive Act, consented to the new power.31 Article 4(h) is analogous to Chapter VII, where the powers of the Security Council are derived from the consent expressed by member states when ratifying the UN Charter. For this reason, Article 4(h) is not a precedent for unilateral humanitarian intervention, even if it does create a new, strictly regional, treaty-based exception to the prohibition on the use of force.

Iraq War (2003)

Again, Tony Blair has provided a worrisome example of how R2P could be abused. One year after the Iraq War, the British prime minister implied that a right of unilateral humanitarian intervention already existed in situations of ‘humanitarian catastrophe’:

It may well be that under international law as presently constituted, a regime can systematically brutalise and oppress its people and there is nothing anyone can do, when dialogue, diplomacy and even sanctions fail, unless it comes within the definition of a humanitarian catastrophe…32

He then invoked R2P in support of a right to intervene in less severe circumstances:

The essence of a community is common rights and responsibilities. We have obligations in relation to each other…[W]e do not accept in a community that others have a right to oppress and brutalise their people. We value the freedom and dignity of the human race and each individual in it. Emphatically I am not saying that every situation leads to military action. But…we surely have a responsibility to act when a nation’s people are subjected to a regime such as Saddam’s.33

Thus, a war that Blair had previously sought to justify with contested readings of Security Council resolutions was suddenly being rationalised with a concept that, as a possible legal basis for force, had already been widely rejected by most governments.34 This development was of pivotal importance for the future direction of R2P.

High-level Panel on Threats, Challenges and Change (2004)

After Blair’s invocation of R2P, many proponents of the concept refocused their efforts on addressing the problem of political will within the context of existing legal constraints. This adjustment was visible in a speech given to the UN General Assembly by Canadian Prime Minister Paul Martin in September 2004.35 Martin stressed that the ‘responsibility to protect is not a licence for intervention; it is an international guarantor of political accountability’. Although ‘customary international law is evolving to provide a solid basis in the building of a normative framework for collective humanitarian intervention’, this basis was not yet complete. Martin called for the Security Council to ‘establish new thresholds for when the international community judges that civilian populations face extreme threats’.

In December 2004, the UN Secretary-General’s High-level Panel on Threats, Challenges and Change reported that ‘the Council and the wider international community have come to accept that, under Chapter VII…it can always authorize military action to redress catastrophic internal wrongs if it is prepared to declare that the situation is a “threat to international peace and security”, not especially difficult when breaches of international law are involved’.36 With respect to R2P specifically, the Panel wrote:

There is a growing recognition that the issue is not the ‘right to intervene’ of any State, but the ‘responsibility to protect’ of every State when it comes to people suffering from avoidable catastrophe – mass murder and rape, ethnic cleansing by forcible expulsion and terror, and deliberate starvation and exposure to disease.37

The Panel stressed that this ‘emerging norm’ was – in terms of military intervention – only ‘exercisable by the Security Council’.38 It proposed ‘criteria of legitimacy’ for when force should be used: seriousness of intent, proper purpose, last resort, proportional means and balance of consequences.39 It recommended that these criteria be embodied in declaratory resolutions of the Security Council and General Assembly.40

Secretary-General’s Report and World Summit Outcome Document (2005)

In March 2005, Kofi Annan issued a report entitled ‘In Larger Freedom’ in which he endorsed R2P while affirming the Security Council’s monopoly on the use of force:

[I]f national authorities are unable or unwilling to protect their citizens, then the responsibility shifts to the international community to use diplomatic, humanitarian and other methods to help protect the human rights and well-being of civilian populations. When such methods appear insufficient, the Security Council may out of necessity decide to take action under the Charter of the United Nations, including enforcement action, if so required.41

Six months later, at the conclusion of the UN World Summit, the member states not only endorsed R2P; they declared themselves ‘prepared to take collective action…in a timely and decisive manner’.42 However, they also specified that any such action would take place ‘through the Security Council, in accordance with the Charter, including Chapter VII’, that it would only be ‘on a case-by-case basis’ and only ‘should peaceful means be inadequate and national authorities are manifestly failing to protect their populations from genocide, war crimes, ethnic cleansing and crimes against humanity’.

The inclusion of R2P in the World Summit Outcome Document was a significant development. At the same time, the role of the concept was deliberately limited by: (1) the reaffirmation of the exclusivity of Security Council decision-making;43 (2) the use of non-committal language such as ‘prepared’ and ‘on a case-by-case basis’; and (3) the raising of the ICISS threshold of ‘population suffering serious harm’ to ‘genocide, war crimes, ethnic cleansing, and crimes against humanity’. Moreover, the World Summit Outcome Document did not create any new rights, obligations or limitations for the Security Council, since the Council already had the discretionary power to authorise the use of force for the full range of human rights and humanitarian concerns. At most, the World Summit Outcome Document created a new point of political leverage, since proponents of action can now point to this collective statement of intent.

Security Council Resolution 1674 (2006)

In April 2006, the Security Council followed the recommendation of the High-level Panel by adopting a declaratory resolution. Resolution 1674 addresses numerous aspects of the ‘protection of civilians in armed conflict’, including R2P. Paragraph 4 ‘[r]eaffirms the provisions of paragraphs 138 and 139 of the World Summit Outcome Document regarding the responsibility to protect populations from genocide, war crimes, ethnic cleansing and crimes against humanity’.44 It thus confirms the Council’s post-Cold War practice of including human rights and humanitarian crises within the scope of possible determinations of ‘threats to the peace’. However, it does not signal or contribute to any change in international law, because the scope of the Council’s discretionary power is so very wide that, from a legal perspective, it might only be limited by jus cogens rules.45

The adoption of Resolution 1674 might increase the likelihood of the Security Council acting in situations of ‘genocide, war crimes, ethnic cleansing and crimes against humanity’, but only because its references to R2P and the World Summit Outcome Document give proponents of military action an additional point of political leverage. It is important to note that the Resolution does not include any criteria such as those recommended by the High-level Panel.46 Nor did the Council follow the lead of the General Assembly and declare it was ‘prepared to take collective action…in a timely and decisive manner’.47

The greatest challenge with respect to humanitarian and human rights crises remains generating the political will to act, which in the context of the Security Council means both adopting and implementing a resolution. That political will is required over both stages was demonstrated with respect to Darfur. In August 2006, after more than two years of atrocities, the Security Council finally used its Chapter VII powers to authorise the deployment of a UN peacekeeping force with a robust mandate to protect civilians.48 Resolution 1706 made an indirect reference to R2P by noting that Resolution 1674 ‘reaffirms inter alia the provisions of paragraphs 138 and 139 of the 2005 United Nations World Summit outcome document’.49 But most governments, instead of rushing to participate in this new and legally robust mission, either ignored the authorisation or cited commitments elsewhere.50

Security Council Resolution 1973 (Libya, 2011)

In March 2011, Libyan dictator Muammar Gaddafi used deadly force against peaceful protesters and threatened to show no mercy to the residents of rebel-held cities.51 The Security Council responded by adopting Resolution 1973 which provided two parallel authorisations to use force, the first of which was much broader than the second.52

In paragraph 4, the Council: ‘Authorizes Member States…to take all necessary measures…to protect civilians and civilian populated areas under threat of attack in the Libyan Arab Jamahiriya, including Benghazi, while excluding a foreign occupation force of any form on any part of Libyan territory’.

This first authorisation would cover a great deal of military activity, because ‘all necessary measures’ is the language normally used by the Council to grant full powers to intervening countries.53 Even the exclusion of a ‘foreign occupation force’ does not preclude the use of some ground forces, since ‘occupation’ is a technical term of international humanitarian law defined in the 1907 Hague Regulations: ‘Territory is considered occupied when it is actually placed under the authority of the hostile army. The occupation extends only to the territory where such authority has been established and can be exercised.’54

The second authorisation that deals with airspace is arguably redundant, because it concerns a measure that could also fall within the scope of ‘all necessary measures…to protect civilians and civilian populated areas’. It appears in paragraph 6 where the Council ‘Decides to establish a ban on all flights in the airspace of the Libyan Arab Jamahiriya in order to help protect civilians’, and in paragraph 8 where the Council ‘Authorizes Member States…to take all necessary measures to enforce compliance with the ban on flights imposed by paragraph 6 above, as necessary’.

Resolution 1973 does not endorse an expansive conception of R2P, with just one paragraph in the preamble making reference to it: ‘Reiterating the responsibility of the Libyan authorities to protect the Libyan population and reaffirming that parties to armed conflicts bear the primary responsibility to take all feasible steps to ensure the protection of civilians’.55 Apart from the word ‘primary’, there is nothing in the paragraph that suggests a responsibility to protect on the part of outside countries.

Nor does Resolution 1973 declare that any of the crimes identified by the World Summit Outcome Document as falling within the ambit of R2P are occurring. Although the resolution condemns ‘the gross and systematic violation of human rights, including arbitrary detentions, enforced disappearances, torture and summary executions’, it adopts a decidedly cautious stance as to these actually being crimes against humanity, ‘considering that the widespread and systematic attacks currently taking place in the Libyan Arab Jamahiriya against the civilian population may amount to crimes against humanity’.

Resolution 1973 is consistent with R2P insofar as it authorises the use of force for human rights purposes.56 But in terms of the development of R2P, Resolution 1973 proves only that the concept has become part of the context of Security Council deliberations. Of course, in some situations that role as context may still be significant.

Post-Libya consequences for R2P

There are those who believe that the evolution of R2P was set back by the controversy over NATO’s campaign in Libya, and that this reversal is evident in the lack of a meaningful response by the Security Council to the Syrian civil war.57 As Vitaly Churkin, Russia’s ambassador to the United Nations, has said:

The situation in Syria cannot be considered in the Council separately from the Libyan experience. The international community is alarmed by statements that compliance with Security Council resolutions on Libya in the NATO interpretation is a model for the future actions of NATO in implementing the responsibility to protect…58

However, the authorisations in Resolution 1973 gave space for different public positions concerning the permissible extent of force.59 This would not be the first time the Security Council has crafted a resolution with a view to providing room for divergent interpretations.60 The result is an intermediate zone on the legal–illegal spectrum of military action: between the legal and the illegal, there is now the deliberately arguable. One benefit of this grey zone is that it provides space for states to disagree in public while ‘agreeing to disagree’ in private. Another benefit may be that it creates a form of temporary, conditional permission that can harden into legality or illegality, depending on how contested facts are subsequently clarified – for instance, by the presence or absence of weapons of mass destruction, or the actual existence and scale of atrocities.

It is also significant that Resolution 1973 had the support of the Arab League. Indeed, the resolution refers explicitly to ‘the decision of the Council of the League of Arab States of 12 March 2011 to call for the imposition of a no-fly zone on Libyan military aviation, and to establish safe areas in places exposed to shelling as a precautionary measure that allows the protection of the Libyan people and foreign nationals residing in the Libyan Arab Jamahiriya’. The involvement of the Arab League made it politically difficult for China and Russia to cast their vetoes, and thus increased the incentive to agree on language that enabled the resolution to be interpreted in different ways.

The Arab League has also been active with respect to the Syrian crisis: suspending Syria’s membership of the League, imposing economic sanctions, pushing for a Security Council resolution that would have called on President Bashar al-Assad to step aside and proposing a UN-authorised peacekeeping mission.61 However, there are many factors associated with Security Council decision-making. In the case of Syria, complicating factors include its geographic location, the presence of Russian electronic intelligence-gathering and naval facilities and advanced air defences which would likely cause the loss of aircraft and pilots if any attempt was made to impose a no-fly zone.62

After a chemical-weapons attack in Damascus in August 2013, the United Kingdom, United States and France prepared for air strikes against the Syrian regime. Significantly, the term ‘responsibility to protect’ was largely absent from official statements concerning the legal basis for military action. The British government released a document setting out its legal position that stated, in part:

If action in the Security Council is blocked, the UK would still be permitted under international law to take exceptional measures in order to alleviate the scale of the overwhelming humanitarian catastrophe in Syria by deterring and disrupting the further use of chemical weapons by the Syrian regime. Such a legal basis is available, under the doctrine of humanitarian intervention, provided three conditions are met:

  1. (i) there is convincing evidence, generally accepted by the international community as a whole, of extreme humanitarian distress on a large scale, requiring immediate and urgent relief;

  2. (ii) it must be objectively clear that there is no practicable alternative to the use of force if lives are to be saved; and

  3. (iii) the proposed use of force must be necessary and proportionate to the aim of relief of humanitarian need and must be strictly limited in time and scope to this aim (i.e. the minimum necessary to achieve that end and for no other purpose).63

The British government’s position was similar to the framework it had proposed after the Kosovo War, without the requirements that the intervention be carried out ‘in accordance with international law’ and ‘collective’.64 For the purposes of this chapter, its relevance lies in the lack of any reference to R2P despite the emergence of that concept over the previous decade. It is also significant that the House of Commons rejected Prime Minister David Cameron’s call for military action, thus preventing any State practice from accompanying the opinio juris of the legal position.65

The US government also avoided any reference to R2P, focusing instead on the use of chemical weapons, which killed at most several thousand people, as compared to the 100,000 or more deaths caused in Syria by conventional arms. Secretary of State John Kerry stated that any military action would be ‘a limited and tailored response to ensure that a despot’s brutal and flagrant use of chemical weapons is held accountable’.66

Only French President François Hollande referred explicitly to R2P, saying that ‘[International law] is the best way of ensuring borders are respected, disputes are settled and collective security prevails. But international law must evolve with the times. It cannot be a pretext for allowing large-scale massacres to be perpetrated. This is why I recognise the principle of “the responsibility to protect” civilians, which the United Nations General Assembly voted for in 2005.’67 However, earlier in the same speech, Hollande made clear that the catalyst for any French military action was the use of chemical weapons, rather than the broader humanitarian crisis: ‘The international community cannot fail to react to the use of chemical weapons. France stands ready to punish those who took the appalling decision to gas innocent people.’68

These controversies over the implementation of Resolution 1973 in Libya and the legal bases for using force in Syria will eventually subside, for there is more pragmatism in international relations than the public statements of governments might indicate. The concept of R2P will survive, and have influence politically, even if it never changes the core legal prohibition on the use of force.

Legal status of R2P

Prior to Blair’s 2004 speech, much of the literature on R2P either continued the debate that had previously been framed as ‘unilateral humanitarian intervention’, or discussed the concept in the post-9/11 context of self-defence and preventive military action.69 But even before Blair’s demonstration of the potential for the abuse of R2P by powerful states, it was already apparent that the threshold for changing the prohibition on the use of force was unachievable. Both the widespread opposition of developing States and the jus cogens character of the prohibition rendered the idea of an R2P exception a non-starter in a legal system where rules are changed through the actions and opinions of nearly 200 states, and where a small number of rules are more deeply entrenched than the others.70 Gareth Evans, one of the ‘norm entrepreneurs’ behind R2P, has summarised the new consensus: ‘The 2005 General Assembly position was very clear that, when any country seeks to apply forceful means to address an R2P situation, it must do so through the Security Council…Vigilante justice is always dangerous.’71

This chapter could end here: with the conclusion that R2P, insofar as it concerns the use of force, is now limited to being part of the content of Security Council decision-making. However, it may prove useful to extend the analysis one step further, by examining whether R2P is having any influence on the margins of the prohibition on the use of force, and specifically on the rules proscribing the provision of aid, assistance, training, equipment and arms to rebels.72

Support for rebels

The prohibition on the use of force has long been understood to encompass the provision of aid, assistance, training, equipment and arms to rebels.73 In 1970, the UN General Assembly adopted the ‘Friendly Relations Resolution’ that encapsulated the rule in two paragraphs:

Every State has the duty to refrain from organizing, instigating, assisting or participating in acts of civil strife or terrorist acts in another State or acquiescing in organized activities within its territory directed towards the commission of such acts, when the acts referred to in the present paragraph involve a threat or use of force…

Also, no State shall organize, assist, foment, finance, incite or tolerate subversive, terrorist or armed activities directed towards the violent overthrow of the régime of another State, or interfere in civil strife in another State.74

Although the rule was often violated during the Cold War, as the two superpowers engaged in ‘proxy wars’, it was not altered by that contrary practice. One explanation for the lack of change is that support for rebels was usually provided covertly, and only overt actions can contribute to changing international law.75

The rule was affirmed in the 1986 Nicaragua case where the International Court of Justice found that the United States had illegally trained and equipped rebels.76 The Court addressed the possibility that the law might be different when rebels have a ‘particularly worthy’ cause:

[The Court] has to consider whether there might be indications of a practice illustrative of belief in a kind of general right for States to intervene, directly or indirectly, with or without armed force, in support of an internal opposition in another State, whose cause appeared particularly worthy by reason of the political and moral values with which it was identified. For such a general right to come into existence would involve a fundamental modification of the customary law principle of non-intervention.77

The Court went on to emphasise that, ‘for a new customary rule to be formed, not only must the acts concerned “amount to a settled practice”, but they must be accompanied by the opinio juris sive necessitatis’. In short, ‘[r]eliance by a State on a novel right or an unprecedented exception to the principle might, if shared in principle by other States, tend towards a modification of customary international law’, but only if States ‘justified their conduct by reference to a new right of intervention or a new exception to the principle of its prohibition’.78 The Court in the Nicaragua case found neither a settled practice nor evidence of opinio juris.

The end of the Cold War brought three developments that might have affected the rule. First, there was an increase in the practice of selling weapons to rebel groups, as arms producers, squeezed by a reduction in military spending by NATO and former Warsaw Pact countries, became less scrupulous about their buyers.79 Secondly, and as explained above, the Security Council expanded its conception of ‘threat to the peace’ to include human rights and humanitarian crises. Thirdly, a difficult debate about unilateral humanitarian intervention took place, which ultimately led to the ICISS reframing the issue as ‘responsibility to protect’.

The debate about unilateral humanitarian intervention has also spilled over into an academic debate over the permissibility of supplying weapons to rebels who are fighting to prevent atrocities.80 There are authors who support arms transfers based on an inherent right to self-defence against genocide,81 and those who accept the ‘normative legitimacy’ of such transfers but insist on the continued requirement of ‘some form of approval within the UN system’.82 But there has been little movement with respect to State practice and opinio juris, as an examination of some recent developments demonstrates.

Bosnia-Herzegovina

Bosnia-Herzegovina was recognised as an independent State before Iran began shipping weapons in 1994, in an effort to help the Bosnian government counter well-armed Serbian paramilitaries who were committing atrocities against civilians. As a result, the legal controversy that ensued was not over any possible infraction of the rule prohibiting arms shipments to rebels, but rather of the apparent violation of a UN arms embargo that had been imposed on both sides.

Nevertheless, the situation cast some light on whether – and how – the justness of a cause might matter to the legality of weapons shipments. When the Los Angeles Times reported that the United States had known about the Iranian shipments and failed to discourage them,83 the White House responded that it had ‘upheld the letter of the law and the requirements of the UN Security Council resolution’ imposing the embargo.84 But another newspaper reported an anonymous US official as saying: ‘Were we in a position to stop them? Not really. And was there sympathy for Bosnia here? The answer is, yes.’85

Libya

In February 2011, the Security Council imposed an arms embargo on Libya by way of paragraph 9 of Resolution 1970.86 One month later it adopted Resolution 1973, which authorised ‘all necessary measures, notwithstanding paragraph 9 of resolution 1970 (2011), to protect civilians and civilian populated areas’.87 This language can easily be interpreted as authorising the supply of weapons to the rebels, and arguably reflects something of a change in the international community’s attitude to providing such support. However, the ‘notwithstanding paragraph 9’ language in no way contributed to a change in the general rule because the authorisation was provided by the Security Council. The question, as to whether there has been any change in the rule outside of Chapter VII, remained unanswered.

Syria

In 2011–13, Syria was not subject to a UN arms embargo because Russia and China were opposed to such a measure. Syria thus provides an opportunity to examine whether the prohibition on providing aid, assistance, training, equipment and arms to rebels has been relaxed in parallel with (and perhaps as a consequence of) the development of international human rights and R2P. As we will see, a number of governments have been willing to openly provide aid, assistance and ‘non-lethal’ equipment to the Syrian rebels. But some of those governments have stopped short of providing arms, while others have only done so covertly.

In July 2012, Switzerland suspended arms exports to the United Arab Emirates after a Swiss-made hand grenade originally shipped to that country was found in Syria.88 The next month, Reuters reported that US President Barack Obama had ‘signed a secret order authorizing U.S. support for rebels seeking to depose Syrian President Bashar al-Assad and his government’ but that the United States was ‘stopping short of giving the rebels lethal weapons’.89 France also indicated that it would provide ‘non-lethal elements’ to the rebels, including ‘means of communication and protection’.90 And when British Foreign Secretary William Hague announced that his government would provide £5 million in non-lethal equipment to the Syrian opposition, he emphasised that the funding would go to ‘unarmed opposition groups, human rights activists and civilians’.91 In January 2013, when Hague announced that the United Kingdom was seeking modifications to EU sanctions on Syria ‘so that the possibility of additional assistance [to the rebels] is not closed off’,92 he indicated any military equipment provided would still be of a non-lethal character, such as body armour.93

This differentiation between the provision of aid, assistance, training and non-lethal equipment on the one hand, and weapons on the other, was consistent with another recent development in international politics. For it has become widely accepted that curtailing arms transfers to non-State groups is one of the most effective means of reducing long-term risks to civilians. This new acceptance has led to an Arms Trade Treaty that was adopted by the United Nations in April 2013.94 The treaty makes no exception for the provision of arms to rebels, not even those fighting to prevent atrocities, and ratifications of the treaty are now contributing important State practice to the prohibition against such transfers.95

Of course, weapons still find their way into rebel hands. In June 2012, the New York Times reported that CIA operatives in southern Turkey were helping to direct arms – paid for by Turkey, Saudi Arabia and Qatar – to Syrian opposition fighters.96 In January 2013, The Guardian reported that: ‘Along with Qatar, Turkey and the UAE, the Saudis are believed to be the rebels’ principal suppliers and financiers.’97 However, the latter report also observed that ‘public discussion of the issue is extremely rare and the demarcation between government and private initiatives is blurred’.

In other words, although there is State practice in support of providing arms to rebels, it is not accompanied by the opinio juris necessary to change a rule of customary international law, and certainly not one of jus cogens status that is set out in a foundational treaty such as the UN Charter.

Even the United States’ June 2013 decision to supply some of the Syria rebels with weapons is clouded with regards to its legal relevance. The decision was announced by a spokesman and not by the president or a cabinet member. Weapons were not specifically mentioned; instead, the spokesman simply said that the military aid would be ‘different in scope and scale to what we have provided before’. Moreover, the decision was explicitly linked to the Syria government’s use of chemical weapons, rather than the human suffering caused.98 As a result, the United States did not contribute substantially to the State practice and opinio juris in favour of relaxing the more general rule against providing arms to rebels. And of course the United States cannot change international law on its own; what matters, more than its actions, is how other countries respond.

For the moment, the situation has not changed from that described by former US State Department Legal Adviser John B. Bellinger III in January 2013:

The U.N. Charter prohibits member states from using force against or intervening in the internal affairs of other states unless authorized by the U.N. Security Council or justified by self-defense. These rules make it unlawful for any country to use direct military force against the Assad regime, including establishing ‘no-fly zones’ or providing arms to the Syrian opposition without Security Council approval.99

However, states are increasingly behaving as if the same general prohibition on the use of force no longer precludes the provision of aid, assistance, training and ‘non-lethal’ equipment to rebels – at least in cases where the rebels are fighting to prevent atrocities. States could also, in future, behave as if the general prohibition on the use of force no longer precludes the supply of arms to rebels who are fighting against a regime that uses chemical weapons. And to the degree these changes occur, they do so in parallel with, and perhaps partly as a result of, developments concerning international human rights that include the Security Council taking a broader approach to ‘threat to the peace’, as well as the emergence of R2P.

Role of R2P in contributing to mitigation

When a State feels compelled by humanitarian concerns to violate the prohibition on the use of force, the circumstances might be taken into account in mitigation. Mitigation is a concept familiar to international law. In the 1949 Corfu Channel case, when Albania took the United Kingdom to the International Court of Justice in circumstances where both countries had acted illegally, the Court held that a declaration of illegality was a sufficient remedy for the British violation.100 In 1960, after Israel abducted Adolf Eichmann from Argentina to face criminal charges, Argentina lodged a complaint with the Security Council, which passed a resolution stating that the sovereignty of Argentina had been infringed and requesting Israel to make ‘appropriate reparation’.101 However the Council, ‘mindful’ of ‘the concern of people in all countries that Eichmann be brought to justice’, made no indication that Eichmann should be returned to Argentina.102

Shortly after the Kosovo War, Simon Chesterman and I wrote:

In accordance with such an approach, the human rights violations that prompted a unilateral humanitarian intervention would have to be considered, and to some degree weighed against the actions of the intervening state, in any determination as to whether compensation for violating the rules concerning the use of force is required. Given the fundamental character of the rights violated when mass atrocities occur…the intervening state might fare quite well in any such after-the-fact balancing of relative violations.103

Since then, the development of R2P has introduced criteria that might guide the Security Council and individual states on the appropriateness and degree of mitigation. Resolution 1674 identified that ‘genocide, war crimes, ethnic cleansing and crimes against humanity’ are of particular concern to the Council, and therefore most likely to trigger an authorised intervention.104 The paragraphs on R2P in the World Summit Outcome Document, which were ‘reaffirmed’ in Resolution 1674, specified that an intervention may only be contemplated ‘should peaceful means be inadequate and national authorities are manifestly failing to protect their populations’.105 And while the report of the High-level Panel on Threats, Challenges and Change was not explicitly endorsed by the Security Council or General Assembly, its ‘criteria of legitimacy’ – seriousness of intent, proper purpose, last resort, proportional means and balance of consequences – might be considered by the Council and individual states as they decide how to respond to another State’s violation of the prohibition on force.106

Mitigation itself could come in the form of ex post facto authorisation from the Security Council, and it is instructive that such authorisation was granted with respect to the ECOWAS interventions in Liberia and Sierra Leone but not the US-led interventions in Kosovo or Iraq.107 It could also come in the form of a waiver or reduction of reparations owed, a possibility foreseen in Article 39 of the International Law Commission’s Articles on State Responsibility: ‘In the determination of reparation, account shall be taken of the contribution to the injury by wilful or negligent action or omission of the injured State or any person or entity in relation to whom reparation is sought.’108

Mitigation may already be happening with respect to transfers of weapons to rebels. As was explained above, such transfers are generally covert, and covert actions cannot make or change international law.109 However, to the degree such transfers are known to be happening, as in Syria, they now attract little reprobation from other states – if and when they are directed at rebels who are fighting to prevent atrocities. One can therefore speculate that, instead of changing the rule to accommodate the exception, the international community is simply choosing to ignore or at least downplay particular violations.

Implications for the international legal system

The on-going development of R2P offers a number of insights into the international legal system. First, ‘norm entrepreneurs’ who act strategically and persistently can have a significant influence on the framing of debates concerning specific issues of international law.

Secondly, such efforts can be interrupted by unanticipated events, including attempts to distort or hijack the norm by other actors.

Thirdly, unanticipated events can necessitate compromise and redirection, which in the case of R2P has involved the limitation of the concept, insofar as it concerns the use of force, to being part of the context of Security Council decision-making.

Fourthly, compromise and redirection may also result when ‘norm entrepreneurs’ realise that some aspects of the international legal system, such as the prohibition on the use of force, are deeply imbedded and therefore highly resistant to change. This is not to say that ICISS members were naïve about the existence of jus cogens rules or the necessity for widespread support from the developing world for any change. Strategically, it is sometimes useful to set one’s public goals higher than the results one realistically hopes to achieve. For this reason, acceptance of R2P as relevant context for Security Council decision-making has to be considered a victory, even if some proponents of the concept remain dissatisfied.110

Fifthly, the failure of ‘norm entrepreneurs’ to change a rule does not necessarily mean that they have failed to influence associated or derivative aspects of the legal system. In the case of R2P and the prohibition on the use of force, the failure to change the rule concerning military interventions has not precluded a possible change to the same rule as it applies to the provision of aid, assistance, training and non-lethal equipment to rebels fighting to prevent atrocities, and perhaps even of weapons. Practitioners and scholars of international law would be wise to pay attention, not just to the central aspect of any rule, but also to its often-more-mutable margins.

Finally, the effects of ‘norm entrepreneurship’ can include changes that are additional or alternative to changes to rules. In the case of R2P, both as it concerns unilateral humanitarian intervention and the provision of arms to rebels, it is important to consider whether the development of the concept will lead to increased mitigation of the consequences – for States whose moral compulsion to violate international law is both genuinely felt and well-founded.

In the future, R2P may lead to more changes in the international legal system. But instead of beginning at the core of the prohibition on the use of force, the changes will most likely commence at the margins. International law is often like that, moving forward sideways.

1 Tony Blair, ‘The Global Threat of Terrorism’, speech, Sedgefield, 5 March 2004, BBC News, full text available at http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/3536131.stm.

2 On norm entrepreneurs, see Martha Finnemore and Kathryn Sikkink, ‘International Norm Dynamics and Political Change’, International Organization, 52 (1998), 887; Margaret Keck and Kathryn Sikkink, Activists Beyond Borders: Advocacy Networks in International Politics (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1998); Ian Johnstone, ‘The Secretary-General as Norm Entrepreneur’ in Simon Chesterman (ed.), Secretary or General?: The UN Secretary-General in World Politics (Cambridge University Press, 2007), 123.

3 The broader aspects of R2P are well-documented elsewhere. See e.g. Gareth Evans, The Responsibility to Protect: Ending Mass Atrocity Crimes Once and For All (Washington, DC: Brookings Institution, 2008); Ramesh Thakur, The Responsibility to Protect: Norms, Laws, and the Use of Force in International Politics (London: Routledge, 2011).

4 Art. 2(4), UN Charter (San Francisco, adopted 26 June 1945, entered into force 24 October 1945), 1 UNTS XVI.

5 Art. 31, Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties (Vienna, adopted 22 May 1969, entered into force 27 January 1980), 1155 UNTS 331. The Vienna Convention codified the customary international law of treaty interpretation, as to which see Lord McNair, The Law of Treaties (Oxford University Press, 1961), 366–82.

6 UN Charter.

7 SC Res. 221, 9 April 1966.

8 SC Res. 733, 23 January 1992.

9 SC Res. 755, 28 August 1992.

10 SC Res. 794, 3 December 1992.

11 SC Res. 743, 21 February 1992.

12 SC Res. 819, 16 April 1993.

13 SC Res. 836, 4 June 1993.

14 Central Intelligence Agency, ‘National Intelligence Daily’, 23 April 2004, available at www.gwu.edu/~nsarchiv/NSAEBB/NSAEBB117/Rw34.pdf.

15 Linda Melvern, A People Betrayed: The Role of the West in Rwanda’s Genocide (London: Zed Books, 2000), 180.

16 See Sir Jeremy Greenstock, UK Permanent Representative to the UN, statement to the Security Council on 24 March 1999, UN Doc. S/PV.3988, 11–12, reproduced in British Yearbook of International Law, 70 (1999), 580–1. See also ‘Fourth Report of the House of Commons Foreign Affairs Committee’, (2000) HC-28-I, which points out that the UK government justified humanitarian intervention only ‘as an exceptional measure in support of purposes laid down by the UN Security Council…where that is the only means to avert an immediate and overwhelming humanitarian catastrophe’.

17 See e.g. ‘In the President’s Words: “We Act to Prevent a Wider War”’, New York Times, 25 March 1999, A15. After the war, Secretary of State Madeleine Albright stressed that Kosovo was ‘a unique situation sui generis in the region of the Balkans’ and that it was important ‘not to overdraw the various lessons that come out of it’. Press conference with Russian Foreign Minister Igor Ivanov, Singapore, 26 July 1999, cited in vol. II of the ICISS report, ‘The Responsibility to Protect’ (Ottawa: International Development Research Centre, 2002), 128.

18 Foreign Minister Klaus Kinkel said: ‘With their decision, NATO states did not intend to create any new legal instrument that could ground a general power of authority of NATO for intervention. The NATO decision must not be allowed to become a precedent. We must not enter onto a slippery slope with respect to the Security Council’s monopoly on the use of force.’ Deutscher Bundestag, Plenarprotokoll 13/248, 16 October 1998, 23129 (author’s translation). German original available at http://dip21.bundestag.de/dip21/btp/13/13248.asc.

19 Kofi Annan, ‘No Government Has the Right to Hide Behind National Sovereignty in Order to Violate Human Rights’, The Guardian, 7 April 1999, available at www.guardian.co.uk/world/1999/apr/07/balkans.unitednations.

20 Foreign Secretary Robin Cook, ‘Speech to the American Bar Association, 19 July 2000’, British Yearbook of International Law, 71 (2000), 646.

21 See Ministerial Declaration, 23rd Annual Meeting of the Ministers for Foreign Affairs of the Group of 77, 24 September 1999, para. 69, available at www.g77.org/doc/Decl1999.html; Declaration of the Group of 77 South Summit, Havana, Cuba, 10–14 April 2000, para. 54, available at www.g77.org/doc/docs/summitfinaldocs_english.pdf.

22 Kofi Annan, ‘Preventing War and Disaster’ (United Nations: Annual report on the work of the Organization, 1999), 8, para. 66, UN Doc. A/54/1.

23 ICISS, ‘The Responsibility to Protect’, I, vii.

24 Ibid., 16, para. 2.27.

25 Ibid., 54–5, para. 6.36. On ‘Uniting for Peace’ see UNGA Res. A-RES-377(V) (3 November 1950); and Dominik Zaum, ‘The Security Council, the General Assembly and War: The Uniting for Peace Resolution’ in Vaughan Loweet al. (eds.), The United Nations Security Council and War: The Evolution of Thought and Practice since 1945 (Oxford University Press, 2008), 154.

26 Constitutive Act of the African Union, 11 July 2002, OAU Doc. CAB/LEG/23.15.

27 Dan Kuwali, ‘The End of Humanitarian Intervention: Evaluation of the African Union’s Right of Intervention’, African Journal on Conflict Resolution, 9 (2009), 48.

28 In 2003, the adoption of a ‘Protocol Relating to the Establishment of the Peace and Security Council of the African Union’ provided an implementing mechanism for decisions to intervene taken by the Assembly. Available at: www.africa-union.org/root/au/organs/psc/Protocol_peace%20and%20security.pdf.

29 Art. 17(1) of the Protocol (ibid.) reads: ‘In the fulfillment of its mandate in the promotion and maintenance of peace, security and stability in Africa, the Peace and Security Council shall cooperate and work closely with the United Nations Security Council, which has the primary responsibility for the maintenance of international peace and security.’ Nothing in the words ‘cooperate and work closely with’ or ‘primary responsibility’ implies a relationship of legal dependence.

30 Paul D. Williams, ‘The African Union’s Conflict Management Capabilities’, Council on Foreign Relations, October 2011, 5, available at www.cfr.org/content/publications/attachments/IIGG_WorkingPaper7.pdf.

31 See similarly Kuwali, ‘The End of Humanitarian Intervention’, 45–6.

32 Blair, ‘The Global Threat of Terrorism’ (emphasis added).

34 Russian Foreign Minister Sergey Lavrov likewise invoked the term ‘responsibility to protect’ to justify the invasion of Georgia in 2008, but it is clear that he was referring to a principle in Russian domestic law concerning the duty of the Russian government to protect its citizens. See ‘Interview by Minister of Foreign Affairs of the Russian Federation Sergey Lavrov to BBC’, Moscow, 9 August 2008, available at www.un.int/russia/new/MainRoot/docs/off_news/090808/newen2.htm.

35 ‘Address by Prime Minister Paul Martin at the United Nations’, 21 September 2004, available at http://news.gc.ca/web/article.

36 ‘A More Secure World: Our Shared Responsibility’, Report of the High-level Panel on Threats, Challenges and Change, 2 December 2004, UN Doc. A/59/565, 57, para. 202.

37 Ibid., 56–7, para. 201.

38 Ibid., 57, para. 203.

39 Ibid., 57–8, para. 207.

40 Ibid., 58, para. 208.

41 ‘In Larger Freedom: Towards Development, Security and Human Rights for All’, Report of the Secretary-General, 21 March 2005, UN Doc. A/59/2005, paras. 132 and 135.

42 ‘World Summit Outcome Document’, 15 September 2005, paras. 138 and 139, available at www.un.org/summit2005/documents.html.

43 That said, Carsten Stahn has argued that ‘states did not categorically reject the option of (individual or collective) unilateral action in the Outcome Document. This discrepancy leaves some leeway to argue that the concept of responsibility to protect is not meant to rule out such action in the future.’ Carsten Stahn, ‘Responsibility to Protect: Political Rhetoric or Emerging Legal Norm?’, American Journal of International Law, 101 (2007), 120. However, as a general principle of interpretation, a text’s silence on any particular issue does not imply a gap.

44 SC Res. 1674, 28 April 2006.

45 See Application of the Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide (Bosnia and Herzegovina v. Serbia and Montenegro), Order of 13 September 1993, 440, para. 100 (Separate Opinion of Judge ad hoc Elihu Lauterpacht). In the Tadić case, the International Criminal Tribunal for the Former Yugoslavia wrote: ‘the determination that there exists such a threat [to the peace] is not a totally unfettered discretion, as it has to remain, at the very least, within the limits of the Purposes and Principles of the Charter’. However, the tribunal went on to note that ‘the practice of the Security Council is rich with cases of civil war or internal strife which it classified as a “threat to the peace” and dealt with under Chapter VII, with the encouragement or even at the behest of the General Assembly’. Prosecutor v. Duško Tadić (Decision on the Defence Motion for Interlocutory Appeal on Jurisdiction), Case No. IT-94–1, ICTY Appeals Chamber, Judgment, 2 October 1995.

46 See discussion, n. 39.

47 ‘World Summit Outcome Document’.

48 In para. 12 of Resolution 1706, adopted on 31 August 2006, the Security Council, ‘Acting under Chapter VII of the Charter of the United Nations: (a) Decides that UNMIS is authorized to use all necessary means, in the areas of deployment of its forces and as it deems within its capabilities…to protect civilians under threat of physical violence …’

50 See e.g. ‘UN Force for Darfur Takes Shape’, New York Times, 1 August 2007, available at www.nytimes.com/2007/08/01/world/africa/01iht-darfur.4.6942617.html?_r=0.

51 In one TV broadcast, Gaddafi told the residents of Benghazi to lay down their arms; otherwise, he warned, his troops would come that night and ‘find you in your closets; we will have no mercy and no pity’. Dan Bilefsky and Mark Landler, ‘As U.N. Backs Military Action in Libya, U.S. Role Is Unclear’, New York Times, 17 March 2011, available at www.nytimes.com/2011/03/18/world/africa/18nations.html.

52 SC Res. 1973, 17 March 2011.

53 Of course, all military actions remain subject to the rules of international humanitarian law, including those set out in the 1949 Geneva Conventions and 1977 Additional Protocols.

54 Art. 42, Hague Regulations concerning the Laws and Customs of War on Land, as annexed to the 1907 Convention (IV) respecting the Laws and Customs of War on Land (The Hague, adopted 18 October 1907, entered into force 26 January 2010), 205 CTS 277.

55 Similar references appear in the preambles of SC Res. 1975, 30 March 2011 (Côte d’Ivoire), SC Res. 1996, 8 July 2011 (South Sudan) and SC Res. 2014, 21 October 2011 (Yemen).

56 That human rights were the principal motivating factor behind Resolution 1973 is supported by the fact that, at the time of the intervention, the Libyan regime posed no threat to other countries. Gaddafi forswore his nuclear and chemical weapons programmes in 2003 and was removed from the US list of state sponsors of terror in 2006.

57 See e.g. Gareth Evans, Ramesh Thakur and Robert A. Pape, ‘Humanitarian Intervention and the Responsibility to Protect (R2P)’, International Security, 37 (2013), 206 (‘[T]he R2P consensus underpinning Resolution 1973 fell apart over the course of 2011, damaged by gaps in expectation, communication, and accountability between those who mandated the operation and those who executed it.’); Spencer Zifcak, ‘The Responsibility to Protect after Libya and Syria’, Melbourne Journal of International Law, 13 (2012), 1; Noele Crossley, ‘The Responsibility to Protect in 2012: R2P Fails in Syria, Brazil’s “RWP” Emerges’, Global Policy Journal blog, 28 December 2012, available at www.globalpolicyjournal.com/blog/28/12/2012/.

58 UN SCOR, 66th Session, 6627th Meeting, UN Doc. S/PV.6627 (4 October 2011), 4.

59 As Hugh Roberts writes, ‘Those who subsequently said that they did not know that regime change had been authorised either did not understand the logic of events or were pretending to misunderstand in order to excuse their failure to oppose it.’ Hugh Roberts, ‘Who Said Gaddafi Had to Go?’, 33, London Review of Books, 17 November 2011.

60 Michael Byers, ‘Agreeing to Disagree: Security Council Resolution 1441 and Intentional Ambiguity’, Global Governance, 10 (2004), 165.

61 ‘The League and Syria’ in ‘Times Topics: Arab League’, New York Times website, available at http://topics.nytimes.com/topics/reference/timestopics/organizations/a/arab_league/index.html.

62 Julian Borger, ‘Russian Military Presence in Syria Poses Challenge to US-led Intervention’, The Guardian, 23 December 2012, available at www.guardian.co.uk/world/2012/dec/23/syria-crisis-russian-military-presence.

63 ‘Chemical Weapon Use by Syrian Regime – UK Government Legal Position’, 29 August 2013, available at www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/235098/.

64 Foreign Secretary Robin Cook, ‘Speech to the American Bar Association, 19 July 2000’.

65 Andrew Grice, ‘David Cameron’s Plans for Military Action in Syria Shot Down in Dramatic Commons Vote’, The Independent, 30 August 2013, available at www.independent.co.uk/news/uk/politics/david-camerons-plans-for-military-action-in-syria-shot-down-in-dramatic-commons-vote-8788612.html.

66 Secretary of State John Kerry, ‘Statement on Syria’, 30 August 2013, available at www.state.gov/secretary/remarks/2013/08/213668.htm.

67 ‘21st Ambassadors’ Conference – Speech by François Hollande’, 27 August 2013, available at www.diplomatie.gouv.fr/en/the-ministry-158/events-5815/article/21st-ambassadors-conference-speech.

69 See, perhaps most problematically, Lee Feinstein and Anne-Marie Slaughter, ‘A Duty to Prevent’, Foreign Affairs, 83 (2004), 136.

70 See Michael Byers and Simon Chesterman, ‘Changing the Rules about Rules? Unilateral Humanitarian Intervention and the Future of International Law’ in J. L. Holzgrefe and Robert O. Keohane (eds.), Humanitarian Intervention: Ethical, Legal and Political Dilemmas (Cambridge University Press, 2003), 183–4.

71 Gareth Evans, ‘Russia and the ‘Responsibility to Protect’, Los Angeles Times, 31 August 2008, available at http://www.latimes.com/la-oe-evans31-2008aug31-story.html.

72 As the International Court of Justice explained in the Nicaragua case, it is sometimes necessary ‘to distinguish the most grave forms of the use of force (those constituting an armed attack) from other less grave forms’. Military and Paramilitary Activities in and against Nicaragua (Nicaragua v. US), Judgment, 27 June 1986, ICJ Reports (1986), 101, para. 191.

73 See Ian Brownlie, International Law and the Use of Force by States (Oxford University Press, 1963), 70–1. The only possible and controversial exception to this ban has concerned the provision of support to groups engaged in wars of ‘national liberation’. For example, in 1981 the UN General Assembly appealed ‘to all States to provide all necessary humanitarian, educational, financial and other necessary assistance to the oppressed people of South Africa and their national liberation movement in their legitimate struggle’. GA Res. 36/172 (1981), para. 16.

74 Declaration on Principles of International Law concerning Friendly Relations and Co-operation Among States in Accordance with the Charter of the United Nations, GA Res. 2625 (XXV) (1970).

75 See Anthony D’Amato, The Concept of Custom in International Law (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1971), 469, where the author writes, with respect to the widespread use of torture by states, that the ‘objective evidence shows hiding, cover-up, minimization, and non-justification – all the things that betoken a violation of the law’.

76 Nicaragua case.

77 Ibid., 108, para. 206.

78 Ibid., 108–9, para. 206.

79 See Joanna Spear, ‘Arms Limitations, Confidence-building Measures, and Internal Conflict’ in Michael Edward Brown (ed.), The International Dimensions of Internal Conflict (Cambridge, MA: Center for Science and International Affairs, 1996), 383.

80 See Frederic Mégret, ‘Beyond the “Salvation” Paradigm: Responsibility to Protect (Others) vs the Power of Protecting Oneself’, Security Dialogue, 40 (2009), 575.

81 Daniel D. Polsby and Don B. Kates, ‘Of Holocausts and Gun Control’, Washington University Law Quarterly, 75 (1997), 1237.

82 Kenneth D. Heath, ‘Could We Have Armed the Kosovo Liberation Army: The New Norms Governing Intervention in Civil War’, UCLA Journal of International Law and Foreign Affairs, 4 (1999–2000), 259.

83 James Risen and Doyle McManus, ‘U.S. OKd Iranian Arms for Bosnia, Officials Say’, Los Angeles Times, 5 April 1996, available at http://articles.latimes.com/1996-04-05/news/mn-55275_1_iranian-arms-shipments.

84 James Risen, ‘Administration Defends its OK of Bosnia Arms’, Los Angeles Times, 6 April 1996, available at http://articles.latimes.com/1996-04-06/news/mn-55492_1_arms-embargo.

85 Rupert Cornwell, ‘US “Secretly Agreed Iran Arms for Bosnia”’, The Independent, 6 April 1996, available at www.independent.co.uk/news/world/us-secretly-agreed-iran-arms-for-bosnia-1303474.html.

86 SC Res. 1970, 26 February 2011.

87 SC Res. 1973, para. 4 (emphasis added).

88 ‘Switzerland Halts Arms Exports to UAE, as Report says Swiss Arms Used by Syria Rebels’, Haaretz and Reuters, 5 July 2012, available at www.haaretz.com/news/middle-east/switzerland-halts-arms-exports-to-u-a-e-as-report-says-swiss-arms-used-by-syria-rebels-1.449022.

89 Mark Hosenball, ‘Exclusive: Obama Authorizes Secret U.S. Support for Syrian Rebels’, Reuters, 1 August 2012, available at www.reuters.com/article/2012/08/01/us-usa-syria-obama-order-idUSBRE8701OK20120801.

90 ‘France Gives Non-lethal Military Aid to Syrian Opposition: PM’, Al Arabiya News, 22 August 2012, available at: http://english.alarabiya.net/articles/2012/08/22/233570.html.

91 ‘Syria Conflict: UK to Give Extra £5m to Opposition Groups’, BBC News, 10 August 2012, available at www.bbc.co.uk/news/uk-19205204.

92 ‘Hague: “Options Open” on Military Support for Syrian Rebels’, BBC News, 10 January 2013, available at www.bbc.co.uk/news/uk-politics-20969386.

94 Arms Trade Treaty (New York, adopted 2 April 2013, not yet in force).

95 On the role of treaties as state practice, see Richard Baxter, ‘Treaties and Custom’, Recueil des Cours, 129 (1970-I), 25; D’Amato, The Concept of Custom in International Law, 89–90 and 160; Mark Villiger, Customary International Law and Treaties (Dordrecht: Martinus Nijhoff, 1985).

96 Eric Schmitt, ‘C.I.A. Said to Aid in Steering Arms to Syrian Opposition’, New York Times, 21 June 2012, available at www.nytimes.com/2012/06/21/world/middleeast/cia-said-to-aid-in-steering-arms-to-syrian-rebels.html.

97 Ian Black, ‘Arm Syrian Rebels to Contain Jihadis, says Saudi Royal’, The Guardian, 25 January 2013, available at www.guardian.co.uk/world/2013/jan/25/arm-syrian-rebels-jihadis-saudi.

98 Mark Mazzetti, Michael R. Gordon and Mark Landler, ‘U.S. Is Said to Plan to Send Weapons to Syrian Rebels’, New York Times, 13 June 2013, available at www.nytimes.com/2013/06/14/world/middleeast/syria-chemical-weapons.html.

99 John B. Bellinger III, ‘U.N. Rules and Syrian Intervention’, Washington Post, 17 January 2013, available at http://articles.washingtonpost.com/2013–01–17/opinions/36410395_1_syrian-opposition-assad-regime-intervention.

100 Corfu Channel (United Kingdom v. Albania), Judgment, 9 April 1949, ICJ Reports (1949), 4, 36.

101 SC Res. 138, 23 June 1960.

102 Ibid.

103 Byers and Chesterman, ‘Changing the Rules about Rules?’, 200–1.

104 See discussion, nn. 445.

105 See discussion, nn. 423.

106 See discussion, nn. 369.

107 See SC Res. 788 and 866, 19 November 1992 and 22 September 1993 (Liberia) and 1181, 13 July 1998 (Sierra Leone).

108 James Crawford, The International Law Commission’s Articles on State Responsibility: Introduction, Text and Commentaries (Cambridge University Press, 2002).

109 See discussion, nn. 758.

110 See e.g. the International Coalition for the Responsibility to Protect, a coalition of forty-nine NGOs which includes the following ‘essential element’ in its ‘common understanding’ of R2P: ‘when a state “manifestly fails” in its protection responsibilities, and peaceful means are inadequate, the international community must take stronger measures including Chapter VII measures under the UN Charter, including but not limited to the collective use of force authorized by the Security Council’. Available at www.responsibilitytoprotect.org/index.php/about-coalition/our-understanding-of-rtop (emphasis added).

3 Human rights beyond borders at the World Court

Ralph Wilde *

Introduction

It was an immense privilege, pleasure and honour to work as a research assistant for, and then be supervised as a doctoral student by, James Crawford. Whereas the opportunity to contribute to a volume in tribute to him by some of his former doctoral students follows from that, it has its own special significance. The passage of time since those days has deepened the sense of great fortune one feels at having had the opportunity of sustained and deep contact, at a particularly formative period in one’s life, with someone capable of having such a tremendously positive personal impact. One is reminded by the inevitable ups and downs of life that things could easily have been very different, and so how precious, in the light of that, the experience then was. James was frank, honest, unsparing in criticism, unwaveringly supportive, fair and sensible. He always gave one the impression of considerable faith in and commitment to one’s ability and merit and, when I felt that this was unwarranted, it made me raise my game.

More personally, for me as a British person from a family where no one had previously stayed at school beyond the age of sixteen, James’s lack of pretention and absence of grandness, and his exclusive focus on aspirations to merit and excellence, were of immense significance. To have a Cambridge experience that enabled me to move further away from, not closer to, the horrors of the British class system is a mark of the positive significance of James’s personal character and the especially beneficial impact of that on the university in general and his students and colleagues in particular. The atmosphere at the Lauterpacht Centre for International Law under his tenure was, I now see, a model of collegiality, with people working in very different roles in an atmosphere marked by a remarkably unhierarchical, friendly and mutually supportive tone. My memories of that time combine stimulating work challenges and inspiring lectures and discussions with the warmth, fun and friendship of the regular morning coffee meetings, lunches, dinners, barbecues and parties.

In paying tribute to James, I offer a critical evaluation of the significance of the International Court of Justice’s (ICJ) express pronouncements on the extraterritorial application of human rights treaties in the context of determinations on this area of law by other courts and tribunals. These pronouncements were made in three decisions: the Wall Advisory Opinion of 2004; the 2005 Judgment in the DRC v. Uganda case; and the 2008 Provisional Measures Order in the Georgia v. Russia case.1 As will be discussed, the significance of these pronouncements to the law on the extraterritorial application of human rights law built on a statement in the Court’s Namibia Advisory Opinion from decades earlier, 1971.2 Although not about this area of law as such, that statement can nonetheless be regarded as foundational to how the law is now understood. This piece forms part of a body of scholarship on the broader issue of the ICJ and international human rights law.3

There are certain direct connections between some of these cases and James Crawford. He was counsel for Palestine in the Wall advisory proceedings and for Georgia in Georgia v. Russia. The position of these two States on the topic at issue in the present chapter – whether or not certain human rights treaties apply extraterritorially – prevailed and was endorsed by the Court in the decisions under evaluation. The Namibia Advisory Opinion dates of course from a different era, but even here there are significant links. The year it was issued, 1971, was the same one that James was awarded his joint honours LLB-BA degrees from Adelaide University. The Namibia Opinion constitutes a landmark not only, as will be argued, on the present topic of the extraterritorial application of human rights law, but also more generally on the law of self-determination (not unconnected), a subject on which that graduate of the same year went on to become one of the leading, if not the leading, academic authorities.

More broadly, the topic of this chapter, and James’s intellectual career, challenge the banal generalist/specialist distinction that has arisen in the context of the massive increase in the range and depth of international law that, indeed, one might also say has occurred since 1971 – a further trend that links the topic to the person. Just as James, the quintessential ‘generalist’, has made seminal contributions in every ‘specialist’ area of law he has engaged with (of course one cannot hope to appreciate the specific without a complete, authoritative understanding of the general) it will be suggested that the ICJ’s pronouncements on this area of law are just as, and in some cases more, significant than what has been said by specialist human rights bodies. There is a further, more basic but still significant, stylistic link in the importance of brief, pithy remarks that convey a depth of authority, significance and, ultimately, merit.

The contested issue and treaty law framework on extraterritoriality

The Court’s determinations on the question of the extraterritorial application of human rights treaty law obligations were made at the time when this question was highly contested.4 The entry-level matter of the very applicability of the obligations themselves – as distinct from consequential questions, such as what they would mean were they to apply, or how this meaning would be mediated by the interplay with other applicable law – was disputed.5 Such a situation was possible in part because the relevant provisions of the treaties contain terminology on applicability that lack a clear indication of spatial scope.

Some of the main treaties addressing civil and political rights, the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (ICCPR), the American Convention on Human Rights (ACHR) and the European Convention on Human Rights (ECHR) and their Protocols, the Convention Against Torture (CAT), as well as the Convention on the Rights of the Child (CRC), which also covers economic, social and cultural rights, conceive obligations as operating in the State’s ‘jurisdiction’. Under the ECHR (and some of its Protocols) and the ACHR, the State is obliged to ‘secure’ the rights contained in the treaty within its ‘jurisdiction’.6 Under the CAT, the State is obliged to take measures to prevent acts of torture ‘in any territory under its jurisdiction’.7 Under the CRC, States parties are obliged to ‘respect and ensure’ the rights in the treaty to ‘each child within their jurisdiction’.8 The ICCPR formulation is slightly different from the others in that applicability operates in relation to those ‘within [the State’s] territory and subject to its jurisdiction’.9

Thus a nexus to the State – termed ‘jurisdiction’ – has to be established before the State’s obligations are in play (the significance of the separate reference to ‘territory’ in the ICCPR will be addressed below).

Certain other international human rights instruments do not contain a general provision, whether using the term ‘jurisdiction’ or some other equivalent expression, stipulating the scope of applicability of the obligations they contain: the 1948 (Inter-)American Declaration of the Rights and Duties of Man (not a treaty), the 1981 African Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights, the 1965 International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination (CERD), the 1979 International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination Against Women (CEDAW) and the Optional Protocol to the Convention on the Rights of the Child on the Involvement of Children in Armed Conflict of 2000.10 That said, as far as the Inter-American Declaration is concerned, the Inter-American Commission on Human Rights has treated the instrument as if it does contain the ‘jurisdiction’ trigger, without any explanation for this assumption.11

The obligation to secure the economic, social and cultural rights contained in the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights (ICESCR) does not include a dedicated stipulation concerning spatial applicability. The relevant provision simply obliges parties ‘to take steps, individually and through international assistance and co-operation…with a view to achieving progressively the full realization of the rights recognized in the present Covenant’.12

The vagueness of the provisions in the instruments reviewed enables the scope of their spatial applicability to be easily disputed. ‘Jurisdiction’ could be regarded as a synonym for presence in sovereign territory only, thereby ruling out extraterritorial applicability. Alternatively, it could be defined in some way that includes, but is not limited to, a State’s presence in its sovereign territory, but is defined in a manner that only covers a subset of extraterritorial activities (for instance, requiring a certain level of control), thereby creating the possibility for disagreements over which activities are covered. ‘Free-standing’ obligations could be regarded as operating in any spatial zone in which the State is present, or, alternatively, a claim could be made that a limitation to sovereign territory should be read into them.

Decisions by other bodies and the Court

By the time the ICJ came to pronounce upon the extraterritorial applicability of certain of the aforementioned human rights treaties, there were already other decisions (judicial, quasi-judicial, advisory) on the topic, and the process of overlapping deliberations continued during the period in which the Court became seized of the topic. Prominent were decisions of the United Nations Human Rights Committee (expressed through its Views and General Comments),13 the Inter-American Commission of Human Rights,14 the European Commission and Court of Human Rights,15 the United Nations Committee Against Torture,16 the United Nations Committee on the Rights of the Child17 and judgments of domestic courts such as in the United Kingdom.18

The question of the extraterritorial applicability of human rights law treaties raised in the ICJ cases concerned the applicability of the treaties to Israel in the Palestinian Territories in the context of the occupation in general and the construction of the separation barrier in particular, to Uganda in the DRC in the context of the military action by the latter in the territory of the former and to Russia in Georgia in the context of Russia’s support for the breakaway Republics of Abkhazia and South Ossetia, including through military action in 2008. The treaties at issue were the ICCPR (Wall and DRC v. Uganda), the CRC (DRC v. Uganda), the CRC Optional Protocol (DRC v. Uganda), the African Charter (DRC v. Uganda), the ICESCR (Wall Advisory Opinion) and the CERD (Georgia v. Russia).

Just as in general many of the States who act extraterritorially – and whose legal position is, therefore, directly at stake – refute applicability in this context, so the three States whose obligations were being determined in these cases – Israel, Uganda and Russia – advanced the view that the treaties at issue did not apply to them in the territories under consideration.

The way the Court rejected these positions, and affirmed extraterritorial applicability, involved a series of assertions with a more general significance for the debates on applicability. Moreover, as will be explained, the Court’s contribution to understandings of what obligations should mean in the extraterritorial context builds upon what it had said decades previously in the Namibia Advisory Opinion concerning South Africa’s obligations to the people of that territory. The Court’s contribution in this field can be divided up into five distinct elements; these are set out in the following sections.

In the first place, in the Namibia Advisory Opinion, the Court established the principle that territorial control, rather than the enjoyment of territorial sovereignty (that is, title) should be the basis for the operation of State obligations in general. Although not a determination specifically about international human rights treaty obligations, this broad proposition paved the way for later decisions about human rights law by both human rights bodies and, subsequently, the Court itself.

In the second place, for treaties containing the ‘jurisdiction’ trigger for applicability, the Court both supported prior affirmations by other bodies that this trigger has an extraterritorial dimension and offered original affirmations of its own.

In the third place, for treaties that have a ‘free-standing’ model of applicability, the Court has for some instruments treated them as if they did contain a ‘jurisdiction’ clause, which operates extraterritorially, and for other instruments affirmed extraterritorial application in a simpler fashion.

In the fourth place, the Court’s pronouncement upon the ‘exceptional’ nature of extraterritorial activities is potentially significant for the regulation of these activities by human rights law when compared to similar pronouncements by certain other bodies.

Similarly, in the fifth place, the Court’s approach to the application of human rights treaty obligations to a State acting in territory not forming part of the territory of another State that is a party to the same treaty is highly significant given what has been suggested by certain other decisions on this matter.

The Court’s contribution (1): Namibia – control not sovereignty; effective control a trigger

In the Namibia Advisory Opinion the ICJ stated that South Africa, which at the time was unlawfully occupying Namibia, was:

accountable for any violations…of the rights of the people of Namibia. The fact that South Africa no longer has any title to administer the Territory does not release it from its obligations and responsibilities under international law towards other States in respect of the exercise of its powers in relation to this Territory. Physical control of a territory, and not sovereignty or legitimacy of title, is the basis of State liability for acts affecting other States.19

This opinion was issued before the main decisions by human rights bodies on the extraterritorial application of human rights treaties. It is not, of course, a decision about human rights-specific treaty law as such, although it concerns the ‘rights of the people of Namibia’. The reference to ‘obligations and responsibilities under international law towards other States’ and ‘liability for acts affecting other States’ assumes an inter-State focus, although such a focus can include human rights given that obligations of this type are contained in treaties between States, and that certain such obligations (including those at issue here, the prohibition of racial discrimination and the right of self-determination) are regarded as operating erga omnes, implicating a generalised community interest on the part of all States.

Whatever the intended meaning in the case of South Africa and the people of Namibia, and the significance for rules concerning applicable law in general and human rights law in particular, as a general proposition the echo of this statement can be traced through later decisions on the applicability of human rights treaty law in two related but distinct respects. First, the fundamental point that State responsibility should not be limited to situations where a State enjoys title is the basic underpinning of extraterritorial applicability. Secondly, the particular concept of ‘physical control over territory’ as a basis for determining where obligations should subsist has been adopted in later human rights decisions, notably those made in interpreting the meaning of ‘jurisdiction’ in the European Convention on Human Rights, as one of the two main triggers for extraterritorial applicability, the second being a concept of control exercised over individuals.20 The extraterritorial applicability of human rights treaties based on the exercise of control over territory – the ‘spatial’ or ‘territorial’ trigger – finds its origin in this more general concept from the ICJ.21

It would be no exaggeration to say, then, that the ideas first judicially affirmed by the ICJ are both the underpinning of the notion of the extraterritorial application of human rights law itself, and also one of the two main ways in which the trigger for such application has been defined. They foreground subsequent approaches taken on these issues by human rights bodies and the Court itself.22 In retrospect, it can be said that the ground-breaking decision on the extraterritorial application of human rights law came from the ICJ, not from a human rights tribunal, and well before the canonical decisions were issued on the topic by such tribunals.

Just as the Court paved the way for later approaches taken on extraterritorial applicability that were directly concerned with human rights treaty law, so too the Court later became involved in offering approaches of its own to the topic. Its contribution here can be split into different elements, beginning with the question of the extraterritorial meaning of the term ‘jurisdiction’ as used in human rights treaties.

The Court’s contribution (2): affirming the extraterritorial meaning of ‘jurisdiction’

The general refutation of the extraterritorial application of human rights law made by many of the States which would be subject to the obligations were they to apply – including Israel, Uganda and Russia with respect to the three ICJ decisions in this field – has been primarily concerned with the term ‘jurisdiction’ in some of the main human rights treaties. This term, it is argued, means the State’s presence in its sovereign territory only, and so in circumstances where it serves as the trigger for applicability, the relevant obligations do not apply extraterritorially.23 In the particular case of the ICCPR provision on applicability, which as mentioned earlier addresses those ‘within [the State’s] territory and subject to its jurisdiction’, the argument is made that the inclusion of the word ‘territory’ in addition to ‘jurisdiction’ should be read to suggest that jurisdiction is limited to territory, thereby ruling out extraterritorial applicability.24 Arguments have also been made against the extraterritorial application of the ICESCR, for example by Israel in the context of the situation in the Palestinian territories.25

Even before the Wall Advisory Opinion and the DRC v. Uganda and Russia v. Georgia decisions were issued by the ICJ, the consistent position adopted in relation to international human rights instruments by international review bodies was the opposite of the rejectionist position. The term ‘jurisdiction’ in the ECHR, ACHR, CAT and CRC has been interpreted to operate extraterritorially in certain circumstances.26 The aforementioned treatment of the applicability of the (Inter-)American Declaration by the Inter-American Commission on Human Rights in terms of the exercise of ‘jurisdiction’ was in the context of extraterritorial activity, which it regarded as capable of constituting the exercise of jurisdiction and thereby falling under the scope of the obligations in the Declaration.27 Similarly, the ICCPR was interpreted as applying extraterritorially by the UN Human Rights Committee in Views issued in 1981 and a General Comment of 2004.28 In general, the term ‘jurisdiction’ has been defined extraterritorially as the exercise of control over either territory – the concept, indicated earlier, which has its origins in the Namibia Advisory Opinion, sometimes referred to as the ‘spatial’ or ‘territorial’ definition29 – or individuals, sometimes referred to as the ‘individual’, ‘personal’ or, because of the identity of the foreign State actor involved, ‘State agent authority’ definition.30

The significance of the ICJ’s determinations on this issue was to bolster some of the affirmations of extraterritorial applicability that had already been made by expert bodies in relation to the ICCPR and the CRC.

In the Wall Advisory Opinion and the DRC v. Uganda Judgment the Court affirmed that the ICCPR is capable of extraterritorial application.31 This bolsters the credibility of the Human Rights Committee’s position on this question, and, by the same token, the credibility of the rejectionist view is weakened. It is also significant more broadly within the Court’s jurisprudence because the Human Rights Committee’s position is expressly cited by the Court in its reasoning on the issue in the Wall Advisory Opinion, both as a general matter and as far as the position of Israel in the Palestinian territories in particular is concerned (the reasoning in DRC v. Uganda merely invokes the Court’s earlier reasoning in the Wall Advisory Opinion in summary form).32 Just as its decisions on extraterritorial applicability constitute some of the main decisions by the Court on human rights law generally, so here a decision in this category is a landmark in the broader theme of the Court’s express use of the decisions of other courts and tribunals.

In a similar fashion, in the same two decisions, the Court provided authority for the extraterritorial application of the CRC, as with the Human Rights Committee and the ICCPR earlier, bolstering the position of the Committee on the Rights of the Child on this issue (although, by contrast, without referring to the latter Committee’s position on the issue).33

Before the ICJ made its pronouncements on the topic, the position on the extraterritorial applicability of the term ‘jurisdiction’ when used in human rights treaties was limited to affirmation by the UN Human Rights Committee and the Committee on the Rights of the Child – whose decisions, although important and influential, are formally non-judicial and non-binding – and the European Commission and Court of Human Rights – whose decisions are necessarily specific to the ECHR and its Protocols even if often containing logic that is clearly transferable to equivalent provisions in other treaties. The extraterritorial applicability of the ICCPR and the CRC could be rejected by dissenting States on the grounds that it had not been affirmed by a body other than the Committees associated with the two instruments, that the position of those Committees were non-binding and that decisions made with respect to the European Convention on Human Rights were irrelevant.34

After these ICJ cases, the positions of the Human Rights Committee and the Committee on the Rights of the Child with respect to the ICCPR and the CRC were no longer isolated and, moreover, had been endorsed by a body with formal judicial status, and in a multifaceted fashion that both affirmed the position as general proposition and applied it to the facts of two separate situations, Israel in Palestine and the DRC in Uganda (in the latter case in a binding judgment).

More broadly, the quantum of authoritative interpretation on the question of the extraterritorial applicability of the term ‘jurisdiction’ across international human rights treaties generally had become significantly greater, in that jurisprudence from specialist human rights bodies was joined by the pre-eminent, generalist Court.

The Court’s contribution (3): affirming the extraterritorial applicability of other treaties with free-standing obligations

As mentioned above, some treaties operate in a free-standing sense, in that they do not contain express provisions stipulating their general spatial field of application. Debates about this spatial field are concerned not with the meaning of an ambiguous term (as in the earlier contest over the meaning of ‘jurisdiction’) but, rather, on whether the lack of an express provision renders the treaties always applicable to States parties anywhere in the world, or whether some sort of spatial test for applicability should be read into them and, if so, what constitutes the limits of that test.

The Court has made an important contribution to these debates, through adopting two distinct approaches to extraterritorial applicability. First, the Court in effect read into treaties a concept of jurisdiction, which it then determined to apply extraterritorially. Secondly, the Court offered a more simple affirmation of extraterritorial applicability, without explaining the basis for this.

As indicated above, the Inter-American Commission on Human Rights had read a concept of ‘jurisdiction’ into the American Declaration on Human Rights (not a treaty), which did not contain an express reference to this word, as a way of affirming its extraterritorial applicability. This approach was taken up (without acknowledgement of its origins, as an idea, in the Commission’s decision about the Declaration) and applied by the ICJ in relation to the ICESCR in the Wall Advisory Opinion, the African Charter and the CRC Optional Protocol in DRC v. Uganda. All of these instruments were treated as if they contained the ‘jurisdiction’ trigger, as a way of affirming that they were capable of extraterritorial application on the basis of the performance of activity by the State which fell within the scope of this concept.35 In the Wall Advisory Opinion, the Court mentions the positions of Israel and the Committee on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights on the question of the applicability of the ICESCR to Israel in the Palestinian territories.36 Whereas it rejects Israel’s advocacy of inapplicability, in contrast to its discussion of the position of the Human Rights Committee in relation to the ICCPR, it does not expressly associate the position of the Committee on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights advocating applicability (either generally or in relation to Israel in the Palestinian territories in particular) with its own affirmation of this view.37

Here it is a matter not, as earlier, of interpreting a treaty provision termed ‘jurisdiction’ as having an extraterritorial meaning, but, rather, of affirming the extraterritorial applicability of the obligations in the instrument by reading into it a concept for applicability called ‘jurisdiction’, which has an extraterritorial component. This takes (without acknowledgement) an approach adopted in one decision by a regional body in relation to one instrument, not at issue in the case before it, and treats it as relevant more generally to certain other human rights treaties that do not have an explicit concept of ‘jurisdiction’ triggering applicability.

A second approach to the extraterritorial scope of treaties with a free-standing conception of applicability provisions is simpler. It was adopted by the UK House of Lords (as it was called then) in the Roma Rights case of 2004 concerning the posting of UK immigration officials at Prague airport.38 Lady Hale and Lord Steyn both assumed that the prohibition of discrimination on grounds of race in CERD applied extraterritorially, without recourse to a particular factual doctrine such as the exercise of ‘jurisdiction’, which had to be met in order for the obligations to be in play. 39

The effect of the ICJ’s 1998 Order for provisional measures in the Georgia v. Russia case is to offer further support to this ‘free-standing’ approach to applicability. The Court stated that it:

observes that there is no restriction of a general nature in CERD relating to its territorial application; whereas it further notes that, in particular, neither Article 2 nor Article 5 of CERD, alleged violations of which [by Russia in Georgia] are invoked by Georgia, contain a specific territorial limitation…the Court consequently finds that these provisions of CERD generally appear to apply, like other provisions of instruments of that nature, to the actions of a State party when it acts beyond its territory;40

The Court’s order called upon ‘[b]oth Parties, within South Ossetia and Abkhazia and adjacent areas in Georgia’ to take certain acts to comply with the Convention, a determination that assumed the extraterritorial application of CERD to Russian forces in Georgia.41

This decision offers a particular approach to understanding the extraterritorial application of those treaties such as the CERD with free-standing models of applicability not expressly qualified by jurisdiction: the absence of a restriction on applicability, whether of a general character, or specific to the particular obligations in the treaty at issue, should be taken to suggest that the provisions should apply. In other words, as far as the significance of treaty provisions is concerned, the enquiry on extraterritorial applicability depends on not establishing this in a positive sense, but, rather, establishing whether it has been ruled out negatively through restrictive provisions. Such an approach to treaties with free-standing provisions can be seen as offering a potential explanation for the approach adopted by the UK House of Lords in Roma Rights, and a general doctrine to be followed in relation to such treaties as an alternative to the approach of reading a concept of ‘jurisdiction’ into them.

The Court’s contribution (4): on the ‘exceptional’ nature of extraterritorial activity and its regulation by human rights law

However controversial and important extraterritorial State actions are, and however fundamental they may be in certain cases to the interests of the relevant States and those in the territories affected, taken as a whole they are exceptional when compared with the presence and activities of State authorities within their sovereign territories. Thus in the WallAdvisory Opinion the ICJ stated in relation to the ICCPR that ‘while the exercise of jurisdiction is primarily territorial, it may sometimes be exercised outside the State territory’.42 The Court went on to say that:

Considering the object and purpose of the…Covenant…it would seem natural that, even when such is the case, States parties to the Covenant should be bound by its provisions.43

Similarly, in relation to the ICESCR, the Court stated that:

this Covenant guarantees rights which are essentially territorial. However, it is not to be excluded that it applies both to territories over which a State party has sovereignty and to those over which that State exercises territorial jurisdiction.44

Here, then, the Court is being descriptive about the exercise of jurisdiction in the sense of a State presence (the particular activity performed by Israel at issue before it) reflecting the fact that States parties to the Covenant (taken as a whole) do not normally engage in this activity as a matter of fact outside their territory. These observations are significant because of how they echo an earlier statement made by the European Court of Human Rights, and how they have potentially a significantly different import, in terms of the implications for the scope of extraterritorial applicability, from an earlier statement by the Strasbourg Court.

In the Banković decision concerning the NATO bombing of Serbia in 1999, the European Court of Human Rights stated that jurisdiction is ‘essentially’ territorial, with extraterritorial jurisdiction subsisting only in ‘exceptional’ circumstances.45 However, in this observation the Court seemed to suggest that somehow the ‘exceptional’ character of extraterritorial jurisdiction should be understood not only in a factual sense; it should also have purchase in attenuating the scope of the meaning of ‘jurisdiction’ in international human rights law, and should perform this function in an autonomous manner from the factual exceptionalism. The autonomous nature of this exceptionalism creates the possibility that even if a State is acting ‘exceptionally’ as a matter of fact outside its territory, such a situation might not fall within its ‘jurisdiction’ for the purposes of human rights law. In other words, only a subset of extraterritorial activity will be regulated by human rights law.

The dictum from Banković was affirmed at certain stages in the English courts of the Al-Skeini case concerning the UK’s military presence in Iraq, although by way of simple recitation only.46 In the Strasbourg judgment in that case, the European Court of Human Rights stated:

A State’s jurisdictional competence under Article 1 is primarily territorial…Jurisdiction is presumed to be exercised normally throughout the State’s territory…Conversely, acts of the Contracting States performed, or producing effects, outside their territories can constitute an exercise of jurisdiction within the meaning of Article 1 only in exceptional cases…

To date, the Court in its case-law has recognised a number of exceptional circumstances capable of giving rise to the exercise of jurisdiction by a Contracting State outside its own territorial boundaries. In each case, the question whether exceptional circumstances exist which require and justify a finding by the Court that the State was exercising jurisdiction extra-territorially must be determined with reference to the particular facts.47

This statement seems to suggest that, necessarily, human rights law does not apply to all the extraterritorial actions of States – even if States perform ‘acts…outside their territories’, such acts can only ‘constitute an exercise of jurisdiction within the meaning of Article 1’, that is to be regulated by the obligations in the treaty, ‘in exceptional cases’.

This doctrine of the ‘exceptional’ extraterritorial application of human rights obligations has only ever been affirmed in the context of the ECHR. Moreover, even in relation to that instrument it was absent from the case law before the Banković decision of 2001. Nonetheless, it appears to suggest a significantly different approach to ‘exceptionalism’ from that articulated by the ICJ in the Wall Advisory Opinion, which was issued after Banković. For the ICJ, exceptionalism was only an issue in terms of the frequency of extraterritorial State action; it was not also a doctrine to limit the circumstances when this action would be regulated by human rights law when it occurred.

The absence of an affirmation of the latter doctrine places the Wall Advisory Opinion alongside the decisions of other bodies such as the Inter-American Commission of Human Rights and the Human Rights Committee, supporting the absence of such a doctrine from human rights law generally and further marginalising the apparent affirmation of the doctrine in the context of the ECHR.

The Court’s contribution (5): whether human rights treaty obligations should apply to a State acting in territory not falling within the sovereign territory of another contracting party to the treaty

An idea has become associated with the ECHR, based on an interpretation of a dictum from the European Court of Human Rights in the aforementioned Banković decision, about the ‘legal space’ or ‘espace juridique’ of the Convention, which has fundamental consequences for the question of extraterritorial applicability. Although advanced and affirmed only with respect to the European Convention, as an idea it is transferrable to other human rights treaties.

This idea is as follows: a particular action taken by one State in the territory of another State would not be governed by the Convention obligations of the first State if the second State is not also a party to the Convention, even if in other respects the act in question meets the test for extraterritorial jurisdiction under the Convention (for instance the State exercises effective territorial control). Under this view, although the concept of ‘jurisdiction’ under the ECHR is not limited to a State’s own territory, the applicability of the treaty as a whole is limited to the overall territory of contracting States. In consequence, States acting outside the ‘territorial space’ of the ECHR are not bound by their obligations in that instrument, even if they are exercising effective control over territory and/or individuals. This is a severe limitation as far as the ECHR is concerned, since most of the world’s States, including some of the key sites of extraterritorial action by certain European States, fall outside the ‘legal space’ of the ECHR.

This concept, although articulated in relation to the ECHR, is of significance more broadly to situations where States act in territory in respect of which they lack title, and which does not form part of another State that is also bound by the same human rights obligations as they are. This would cover territory of a State that is not a party to the same human rights treaty and non-State territory that, necessarily, does not fall within the territory of any State bound by any human rights treaties at all. It would also cover territory of a State that is party to the same treaty but subject to different obligations under it, whether through reservations, declarations or a divergent position as far as additional instruments such as optional protocols to the treaty are concerned. This is not, then, a rejection of the extraterritorial application of human rights law in toto; it is a rejection of human rights norms that have not yet been universally accepted or accepted at least by a State with sovereignty (as title) over the territory concerned, even if they have been accepted by the foreign State acting in that territory.

The significance of this idea is illustrated by the following two examples of exclusions that would be effected by this limitation. First, no European State acting in Afghanistan, or taking action in the territorial waters of States and/or the high seas off the Horn of Africa with respect to so-called ‘piracy’, or taking migration-related action in the territorial waters of North African States and/or the high seas in the Mediterranean, would be bound by the ECHR. Secondly, no action by any State on the high seas, or off the coast of the Western Sahara (a non-State territory), whether piracy-or migration-related, is covered by any human rights treaty obligations whatsoever.

This sets up a two-tier system of human rights protection: States may act abroad in a manner that impacts on human rights, but such action is only regulated by human rights obligations if these had already been in operation in the territories in question. Such a system echoes legal distinctions operating in the colonial era in levels of civilisation and as between the metropolis and the colony as far as the level of rights protection is concerned. Indeed, with the ECHR the distinction in rights protection necessarily operates according to a European/non-European axis – Turkey in northern Cyprus: yes; that State and other European States in Iraq: no.

Whether or not such an exclusion actually operates with respect to the ECHR and its Protocols has been addressed in both case law and academic commentary.48 Such discussion has included coverage of broader normative issues concerning whether the absence of such a limitation, and the consequent application of human rights standards that were not previously applicable in the territory, would constitute ‘human rights imperialism’ and also potentially risk, where it is co-applicable, adherence to certain norms of occupation law.

In DRC v. Uganda, the Court held that the nature of the extraterritorial action by the State at issue, Uganda, met the test for triggering the law of occupation. Applying Uganda’s human rights obligations was not capable of raising a ‘legal space’ problem as set out above, however, because the DRC was also a party to the treaties at issue. Similarly, in Georgia v. Russia, the Court was concerned with the extraterritorial application of a human rights treaty that was binding on both the State acting extraterritorially, and the State in whose territory the former State was acting. These two cases were equivalent, then, to the Strasbourg cases about Turkey in northern Cyprus: one State being bound by its obligations when acting in the territory of another State also a party to the treaty or treaties containing the obligations at issue. Everything was happening within the ‘legal space’ of the treaty or treaties.

In the Wall Advisory Opinion, however, the Court was considering the applicability of human rights treaties that were not already in operation in the particular sense that the territory – Palestine – did not itself constitute a State party to human rights treaties (a position that has since changed), nor was it regarded as forming part of the territory of another State party to such treaties. The situation was therefore, in this sense, outside the ‘legal space’ of these instruments. It might have been said, then, that to apply the treaty obligations to Israel in the Occupied Palestinian Territories would fall foul of a limitation on applicability to the ‘legal space’ of the treaties at issue. However, such a view was not expressed by the Court and the treaties were regarded as applicable to Israel, thereby necessarily rejecting the ‘legal space’ limitation idea in its entirety.

Conclusion

When the ICJ issued the Namibia Advisory Opinion in 1971, the development of international human rights treaty law, and its expert-body interpretation, was at a very early stage – the two global human rights Covenants, for example, had been adopted (in 1966) but were not yet in force (that happened in 1976).49 The question of the extraterritorial application of this law had not been subject to any general expert determination. When that happened later, the ideas expressed by the Court can be clearly identified. Although, then, the Court did not itself pronounce upon international human rights treaty law for some time after Namibia, that opinion nonetheless deserves a central place in the canon of international human rights law jurisprudence, not only for the commonly acknowledged significance it has for UN law and the law of self-determination, but also because of this link with later expert-body determinations on the extraterritorial application of human rights law. Moreover, when the Court offered its own contribution on the latter subject to sit alongside the expert-body determinations, this had an important role in consolidating and supplementing a critical mass of authoritative interpretation on what was and remains the highly contested and fundamentally important question of whether human rights treaty obligations apply extraterritorially. In a few brief statements in three decisions, the Court bolstered the case for an affirmative answer to this question. It has done this in a manner that has widened the scope of the judicial and quasi-judicial conversation from an isolated, treaty-specific treatment by dedicated interpretation bodies on what is a common matter across the human rights treaty framework.

* The work on this piece was funded by the Leverhulme Trust and the European Research Council. It reproduces, with permission, some parts of a longer article, ‘Human Rights beyond Borders at the World Court: The Significance of the International Court of Justice’s Jurisprudence on the Extraterritorial Application of International Human Rights Law Treaties’, Chinese Journal of International Law, 12(4) (2013), 639–77, open access at http://chinesejil.oxfordjournals.org/cgi/content/full/jmt039?ijkey=4g2d5iTs7GmwWHX&keytype=ref.

1 Legal Consequences of the Construction of a Wall in the Occupied Palestinian Territories, Advisory Opinion, 9 July 2004, ICJ Reports (2004), 136 (Wall Advisory Opinion); Case concerning Armed Activities on the Territory of the Congo (Democratic Republic of the Congo v. Uganda), Judgment, 19 December 2005, ICJ Reports (2005) (DRC v. Uganda); Application of the International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination (Georgia v. Russian Federation), Order Indicating Provisional Measures, 15 October 2008 (Georgia v. Russia Provisional Measures).

2 Legal Consequences for States of the Continued Presence of South Africa in Namibia (South West Africa) Notwithstanding Security Council Resolution 276 (1970), Advisory Opinion, ICJ Reports (1971), 16 (Namibia Advisory Opinion).

3 See the following, and the sources cited therein: Gentian Zyberi, The Humanitarian Face of the International Court of Justice: Its Contribution in Interpreting and Developing International Human Rights and Humanitarian Law and Rules (Antwerp: Intersentia, 2008); Sandesh Sivakumaran, ‘The International Court of Justice and Human Rights’ in Sarah Joseph and Adam McBeth (eds.), Research Handbook on International Human Rights Law (Cheltenham: Edward Elgar, 2010), 299–325; Bruno Simma, ‘Mainstream Human Rights: The Contribution of the International Court of Justice’, Journal of International Dispute Settlement, 3 (2012), 7–29. For the human rights instruments whose provisions will be addressed in the present piece, see American Declaration of the Rights and Duties of Man, 1948, OAS Res. XXX (1948) (American Declaration) [not a treaty]; European Convention for the Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms (Rome, adopted 4 November 1950, entered into force 3 September 1953), 213 UNTS 221 (ECHR); International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights (New York, adopted 16 December 1966, entered into force 23 March 1976), 993 UNTS 3 (ICESCR); International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (New York, adopted 16 December 1966, entered into force 23 March 1976), 999 UNTS 171 (ICCPR); American Convention on Human Rights, 1969, 1144 UNTS 123 (ACHR); International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination (New York, adopted 7 March 1966, entered into force 4 January 1969), 660 UNTS 195 (ICERD or CERD); International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination Against Women (New York, adopted 18 December 1979, entered into force 3 September 1981), 1249 UNTS 13 (CEDAW); African Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights (OAU Doc. CAB/LEG/67/3 rev. 5, Nairobi, adopted 27 June 1981, entered into force 21 October 1986) (ACHPR); Convention on the Rights of the Child (New York, adopted 20 November 1989, 2 September 1990), 1577 UNTS 3 (CRC); Optional Protocol to the Convention on the Rights of the Child on the Involvement of Children in Armed Conflict of 2000 (CRC Optional Protocol) (New York, adopted 25 May 2000, entered into force 12 February 2002), 2173 UNTS 222; Convention Against Torture and Other Cruel, Inhuman or Degrading Treatment or Punishment (New York, adopted 10 December 1984, entered into force 26 June 1987), 1465 UNTS 85 (CAT).

4 See the following, and the sources cited therein: Fons Coomans and Menno Kamminga (eds.), Extraterritorial Application of Human Rights Treaties (Antwerp and Oxford: Intersentia, 2004); Michael J. Dennis, ‘Application of Human Rights Treaties Extraterritorially in Times of Armed Conflict and Military Occupation’, American Journal of International Law, 99 (2005), 119; Ralph Wilde, ‘Legal “Black Hole”?: Extraterritorial State Action and International Treaty Law on Civil and Political Rights’, Melbourne Journal of International Law, 26 (2005), 739; Michał Gondek, The Reach of Human Rights in a Globalising World: Extraterritorial Application of Human Rights Treaties (Antwerp: Intersentia, 2009); Ralph Wilde, ‘Compliance with Human Rights Norms Extraterritorially: “Human Rights Imperialism”?’ in Laurence Boisson de Chazournes and Marcelo Kohen (eds.), International Law and the Quest for its Implementation: Liber Amicorum Vera Gowlland-Debbas (The Netherlands: Brill/Martinus Nijhoff, 2010); Marko Milanovic, Extraterritorial Application of Human Rights Treaties: Law, Principles, and Policy (Oxford University Press, 2011); Karen da Costa, The Extraterritorial Application of Selected Human Rights Treaties (The Netherlands: Brill, 2012). Sandesh Sivakumaran highlights this significance in the Court’s intervention on the topic. See Sivakumaran, ‘The International Court of Justice and Human Rights’, 307.

5 See the sources cited ibid.

6 See ECHR, Art. 1; ACHR, Art. 1.

7 CAT, Art. 2.

8 CRC, Art. 2.1.

9 ICCPR, Art. 2.

10 American Declaration; ACHPR; CEDAW; CERD; CRC Optional Protocol.

11 Coard v. U.S., Case 10.951, Report No. 109/99, OEA/Ser.L./V/II.85, doc. 9 rev. (1999) (Coard), para. 37.

12 ICESCR, above n. 3, Art. 2.

13 General Comment No. 31, UN Doc. CCPR/C/21/Rev.1/Add. 13 (26 May 2004) (HRC General Comment No. 31); para. 10; HRC, Lilian Celiberti de Casariego v. Uruguay, Communication No. 56/1979, UN Doc. CCPR/C/13/D/56/1979 (29 July 1981) (Celiberti de Casariego), para. 10.3; HRC, Sergio Euben Lopez Burgos v. Uruguay, Communication No. R.12/52, UN Doc. Supp. No. 40 (A/36/40) (6 June 1979) (Lopez Burgos).

14 Coard, paras. 37, 39, 41.

15 WM v. Denmark, Application No. 17392/90, 73 Eur Comm’n HR Dec. and Rep. 193 (1992), 196, Section ‘The Law’, para. 1 (WM); Loizidou v. Turkey, Application No. 40/1993/435/514, Judgment, 23 February 1995, 1996-VI ECtHR, Ser. A, 2216 (GC) (Merits), paras. 52–6; Cyprus v. Turkey, Application No. 25781/94, Judgment, 10 May 2001, 2001-IV, ECtHR, 1 (GC), para. 77; Banković and others v. Belgium and others, Application No. 52207/99, Judgment, 12 December 2001, 2001–XII ECtHR (GC), 333, paras. 70–1; Öcalan v. Turkey, Application No. 46221/99, ECtHR (GC), 12 May 2005 (Öcalan), para. 91; Isaak v Turkey, Application No. 44587/98, ECtHR, Judgment, 28 September 2006 (Admissibility) (Isaak), p. 21; Issa and others v. Turkey, ECtHR, Admissibility Decision, 30 May 2000 (Issa (Admissibility)) and 41 ECtHR 27 (2004) (Merits) (Issa (Merits)), para. 71; Al-Saadoon and Mufdhi v. United Kingdom, Application No. 61498/08, ECtHR, Chamber decision, 2 March 2010 (Al-Saadoon); Al Skeini and others v. United Kingdom, Application No. 55721/07, ECtHR, Judgment, 7 July 2011.

16 Consideration of Reports Submitted by States Parties under Article 19 of the Convention, Conclusions and Recommendations: United States of America, UN Doc. CAT/C/USA/CO/2 (25 July 2006), para. 15; General Comment No. 2: Implementation of Article 2 by States Parties, 23 November 2007, UN Doc. CAT/C/GC/2 (24 January 2008), para. 16.

17 Concluding Observations of the Committee on the Rights of the Child: Israel, UN Doc. CRC/C/15/Add.195, 4 October 2002, paras. 2, 5, 57–8.

18 R v. Immigration Officer at Prague Airport and another (Respondents), ex p. European Roma Rights Centre and others (Appellants) [2004] UKHL 55, 9 December 2004; R (on the application of Al-Skeini and others) v. Secretary of State for Defence (The Redress Trust intervening) [2007] UKHL 26, [2007] 3 WLR 33; R (on the application of Al-Skeini and others) v. Secretary of State for Defence [2005] EWCA Civ 1609, 21 December 2005; R (on the application of Al-Skeini and others) v. Secretary of State for Defence [2004] EWHC 2911 (Admin), 14 December 2004.

19 Namibia case, 54, para. 118.

20 The two triggers are discussed below, nn. 29 and 30 and accompanying text.

22 Sandesh Sivakumaran observes that the Court’s later decisions on the extraterritorial application of the ICCPR, ICESCR and CRC (addressed below) are ‘timely and important’ but also ‘no more than the specific application to human rights treaties of’ this earlier idea. Sivakumaran, ‘The International Court of Justice and Human Rights’, 309.

23 See e.g. the discussion in Wilde ‘Legal “Black Hole”?’, 776–8, and sources cited therein.

24 See the discussions in the literature cited above, n. 4; for one example of a commentator who advocates this position, see Dennis, ‘Application of Human Rights Treaties Extraterritorially in Times of Armed Conflict and Military Occupation’. For Israel’s position with respect to the ICCPR, see e.g. Wall Advisory Opinion, para. 110, and sources cited therein.

25 See the Wall Advisory Opinion, para. 112.

26 See decisions cited above nn. 1417.

27 Coard, above n. 11, para. 37.

28 General Comment No. 31, Celiberti de Casariego, Lopez Burgos, above n. 13.

29 See e.g. Cyprus v. Turkey; Loizidou v. Turkey (Preliminary Objections), Merits; Banković; Al-Skeini (DC), (CA), (HL), (ECtHR); Issa.

30 Celiberti de Casariego, para. 10.3; Lopez Burgos, para. 12.3; Öcalan; Isaak, p. 21; Coard, paras. 1–4, 37, 39, 41; Al-Skeini (DC), (CA), (HL), (ECtHR), passim; Al-Saadoon, passim; WM, p. 196, section ‘The Law’, para. 1.

31 Wall Advisory Opinion, para. 113.

32 Ibid., para. 109 (on the Committee’s general position on extraterritorial applicability) and para. 110 (on the Committee’s position on Israel in the Palestinian territories in particular); DRC v. Uganda, para. 216.

33 Wall Advisory Opinion, para. 113; DRC v. Uganda Judgment, paras. 216–7. On the decision of the Committee on the Rights of the Child, see above, n. 17.

34 See the discussions in the literature cited above n. 4; for one example of a commentator who advocates this position, see Dennis, ‘Application of Human Rights Treaties Extraterritorially in Times of Armed Conflict and Military Occupation’. For Israel’s position with respect to the ICCPR, see e.g. Wall Advisory Opinion, para. 110, and sources cited therein.

35 On the ICESCR, see Wall Advisory Opinion, paras. 111–12; on the ACHPR and the CRC Optional Protocol, see DRC v. Uganda Judgment, paras. 216–7.

36 Wall Advisory Opinion, para. 112.

38 See Opinion of Lord Bingham, Roma Rights case, para. 4.

39 See Opinion of Lady Hale, Roma Rights case, paras. 97–102 and Opinion of Lord Steyn, paras. 44 and 46.

40 Georgia v. Russia (Provisional Measures), para. 109.

41 Ibid., para. 149.

42 Wall Advisory Opinion, para. 109.

44 Ibid., para. 112.

45 Banković, para. 67.

46 See Al-Skeini (HC), paras. 245 and 269; Al-Skeini (CA), paras. 75–6.

47 Al Skeini (ECtHR), paras. 131–2.

48 See Banković; Al-Skeini (DC), (CA), (HL), (ECtHR), 63; Wilde, ‘Compliance with Human Rights Norms Extraterritorially’.

49 See ICCPR and ICESCR.

4 Fragmentation, regime interaction and sovereignty

Margaret A. Young

Introduction

The fragmentation of international law is a long-observed phenomenon that demonstrates uneven normative and institutional development and evolution in inter-State relations, with little or no hierarchical order or overall coherence. Separate legal regimes such as the international trade regime and the international regime to mitigate climate change have developed largely independently from one another, often instigated by non-identical groupings of States. Conflicts of norms between these regimes give rise to ‘post modern anxieties’ about disorder and uncertainty,1 and in response, the United Nations International Law Commission (ILC), in a seminal study led by Martti Koskenniemi, advocates a toolbox of professional techniques for international lawyers.2 These techniques seek first and foremost to ascertain the common intention of States parties to the relevant regimes in resolving normative conflicts. In doing so, the techniques promote adherence to sovereign concerns.

Yet even aside from the potential for large-scale conflicts between rules or rule-systems, the fragmented and diversified legal landscape and the plethora of legal regimes give rise to challenges of a more mundane character. Given that issues of global concern such as climate change, fisheries depletion and human rights do not fall neatly into one regime, there is a constant need to mediate and understand the interaction between regimes.3 Joint work programmes, the common advancement of ‘multi-sourced equivalent norms’4 and shared institutional practices are a routine feature of the implementation of international law. This interaction between regimes sometimes occurs with the full awareness and consent of States parties, but oftentimes it does not. For example, States sometimes allow secretariats of international organisations to enter into memoranda of understanding with other secretariats; at times, institutional co-operation exists without such arrangements. If regime interaction occurs without the apparent consent of States, what is the risk to sovereignty?

The situation is further complicated when one considers the growth of non-traditional legal regimes and ‘transnational law’ beyond the confines of the State. An example from forestry regulation illustrates this phenomenon. Forested areas are simultaneously governed by States for a range of uses including timber extraction and agricultural plantation; they also form part of complex and localised normative arrangements of indigenous and other communities. Such pluralism is destined to become even more complex. Imminent global attempts to reduce carbon emissions from deforestation and forest degradation (known as ‘REDD’ programmes) promise to provide public and private entities with opportunities to establish carbon markets, adding a layer of governance that is grounded on State participation and yet dependent on global and ‘de-nationalised’ authorities. The interaction between these areas of law provides additional challenges to notions of sovereignty. Can States retain control? Should they?

This chapter addresses the dilemma posed for sovereignty by regime interaction. The first part identifies the multiple meanings of ‘regime’. The term is useful in drawing attention to specialised areas of practice and institutional development, notwithstanding the risks that accompany such analysis.5 This part considers the influence of international inter-governmental organisations and non-governmental organisations (NGOs) in these arrangements. Such influence may even exceed the influence of States, especially for some privately developed ‘transnational regimes’.

The second part focuses on sovereignty and its demands. Traditional conceptions of sovereignty emphasise the full and independent authority of States to govern their citizens and their territory. When States ratify treaties and become members of legal regimes, the delegation of power is seen by some to be a diminution of sovereignty. Perhaps even more keenly felt is the impact on sovereignty of interacting regimes and this part examines examples of international organisations within one regime finding facts and drawing upon law from another regime. Examples from regimes relating to liberalised trade, climate change mitigation and fisheries protection are provided to demonstrate the current practice surrounding intersecting regimes. If such activities go beyond the implied powers of international organisations, sovereignty’s demand for State consent in situations of authority and control may go unmet.

The third part provides a normative argument for regime interaction that attenuates the concept of sovereignty to allow for the participation of international organisations and NGOs in regime interaction. It explores ways in which regime interaction satisfies the demands of sovereignty by ensuring legitimacy. Issues such as accountability, transparency and cross-regime scrutiny become important at both a practical and theoretical level. An account of sovereignty that allows international law to confront issues of global concern, even as those issues traverse multiple regimes with disparate (and sometimes non-existing) State membership and differing organisational structures, is a necessary part of an open system of international law.

A ‘Regimes’ of international laws and institutions

‘Regimes’ is a term that delineates professional specialisations, treaty and institutional arrangements and subject disciplines bounded by functional, teleological, organisational and geographical domains. The international trade regime, headed by the World Trade Organization (WTO);6 the climate change regime, led by the Conferences of Parties to the United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC);7 and the law of the sea regime, dominated by the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea,8 exemplify common descriptions of separate but connected areas of international law.

Such arrangements conform to the idea of regimes as ‘sets of norms, decision-making procedures and organisations coalescing around functional issue-areas and dominated by particular modes of behaviour, assumptions and biases’.9 This definition is a hybrid of terms deployed and developed within international law and international relations (IR) scholarship.10 In the latter context, ‘regime theory’ concentrates on normative developments by States (and more specifically, governments) within regimes. Similarly, a growing body of work on ‘regime complexes’11 identifies how narrowly framed regimes devised by States are linked together to address set issues.

A similar preoccupation with the interests of States pervades the understanding of ‘regimes’ in international law. Early usage of the term ‘regimes’ by the International Court of Justice combined it with the adjective ‘self-contained’, to emphasise a system of legal prescriptions (relating to diplomatic law) that contained its own rules on the consequences of breach.12 The ILC now prefers the term ‘special regimes’ in its conceptualisation of the operation of lex specialis in the context of resolving conflicts of norms arising from the fragmentation and diversification of international law.13

Whilst the ILC’s use of the term ‘special regimes’ generally reiterates the centrality of States in regime formation and operation, the third of its three offered definitions hints at a broader conception.14 If ‘regimes’ are defined to include bodies of ‘functional specialization or teleological orientation’, such as environmental law or trade law,15 arguably a wide number of actors besides States are included in the definition. Specialisation connotes an expertise, and possibly a ‘professional mindset’,16 most commonly belonging to technical experts operating within secretariats but also within tribunals, NGOs and other bodies. Understanding the contribution made by these actors to regimes underpins IR scholarship on ‘epistemic communities’.17 It is also part of the broader realisation that the conflict between regimes in international law reflects wider societal conflicts.18

Two consequences relevant to the current chapter flow from this broad understanding of regimes. First, the enhanced recognition of the role of non-State actors – especially international inter-governmental organisations and NGOs – in the formation and operation of regimes19 displaces sovereign States as the sole drivers of regime interaction. Secondly, accounting more clearly for institutions allows for a greater understanding of the changing nature of sovereignty, not only when such institutions facilitate compliance with international law,20 but also when they facilitate regime interaction.

Institutions are central in efforts to promote interaction within and between regimes. A surprising array of examples document intra-regime co-operation. In the human rights field, for example, NGOs have moved far beyond the original expectations which encapsulated their formal consultative status in order to forge normative development and links between UN human rights bodies.21 In the environmental field, institutional interplay accompanies a great deal of the growth in norms22 (otherwise termed ‘treaty congestion’).23 The trade regime,24 private property rights and regulation,25 indigenous peoples’ rights26 and the protection of cultural expression27 have all undergone further specialisation and internal fragmentation.

Aside from intra-regime interaction, a plethora of examples document the growing normative overlap and institutional co-operation between regimes. These are too numerous to list in the current chapter,28 but notable analyses are available on the links between, for instance, human rights and humanitarian intervention,29 climate change and human rights,30 fisheries agreements and trade law,31 and biodiversity and forests.32 These regimes are supported by different (and differently empowered)33 international organisations, have different (or, at the very least, non-identical) members and came into being with laws that were developed at different times and with different functions. Whilst the most obvious clashes between regimes occur during the settlement of disputes,34 it is clear that the relations between these regimes extend far beyond the headline act of a tribunal forced to identify priority in conflicting norms.35 Their on-going interactions are often productive for international law and its beneficiaries,36 yet also present challenges for sovereignty.

The growth of regimes that are detached from sovereign States (but which still conform to the definition of regimes offered at the start of this part37) must also be noted. Certain regimes, such as the indigenous legal arrangements relating to the forest, or ‘transnational regimes’ motivated by sectoral differentiation such as the law of the internet, are not dependent on States and may even be antagonistic to their interests.38 Clearly, the interaction of regimes in these contexts gives rise to particular challenges for sovereignty, especially when private legal regimes seek a global, unifying reach that mirrors aspects of constitutionalism.39

The ILC Study Group noted the growth in ‘quasi-autonomous normative sources’ arising at the international level,40 and the complexity associated with non-governmental participants and other actors.41 While its recommendations were addressed to States and accorded with a traditional conception of sovereignty (whereby situations of conflict or interpretation were to be resolved by seeking to ascertain the intentions of States parties), it also concluded its pioneering study by calling for further work to be done on ‘the notion and operation of “regimes”’.42 This wider task animates the present chapter, and the next part considers in greater depth the impact on sovereignty wrought by regime interaction.

B Sovereignty and its demands

The concept of sovereignty, though contested,43 contains a ‘presumption of full governmental authority over a polity and territory’.44 Sovereignty has historically evolved to attach only to States. Regimes are made up of more than just States: as set out above, they include institutions and those actors possessing relevant functional expertise. Though these non-State actors are central to regime interaction, they do not possess sovereignty. Even less relevant to them is sovereign equality, especially considering the wildly divergent concentrations of power and interests they represent.

Modern sovereignty is currently said to be in crisis, with national authority struggling to retain control over challenges presented by an increased trans-boundary movement of people, capital, information and goods.45 The establishment of regimes, in part to address the challenges of globalisation, is argued to be a specific threat to sovereignty, given the delegation of power from States to collective agreements.46 The counter-argument is that States may (and do) withdraw from regimes, and thus retain their sovereignty in the face of new and emerging international law. In addition, sovereignty may be reinforced by the establishment of regimes that enable States to achieve long-term aims that would otherwise be elusive.47

When regimes interact, sovereignty is challenged in a related but slightly different way. At its heart, the challenges posed to sovereignty by regime interaction go to a loss of authority and control by States. If States have ratified the agreements that underpin the interacting regimes, or have otherwise consented to the interaction, sovereignty is not unduly affected. But if the States have not, even impliedly, permitted international secretariats to share information, work together, assist in the drafting of new rules, interpret norms or otherwise be influenced by other international regimes, threats to sovereignty may be said to arise. Similar pressures arise when international tribunals within particular regimes take into account laws and material from other regimes in their decisions.

The following examples of regime interaction illustrate the variability of its impacts on sovereignty. Regime interaction apparently most reverential to sovereignty arises if States are members of the relevant regimes before they interact. This situation is promoted by some interpretations of Article 31(3)(c) of the Vienna Convention on Law of Treaties (VCLT),48 which provides that a treaty may be interpreted with reference to:

  1. (c) any relevant rules of international law applicable in the relations between the parties.

Though not a mainstream view, a notorious WTO Panel has ruled that Article 31(3)(c) requires overlapping membership between the treaty being interpreted and the treaty (or ‘relevant rules’) that is said to form the context.49 According to that Panel, the WTO legal agreements may only be interpreted with reference to other rules of international law, if all WTO members have signed up to those rules. If there is explicit consent by all parties to both sets of regimes, interaction does not unduly affect States parties’ rights and duties, and the traditional notion of sovereignty appears to prevail.50 Yet, like many arguments surrounding sovereignty, the real question is ‘whose sovereignty?’51 On one view, sovereignty is threatened rather than preserved by a rigid prescription of parallel membership. At least notionally, the requirement that regimes have common membership before they share norms grants those States which are not members of the relevant regimes a power of veto over the evolution of international law.52

A second example also demonstrates apparent fidelity to sovereignty in regime interaction. States often agree that regimes will influence one another, even if they are not parties to all relevant regimes. Rules that allow observer status to international organisations – in negotiations or on-going committee work – are a common feature in bodies such as the WTO, the Food and Agriculture Organisation (FAO) and the Conference of the Parties to the Convention on the International Trade in Endangered Species (CITES).53 Common membership by States is not a prerequisite to regime interaction, but State consent is.

A third set of examples of regime interaction has a less certain link with State consent, and therefore with sovereignty. In one example, the WTO Appellate Body referred to the law of international environmental regimes when interpreting WTO norms in the US–Shrimp dispute, notwithstanding a lack of parallel membership.54 Its secretariat also issued a directive for the submission of amicus briefs during highly controversial asbestos litigation between Canada and the European Union – an act that foreshadowed the receipt of information from a range of sources, including NGOs from public health regimes.55 In determining threats to marine species, the CITES secretariat has collaborated with the FAO on scientific and research data, and ultimately entered into a memorandum of understanding on how CITES may protect such species. Finally, the World Bank’s Forest Carbon Partnership Facility has forged links with a range of States and non-State entities to develop capacity in forestry governance, despite the absence of a multilateral forestry convention. These activities are part of attempts to establish programmes to reduce emissions from deforestation and forest degradation (the ‘REDD’ programmes identified above) through incentives paid by States and funding bodies to particular governments.56 The World Bank’s efforts can be viewed as part of an ‘assemblage’ that includes local forest dwelling and indigenous communities, merchant banks, agricultural companies, environmental NGOs, satellite remote-sensing experts and State regulators.57

These examples may satisfy the direct demands of sovereignty if the relevant international organisations are acting within their powers. According to international law, as developed from the early Reparations case, international organisations have international legal personality and certain powers may be implied.58 It may be argued that in situations of legal fragmentation, international inter-governmental organisations impliedly possess relevant powers to interact with other regimes in certain circumstances where such interaction is functionally necessary (just as the United Nations was implied to possess the power to bring an international claim for reparations on behalf of itself and its slain agent). As such, international organisations acting independently of their members in particular circumstances of legal fragmentation do not threaten the sovereignty of their members.

Such a construction, however, does not conform to the current majority view within international institutional law. The International Court of Justice has held that, in construing the implied powers of international organisations, regard will be had to what is functionally necessary given that international organisations have specific specialisations: according to this construction, the World Health Organisation was held not to have implied powers to request an advisory opinion on the legality of nuclear weapons, given that this remained the realm of the Security Council.59 On this view, international competences are parcelled up appropriately as between international organisations, and it will not be necessary for them to interact even as new global issues traversing multiple regimes arise (or at least, if such issues do arise, States parties need to directly consent to inter-regime competences in addressing them).

Apart from the uncertainties surrounding the legal capacity of institutions acting independently from States in situations of regime interaction, threats to sovereignty arise from the enhanced role of experts. These experts are a necessary part of regime interaction (when, for example, data on the decline of fish stocks is sought by the FAO from the CITES secretariat; or when satellite technology and climate modelling is needed by the World Bank to determine REDD recipients). Yet managerial procedures and the resultant decision-making by the privileged and isolated few who are proficient in modes of exchanges between regimes may be part of a wider phenomenon of what has been called a ‘technicalisation’ of international affairs.60 Significant risks may arise from allowing experts within regimes greater latitude in regime interplay. The resultant regime interaction may suggest a rational and coherent resolution of global problems, but in fact may be reinforcing a dominant set of preferences that simply further the agenda of particular regimes.61 While the interests of some powerful States may well be satisfied by this interaction, the interests – and sovereignty – of others are clearly strained.62 This seems to replay the historical engagement between power and technology that established early forms of sovereignty and territory through mapping and other techniques.63

Yet amongst all these pressures on established notions of sovereignty, it must be recognised that the expertise and interests held by non-State actors are often necessary to confront global issues that cross over many regimes. As James Crawford notes, whilst States maintain some monopolies, such as the collective capacity to determine peremptory norms, ‘we now reject other claims to State monopoly formerly associated with the doctrine of sovereignty, in particular the monopoly of rights and the monopoly of representation’.64 Moreover, even if the interests pursued by non-State actors are not considered representative of a citizen majority, they may provide useful perspectives for deliberation and debate.65 Affected stakeholders are often in the best position to review information.66 Open participation leads to better implementation of rules,67 and promotes learning, information-exchange, peer review and cross-forum experimentation across a range of international organisations.68 The challenge is therefore to identify how the demands of sovereignty can be met through the participation of a multitude of actors besides States in regime interaction.

C How regime interaction can satisfy the demands of sovereignty

This chapter has pointed to the involvement of a range of actors in global issues that traverse the boundaries of multiple international regimes. These include non-State actors advancing divergent interests and expertise in subject areas such as public health (in the case of the amicus briefs at the WTO), marine species preservation (in the case of the CITES secretariat), forest subsistence (in the case of indigenous communities) and even wealth maximisation (in the case of merchant banks involved in REDD projects). Their involvement demonstrates that international law is not simply an inter-State system but instead can be viewed as a multiplicity of State and non-State actors participating in a range of globalising processes.69

In some examples, States explicitly or impliedly consent to regime interaction, thus satisfying a pure, positivist conception of sovereignty. But in others, non-State actors appear to be participating independently of the wishes of sovereign States. When these actors shape the production of knowledge, determine facts and draw upon law, they join States parties in controlling the intersections between regimes and their outcomes. Can the demands of sovereignty be satisfied in these situations? This part argues in the affirmative, by setting out the necessary legal conditions for international law to address issues of real complexity that cover multiple fields of functional and professional specialisation whilst retaining legitimacy.

Without direct consent, sovereignty can be satisfied by determining the representative or deliberative credentials of non-State actors according to known public law traditions for assessing accountability.70 The assessment differs as between international inter-governmental organisations and NGOs. The substance and mode of development of the relevant intersecting norms will also determine the legitimacy of regime interaction. There will be times when legitimacy is not satisfied and it will not be appropriate for international organisations and NGOs to control the interaction between regimes, as set out below.

For international organisations mediating the boundaries between regimes, there is a constant and continuous need for inter-regime scrutiny, not just of the relevant norms but also of the actors conveying those norms. For example, when the CITES secretariat collaborates with the FAO about the status of fish stocks, its recommendations to list species will be subject to a vote by CITES parties.71 When a WTO Panel draws upon norms developed by international standard-setting bodies, it must determine that the relevant body was open to all WTO members.72 There are examples when international organisations will determine that the requisite standards for regime interaction are not met. Consider, for example, the World Health Organisation’s decision to restrict the involvement of tobacco lobbies in the development of the Framework Convention on Tobacco Control: whilst those lobbies represent ‘affected stakeholders’, their lack of open, transparent and ethical practices were grounds to deny them participation.73

This legal framework for regime interaction posits a kind of gatekeeper role for relevant international organisations to use norms that are exogenous to their own regime. International organisations are empowered to have regard to whether there is a high degree of international consensus to those norms. This may include inquiries into whether the norm has been agreed by a range of developing countries as well as developed countries. The substance of the norm will also dictate its relevance: for example, where norms developed by transnational regimes exhibit a ‘tunnel vision’ that disregards broader questions of public interest more commonly absorbed in the norms of national legal systems, this may lessen its relevance.74 Moreover, whether the norm was itself developed in an open and accessible way is relevant in a decision to accord it influence.75

The gatekeeper role of international organisations also requires them to assess the deliberative credentials of NGOs wishing to influence regime interaction. Such assessment will have regard to an NGO’s relevant functions, constituencies and intended beneficiaries and also ask whether it operates in an open, accessible, transparent and participatory way.76 Disclosure of funding, as required by some but not all international organisations, would seem necessary in this process.77 Private bodies that seek to accredit NGOs78 can provide evidence of good practice, in a tantalising example of sovereignty being strengthened by non-State processes.

This suggestion of a mediating role for international organisations accords with sociological theories of Gunter Teubner and others who support polycentric constitutionalism, where State-based norm-generative processes are supplemented and sometimes supplanted by processes within particular regimes.79 As has been observed within those theories, the State continues to play an important role in such processes.80 Sovereignty remains important even if it is somewhat hidden under layers of other legal – or even constitutionalising – activities. However, sovereignty may be said to rise to the surface in some particular situations of normative conflict. For example, when intersecting regimes involve indigenous norms, the resulting clashes between the social embeddedness of legal systems of indigenous societies and the formal law of modern international regimes are not resolvable through general conflict rules.81 Instead, institutionalised and proceduralised protection of the basic rights of those groups that are otherwise marginalised is more appropriate. In mediating regime interaction in REDD policies, for example, the inclusion of the interests of indigenous and forest-dwelling communities must, at the very least, require prior informed consent and benefit-sharing. While such guarantees are beginning to be located in international regimes,82 the fulfilment of such rights for indigenous peoples often depends once again on laws and processes within sovereign States.

These arguments for a legal framework of regime interaction seek to safeguard an attenuated form of sovereignty. The framework prioritises administrative law-type procedures of openness, transparency and reason-giving,83 although these procedures operate at the level of regimes rather than within internal regulatory agencies.84 The emphasis on inclusivity in situations of polycontextuality also follows existing literature on transnational governance, which rests an ideal of democratic legitimacy on the involvement of a broad sphere of actors.85 An extension of these ideas could even found a renewed set of sovereign responsibilities, which require States to be other-regarding in their dealings with intersecting regimes.86 The promotion of structures of accountability for States and non-State actors is necessary within an enriched theory of sovereignty that allows international law to better address global complexity.

Conclusion

While noting the stability and continuity of sovereignty as a key notion of international law, James Crawford also recognises that in times of vast political change, international law will change. He notes, ‘[t]he difficulty is to envision appropriate forms of change, and at the same time to hold to those aspects of international law which embody the stable outcomes of the interaction between peoples, societies and their governments over many years’.87 This chapter demonstrates that the modern phenomenon of fragmentation, which has seen international law develop into myriad regimes of different specialisations, norms, memberships and scope, leads to challenges for sovereignty. Global problems do not fall neatly into existing regimes, and international organisations and other actors must often work together, or at least concurrently, on global issues. If sovereignty demands that the consent of States underlies the flow of norms and the shaping of knowledge between regimes, such activities cannot be accounted for. Nor can a purely positivist conception of sovereignty account for situations of normative pluralism when the relevant intersecting regimes include private transnational arrangements, or indigenous systems, some of which have developed separately from, or specifically without, national support.

This chapter has argued that these challenges to sovereignty can be met by structures of accountability that ensure the accessibility and participation of a range of State and non-State actors. Such a system builds on already established roles of international organisations, and provides them with guidance in mediating the norms and practices of exogenous regimes. It also acknowledges situations where participation is legitimately denied, if international organisations and NGOs fail to demonstrate requisite credentials and credibility. Furthermore, for special situations of indigenous systems, substantive protections may also be necessary. In current and emerging situations of regime interplay, including between forestry governance and carbon markets, health and trade and fisheries management and conservation, State sovereignty may co-exist, and even be strengthened, by such arrangements. The interaction of regimes in situations of legal fragmentation, if based on an open, but rigorous, conception of membership and participation, can ensure the viability and application of international law to the issues of our day.

1 Martti Koskenniemi and Päivi Leino, ‘Fragmentation of International Law? Postmodern Anxieties’, Leiden Journal of International Law, 15 (2002), 553.

2 ILC Study Group, ‘Fragmentation of International Law: Difficulties Arising from the Diversification and Expansion of International Law, Conclusions of the Work of the Study Group’, A/CN.4/L.702 (18 July 2006); see also Report of the ILC Study Group, ‘Fragmentation of International Law: Difficulties Arising from the Diversification and Expansion of International Law’, finalised by Martti Koskenniemi, A/CN.4/L.682 and Corr.1 (13 April 2006).

3 See generally, Margaret A. Young (ed.), Regime Interaction in International Law: Facing Fragmentation (Cambridge University Press, 2012).

4 Tomer Broude and Yuval Shany, ‘The International Law and Policy of Multi-sourced Equivalent Norms’ in Tomer Broude and Yuval Shany (eds.), Multi-sourced Equivalent Norms in International Law (Oxford: Hart, 2011), 1.

5 For the risks in defining regimes and theorising their interactions (especially with respect to reductive thinking and essentialising tendencies), see Margaret A. Young, ‘Introduction: The Productive Friction between Regimes’ in Margaret A. Young (ed.), Regime Interaction in International Law: Facing Fragmentation (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 10–11.

6 Agreement Establishing the World Trade Organization (Marrakesh, 15 April 1994, 1 January 1995), 33 ILM 1143.

7 United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (New York, adopted 9 May 1992, entered into force 21 March 1994), 31 ILM 849.

8 United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (Montegobay, adopted 10 December 1982, entered into force 16 November 1994), 1833 UNTS 397.

9 Young, ‘Introduction: The Productive Friction between Regimes’, 11, building on Stephen Krasner’s seminal definition in his ‘Structural Causes and Regime Consequences: Regimes as Intervening Variables’ in Stephen Krasner (ed.), International Regimes (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1983), 3 (regimes are ‘sets of implicit or explicit principles, norms, rules, and decision-making procedures around which actors’ expectations converge in a given area of international relations’); see also Oran Young, International Cooperation: Building Regimes for Natural Resources and the Environment (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1989), 1. Note the different use of the term ‘regime’ to refer to government authority within a state, see e.g. James Crawford, ‘Sovereignty as a Legal Value’ in James Crawford and Martti Koskenniemi (eds.), The Cambridge Companion to International Law (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 127; also exemplified by the genteelism ‘regime change’ when governmental authority is challenged by intervention in domestic affairs by an external state.

10 The following overview is a brief summary of the more detailed analysis in Young, ‘Introduction: The Productive Friction between Regimes’, 4–11.

11 See e.g. Kal Raustiala and David Victor, ‘The Regime Complex for Plant Genetic Resources’, International Organization, 58 (2004), 277; Robert Keohane and David Victor, ‘The Regime Complex for Climate Change’, Perspectives on Politics, 9 (2011), 7.

12 Consular Staff in Tehran (USA v. Iran), ICJ Reports (1979), para. 86. See further Bruno Simma, ‘Self-Contained Regimes’, Netherlands Yearbook of International Law, 16 (1985), 115 and 117. For criticism of the Court’s use of the term, see James Crawford and Penelope Nevill, ‘Relations between International Courts and Tribunals: The “Regime Problem”’ in Margaret A. Young (ed.), Regime Interaction in International Law: Facing Fragmentation (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 235, 259.

13 See ILC Study Group Analytical Study, 81–2 (para. 152), 248 (para. 492). For definitions, see ILC Study Group Conclusions, 11–12, para. 12.

14 This usage applies when ‘all the rules and principles that regulate a certain problem area are collected together so as to express a “special regime”. Expressions such as “law of the sea”, “humanitarian law”, “human rights law”, “environmental law” and “trade law”, etc. give expression to some such regimes. For interpretative purposes, such regimes may often be considered in their entirety.’ Conclusions, ibid.

15 ILC Analytical Study, 72, para. 136.

16 On the influence of experts on international law, see Martti Koskenniemi, ‘The Fate of Public International Law: Between Technique and Politics’, Modern Law Review, 70 (2000), 1; David Kennedy, ‘The Mystery of Global Governance’, Ohio Northern University Law Review, 34 (2008), 827. See also Andrew T. F. Lang, ‘Legal Regimes and Professional Knowledges: The Internal Politics of Regime Definition’ in Margaret A. Young (ed.), Regime Interaction in International Law: Facing Fragmentation (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 113.

17 See e.g. Peter Haas, ‘Introduction: Epistemic Communities and International Policy Coordination’, International Organization, 46 (1992), 1.

18 Andreas Fischer-Lescano and Gunther Teubner, ‘Regime-collisions: The Vain Search for Legal Unity in the Fragmentation of Global Law’, Michigan Journal of International Law, 25 (2004), 999.

19 See Oran Young, ‘The Politics of International Regime Formation: Managing Natural Resources and the Environment’, International Organization, 43 (1989), 353–4.

20 Abram Chayes and Antonia Handler Chayes, The New Sovereignty: Compliance with International Regulatory Agreements (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1995).

21 Dianne Otto, ‘Institutional Partnership or Critical Seepages? The Role of Human Rights NGOs in the United Nations’ in Mashood A. Baderin and Manisuli Ssenyonjo (eds.), International Human Rights Law: Six Decades After the UDHR and Beyond (Aldershot: Ashgate, 2010), 317.

22 Thomas Gehring and Sebastian Oberthür, ‘Institutional Interaction: Ten Years of Scholarly Development’ in Sebastian Oberthür and Olav Schram Stokke (eds.), Managing Institutional Complexity: Regime Interplay and Global Environmental Change (Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2011), 25.

23 Rüdiger Wolfrum and Nele Matz, Conflicts in International Environmental Law (Berlin: Springer-Verlag, 2003), 3 and references cited therein.

24 Jagdish Bhagwati, Termites in the Trading System: How Preferential Agreements Undermine Free Trade (Oxford University Press, 2008), 63.

25 Steven R. Ratner, ‘Regulatory Takings in Institutional Context: Beyond the Fear of Fragmented International Law’, American Journal of International Law, 102 (2008), 475.

26 Claire Charters, ‘Multi-sourced Equivalent Norms and the Legitimacy of Indigenous Peoples’ Rights under International Law’ in Tomer Broude and Yuval Shany (eds.), Multi-sourced Equivalent Norms in International Law (Oxford: Hart, 2011), 289.

27 Toshiyuki Kono and Steven van Uytsel (eds.), The UNESCO Convention on the Diversity of Cultural Expressions: A Tale of Fragmentation in International Law (Cambridge: Intersentia, 2012).

28 Especially as one considers how the rhetoric of fragmentation has been used strategically throughout history: Anne-Charlotte Martineau, ‘The Rhetoric of Fragmentation: Fear and Faith in International Law’, Leiden Journal of International Law, 22 (2009), 1.

29 See e.g. Alexander Orakhelashvili, ‘The Interaction between Human Rights and Humanitarian Law: Fragmentation, Conflict, Parallelism, or Convergence?’, European Journal of International Law, 19 (2008), 161.

30 Stephen Humphreys, ‘Introduction: Human Rights and Climate Change’ in Stephen Humphreys (ed.), Human Rights and Climate Change (Cambridge University Press, 2009), 1.

31 Margaret A. Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish: The Interaction between Regimes in International Law (Cambridge University Press, 2011).

32 Harro van Asselt, ‘Managing the Fragmentation of International Environmental Law: Forests at the Intersection of the Climate and Biodiversity Regimes’, New York University Journal of International Law and Politics, 44 (2012), 1205.

33 Powers relate not only to enforcement (with the WTO regime notably the strongest), but also to the ability of organisations to establish their own administrative arrangements.

34 For examples, see Crawford and Nevill, ‘Relations between International Courts and Tribunals’, 235–60.

35 See also Jeffrey L. Dunoff, ‘A New Approach to Regime Interaction’ in Margaret A. Young (ed.), Regime Interaction in International Law: Facing Fragmentation (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 136.

36 Young, ‘Introduction: The Productive Friction between Regimes’.

37 See above n. 9 and associated text.

38 See Gunther Teubner and Peter Korth, ‘Two Kinds of Legal Pluralism: Collision of Transnational Regimes in the Double Fragmentation of World Society’ in Margaret A. Young (ed.), Regime Interaction in International Law: Facing Fragmentation (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 23.

39 See, generally, Christian Joerges, Inger-Johanne Sand and Gunther Teubner (eds.), Transnational Governance and Constitutionalism (Oxford: Hart, 2004).

40 ILC Analytical Study, 249.

41 Ibid., 252.

42 Ibid., 249.

43 Hent Kalmo and Quentin Skinner, ‘Introduction: A Concept in Fragments’ in Hent Kalmo and Quentin Skinner (eds.), Sovereignty in Fragments: The Past, Present and Future of a Contested Concept (Cambridge University Press, 2011), 1.

44 Crawford, ‘Sovereignty as a Legal Value’, 132.

45 See Richard Joyce, Competing Sovereignties (Abingdon: Routledge, 2013), 1–2, and sources therein; see also Stephen Krasner, Sovereignty: Organized Hypocrisy (Princeton University Press, 1999), 3.

46 Thomas M. Franck, ‘Can the United States Delegate Aspects of Sovereignty to International Regimes?’ in Thomas M. Franck (ed.), Delegating State Powers: The Effect of Treaty Regimes on Democracy and Sovereignty (New York: Transnational Publishers, 2000), 1. See also Oona Hathaway, ‘International Delegation and State Sovereignty’, Law and Contemporary Problems, 71 (2008), 115.

47 Hathaway, ‘International Delegation and State Sovereignty’, 141–5.

48 Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties (Vienna, adopted 22 May 1969, entered into force 27 January 1980), 1155 UNTS 331.

49 Panel Report, EC – Measures Affecting the Approval and Marketing of Biotech Products WT/DS291/R, WT/ DS292/R, WT/DS293/R (circulated 29 September 2006), para. 7.68. See further Margaret A. Young, ‘The WTO’s Use of Relevant Rules of International Law: An Analysis of the Biotech Case’, International and Comparative Law Quarterly, 56 (2007), 907.

50 The domestic analogue to this is a presumption of full policy co-ordination within state agencies, with the state then presenting a united and coherent front to all international regimes. For examples demonstrating the fiction behind such ideals, see Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 249–53.

51 The following statement by the Permanent Court of Justice is often pointed to as a founding argument for sovereignty: ‘International law governs relations between independent States. The rules of law binding upon States therefore emanate from their own free will as expressed in conventions or by usages generally accepted as expressing principles of law…Restrictions upon the independence of States cannot therefore be presumed.’ See SS Lotus Case (France v. Turkey), Judgment, 7 September 1927, PCIJ Series A, No. 10 (1927), 18. Yet, as James Crawford points out, the presumption is lessened in external affairs, since the equal rights of other States must be taken into account: James Crawford, ‘The Criteria for Statehood in International Law’, British Yearbook of International Law, 48 (1976), 108. In the Lotus case, the Permanent Court was concerned with the freedoms of Turkey (in prosecuting a French officer of the watch after a collision between a French and a Turkish steamship). At Cambridge, we students of James Crawford were prompted to consider how the jurisdictional issue would have been resolved had France’s freedoms been at issue.

52 Margaret A. Young, ‘Regime Interaction in Creating, Implementing and Enforcing International Law’ in Margaret A. Young (ed.), Regime Interaction in International Law: Facing Fragmentation (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 85, 95–6.

53 Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (Washington, DC adopted 3 March 1973, entered into force 1 July 1975), 983 UNTS 243. See further ibid., 96–7.

54 Appellate Body Report, United States – Import Prohibition of Certain Shrimp and Shrimp Products WT/DS58/AB/R (circulated 12 October 1998); the Appellate Body was following norms of interpretation in the VCLT, especially Art. 31(1); see further Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 189–240.

55 Duncan Hollis, ‘Private Actors in Public International Law: Amicus Curiae and the Case for the Retention of State Sovereignty’, Boston College International and Comparative Law Review, 25 (2002), 235.

56 See International Bank for Reconstruction and Development, Charter Establishing the Forest Carbon Partnership Facility (March 2010), Recital B (‘[T]he Forest Carbon Partnership Facility [aims] to build partnerships among developed and developing countries, public and private sector entities, international organizations, non-governmental organizations, forest-dependent indigenous peoples and forest dwellers to prepare for possible future systems of positive incentives for REDD, including innovative approaches to sustainable use of forest resources and biodiversity conservation’).

57 William Boyd, ‘Climate Change, Fragmentation, and the Challenges of Global Environmental Law: Elements of a Post-Copenhagen Assemblage’, University of Pennsylvania Journal of International Law, 32 (2010), 457.

58 Reparation for Injuries Suffered in the Service of the United Nations, Advisory Opinion, 11 April 1949, ICJ Reports (1949), 174. See further James Crawford, ‘International Law as an Open System’ in James Crawford, International Law as an Open System: Selected Essays (London: Cameron May, 2002), 19–22.

59 Legality of the Use by a State of Nuclear Weapons in Armed Conflict, Advisory Opinion, 8 July 1996, ICJ Reports (1996), 79.

60 Koskenniemi, ‘The Fate of Public International Law’; see also Martti Koskenniemi, ‘International Law: Constitutionalism, Managerialism and the Ethos of Legal Education’, European Journal of Legal Studies, 1 (2007) (online reference: see www.ejls.eu/1/4UK.pdf); Stephen Toope, ‘Emerging Patterns of Governance and International Law’ in Michael Byers (ed.), The Role of Law in International Politics (Oxford University Press, 2000), 106.

61 Martti Koskenniemi, ‘Hegemonic Regimes’ in Margaret A. Young (ed.), Regime Interaction in International Law: Facing Fragmentation (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 305.

62 For an analysis of how powerful states maintain their dominance in conditions of fragmentation, see Eyal Benvenisti and George W. Downs, ‘The Empire’s New Clothes: Political Economy and the Fragmentation of International Law’, Stanford Law Review, 60 (2007), 595.

63 Michael Biggs, ‘Putting the State on the Map: Cartography, Territory, and European State Formation’, Comparative Studies in Society and History, 41 (1999), 399.

64 Crawford, ‘International Law as an Open System’, 38.

65 See e.g. the call for NGO participation in WTO decision-making to ensure the inclusion of ideas that are ‘overlooked or undervalued by governments’: Steve Charnovitz, ‘WTO Cosmopolitics’, NYU Journal of International Law and Politics, 34 (2002), 343.

66 Michael Dorf and Charles Sabel, ‘A Constitution of Democratic Experimentalism’, Columbia Law Review, 98 (1998), 267.

67 See e.g. David Victor, Kal Raustiala and Eugene Skolnikoff, ‘Introduction and Overview’ in David Victor, Kal Raustiala and Eugene Skolnikoff (eds.), The Implementation and Effectiveness of International Environmental Commitments: Theory and Practice (Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1998), 21–4.

68 See e.g. the need for a wide range of inter-governmental organisations, besides the ones with traditional mandates for fisheries, to co-operate on sustainability: Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 275.

69 On multiplicity of actors, see further Saskia Sassen, Territory, Authority, Rights: From Medieval to Global Assemblages (Princeton University Press, 2006), 340.

70 The following is developed from what I have argued to be a ‘legal framework for regime interaction’ in the context of fisheries governance: see Young, ‘Regime Interaction in Creating, Implementing and Enforcing International Law’, 98–109. See further, Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 241–306.

71 Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 278.

72 Relatedly, standard setting bodies are also encouraged to operate with open, impartial and transparent procedures: see WTO Doc. G/TBT/1/Rev.8 (Decision of the TBT Committee on Principles for the Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations), discussed in Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 279.

73 World Health Organisation, Report of the Committee of Experts on Tobacco Industry Documents, ‘Tobacco Company Strategies to Undermine Tobacco Control Activities at the World Health Organization’ (July 2000), 244, cited in Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 283–4.

74 Teubner and Korth, ‘Two Kinds of Legal Pluralism’.

75 Cf. the OECD, which is a closed group representing only thirty developed countries; see further Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 282.

76 See Sasha Courville, ‘Understanding NGO-based Social and Environmental Regulatory Systems: Why We Need New Models of Accountability’ in Michael W. Dowdle (ed.), Public Accountability: Designs, Dilemmas and Experiences (Cambridge University Press, 2006), 271.

77 The United Nations, for example, requires NGOs to provide details about funding, but the World Intellectual Property Organisation does not. See further Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 282–3. The guidelines issued by the WTO Appellate Body in the EC-Asbestos appeal (see above n. 55 and surrounding text) required amicus briefs to state the nature of their interest.

78 See e.g. the International Social and Environmental Accreditation Alliance (ISEAL Alliance), available at www.isealalliance.org.

79 See Gunther Teubner, ‘Constitutionalizing Polycontexturality’, Social and Legal Studies, 20 (2011), 210.

80 Gert Verschraegen, ‘Hybrid Constitutionalism, Fundamental Rights and the State: A Response to Gunther Teubner’, Netherlands Journal of Legal Philosophy, 40 (2011), 216.

81 Teubner and Korth, ‘Two Kinds of Legal Pluralism’.

82 See Nagoya Protocol on Access to Genetic Resources and the Fair and Equitable Sharing of Benefits Arising from their Utilisation to the Convention on Biological Diversity, foreshadowed in Teubner and Konth, ‘Two Kinds of Legal Pluralism’, 52; see also the United Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples, A/RES/61/295, 2 October 2007 and UNFCCC Cancun Agreement, Decision 1/CP. 16, FCCC/CP/2010/7/Add. 1 (2010), Appendix I.

83 For related attempts to locate accountability structures in non-traditional sites of globalised law-making, see Benedict Kingsbury, Nico Krisch and Richard Stewart, ‘The Emergence of Global Administrative Law’, Law and Contemporary Problem, 68 (2005), 15.

84 On the classification of norms from global administrative law, see Teubner, ‘Constitutionalizing Polycontexturality’, 219.

85 Patrizia Nanz, ‘Democratic Legitimacy and Constitutionalisation of Transnational Trade Governance: A View from Political Theory’ in Christian Joerges and Ernst-Ulrich Petersmann (eds.), Constitutionalism, Multilevel Trade Governance and Social Regulation (Oxford: Hart, 2006), 80; see also Inger-Johanne Sand, ‘Polycontextuality as an Alternative to Constitutionalism’ in Christian Joerges, Inger-Johanne Sand and Gunther Teubner (eds.), Transnational Governance and Constitutionalism (Oxford: Hart, 2004), 41.

86 For one examination of whether sovereigns must incorporate in their decision-making the concerns of those they affect, see Eyal Benvenisti, ‘Sovereigns as Trustees of Humanity: On the Accountability of States to Foreign Stakeholders’, American Journal of International Law, 107 (2013), 295.

87 James Crawford, ‘Democracy and International Law’, British Yearbook of International Law, 63 (1993), 113, 133.

5 The legitimacy of investment treaties Between Exit, Voice and James Crawford’s quest for a more democratic international law

Lluís Paradell Trius

Introduction

In the last decade, controversy has arisen regarding the compatibility of investment protection treaties and the ICSID Convention with national constitutions and State sovereignty. The focus of concerns has been the alleged lack of equality, transparency, predictability and accountability of investor–State arbitration under those treaties.1 Horacio Rosatti, former attorney general of Argentina, was among the first to complain in 2003, when starting to defend Argentina from the avalanche of investment treaty claims brought by investors aggrieved by Argentina’s 2002 measures to fight its economic crisis.2

Many more similar comments of unease followed suit in Argentina, including a book by the judge of the Supreme Court, Carlos Fayt.3 Draft laws were prepared by Argentine MPs to declare bilateral investment treaties (BITs) unconstitutional.4 Further, while Colombian and Bolivian courts heard and rejected constitutional challenges against investment treaties,5 in Ecuador some BITs were declared unconstitutional and others are still under review in Ecuador.6 In Canada, NAFTA Chapter 11 investment protections were also attacked as unconstitutional.7 Australia announced in 2011 that it would no longer include investor–State arbitration in its trade agreements, given its impact on State sovereignty.8 Recently, a columnist of the UK newspaper The Guardian mounted a furious attack on the investment protection chapter of the EU–US Transatlantic Trade and Investment Partnership, which is being negotiated, because it ‘would let rapacious companies subvert our laws, rights and national sovereignty’ and ‘kill regulations protecting people and the living planet’.9 Professor Martti Koskenniemi has also argued that this agreement is ‘a transfer of power from public authorities to an arbitration body, where a handful of people would be able to rule whether a country can enact a law or not and how the law must be interpreted’.10

The complaints have often been tainted by ideological opinions and political interests. Disapproval of investment treaties by States has frequently been a reaction to being sued under such treaties. The opposition to open market policies may also have influenced the doctrinal charge against the investment treaty regime. Thus, the critics have in turn been attacked for echoing prejudice and preconception, or at least an overstated and one-sided focus on the shortcomings of investment treaty arbitration, under the banner of the system’s ‘legitimacy crisis’, rather than engaging in more fine-grained analysis.11 Empirical research, in turn, has shown (arguably) that States often prevail in investment treaty cases, so that the concern that investment treaties unduly constrain sovereignty and regulatory action may be somewhat exaggerated.12

There is no intention here to join either side of the debate, but to suggest that its mere existence should give pause for thought. Similar legitimacy issues have arisen in relation to other areas of international law and other international norm-generation institutions, like the WTO, the free trade provisions of the NAFTA and the international criminal courts.13 Monroe Leigh’s contention that due-process concerns generated by some of the decisions of the existing war crimes tribunals indicated the need ‘to commence a campaign to add a Bill of Rights to the UN Charter’14 is reminiscent of the familiar debate on the need to incorporate human rights protections in European Community law. Hence, ‘critical transnational constitutional crises’15 are not unheard of.

Two precedents of legitimacy crises will be reviewed here: the debate in US law in the 1950s and ’60s on the constitutionality of human rights’ treaties in the context of the civil rights movement; and the constitutionality problems linked to the supremacy of European Community (EC) law in EC Member States. The US controversy resulted in the non-ratification by the US of human rights’ treaties, and still today international law has a somewhat precarious status in the US legal system. Conversely, the EC debate resulted in the reinforcement of the EC system through dialogue and cross-fertilisation between national courts and the European Court of Justice (ECJ).

The suggestion in this chapter is that the investment treaty regime may learn some lessons from these crises. Before delving further into them, however, a brief explanation of the framework for the analysis is needed.

The Exit and Voice dichotomy, and James Crawford’s quest for a more democratic international law

The disparity of approaches to an international regime’s legitimacy crisis may be explained by the dichotomy between ‘Exit’ and ‘Voice’, used by Joseph Weiler to explain some of the dynamics in the EC legal order: ‘Exit is the mechanism of organizational abandonment in the face of unsatisfactory performance. Voice is the mechanism of intraorganizational correction and recuperation.’16 Thus, the legitimacy and constitutionality problems of international regimes may lead to opposite forces: withdrawal from the system (Exit) or demand for more participation (Voice). The greater the opportunities for Voice, the less the tendency for Exit.

In investment arbitration Exit has already appeared in the form of denunciation of the ICSID Convention17 and termination of some BITs.18 Voice too has been felt in the amendment of model investment treaties,19 the issuance of biding interpretations of their provisions20 and the participation of States as non-disputing parties in some cases. But the question here is whether the dynamics of Voice may also be heard on a day-to-day basis in the case law of investment treaty tribunals, in the way they integrate national legal concepts and interact with domestic courts. If so, the tendency for Exit may be mitigated.

Inspiration is drawn, as ever, from James Crawford, my esteemed professor and mentor, an exceptional man and friend who has made international law and to whom this modest contribution is dedicated. Now that he is retiring from his chair as Whewell Professor of International Law at the University of Cambridge, I want to recall his inaugural lecture back in 1993, entitled ‘Democracy in International Law’, which I had the pleasure to attend and which influenced my PhD thesis on the interaction between international law and national constitutions, supervised by him.21 In that lecture he addressed a number of facets of the relationship between international law and democratic principles. One of his arguments was to question the continuing acceptability of the rule of international law which provides that, except for treaties entered into in manifest violation of a rule of constitutional law of fundamental importance, national constitutional standards do not affect the international validity of international commitments and obligations.22 In his lecture James referred to this rule as one of the ‘deeply undemocratic features of classical international law’.23

No doubt the traditional rule of irrelevance of domestic law is required at a practical level, for international law to be able to function as a legal system binding its subjects, the States. However, at a more conceptual level this paradigm may not be fit for the increasing overlap between international and national constitutional law. Hence in 1997 James wrote as follows:

[T]he relation between the international and constitutional levels can be reciprocal, and if there is to be a ‘constitutionalisation’ of international law and treaty making – which their effects on the individual increasingly seems to call for – it may occur by way of the co-opting of national constitutional limitations in the interests of international regularity.24

The demands of national constitutions cannot be ignored if developments in international law, notably its growing concern with the relationship between the State and the individual, are to be accepted. Some fundamental principles of national constitutions may be externalised and thus condition the development of international law. As public power is exercised and reviewed internationally, and international law is in many domains reconceived as a system of public law, constitutional principles may operate as constraints on international or supranational action, thereby reinforcing its legitimacy. If these dynamics appear, then Voice prevails over Exit. Conversely, exaggerated criticism leads to Exit, which represents the defeat of the fruitful interaction between international law and national law.

The risks of Exit: international law in US civil rights litigation

Writing in 1948, Paul Sayre criticised the Supreme Court landmark decision in Shelley v. Kraemer (1948)25 because it had neglected to refer to the US obligations under the UN Charter as a basis for refusing to judicially enforce a racially restrictive covenant relating to private property. He added that the UN Charter ‘is now not only part of our constitution, but by our constitutional act we are part of the United Nations…we are morally and legally bound to give them [the Charter’s provisions] all full effect all the time’.26 These were the early days of the American civil rights movement, in which civil liberties groups filed suits in both state and federal courts citing the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and Articles 55 and 56 of the UN Charter to challenge racial discrimination.27 According to these human rights clauses of the Charter, each member pledges itself to promote, and to take action for the achievement of, ‘universal respect for, and observance of, human rights and fundamental freedoms for all without distinction as to race, sex, language, or religion’.

Sayre’s contention seemed to find immediate support in two judicial decisions. In Oyama v. California (1948), the Supreme Court found that the California Alien Land Law, as applied to the case, deprived the applicant of the equal protection by discriminating against citizens of Japanese origin.28 The opinion did not reach the question of constitutionality of the Law, nor did it cite the UN Charter. However, two separate concurring opinions, in which four of the justices joined, not only mentioned the Charter but would have struck down the Law partially as infringing the international obligations there assumed.29 These arguments were extensively relied on by the Oregon Supreme Court in Namba v. McCourt (1949).30 In this decision, the Oregon Alien Land Law was held unconstitutional as racially discriminatory in violation of the equal protection clause of the Fourteenth Amendment, interpreted in the light of the UN Charter human rights provisions.31

This initial trend was to be halted by the landmark 1952 decision of the California Supreme Court in Sei Fujii v. State (1952).32 The case concerned a challenge by a Japanese resident in California against the validity of the California Alien Land Law, which discriminated against Japanese landowners. It was alleged that the Law was racially discriminatory and that it violated Articles 1, 55 and 56 of the United Nations Charter, as well as the equal protection clause of the Fourteenth Amendment. The California District Court of Appeal held that the constitutional arguments would fail on the grounds of the authority of Supreme Court case law upholding the constitutionality of alien land laws, and went on to strike down the Law as infringing the human rights provisions of the UN Charter.33

This decision was followed by vivid controversy and widespread criticism, generated in particular by those that sought to prevent bringing an end to racial segregation by international agreement.34 Together with the US signature of the Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of Genocide in 1948,35 concern arose that international commitments might undermine State sovereignty, national autonomy and the US form of government. This set off a campaign to limit the treaty power, culminating in the proposed Bricker Amendment, which would have made all treaties non-self-executing.36

In response to all this debate, the California Supreme Court affirmed the lower court’s decision solely on constitutional grounds, and held the human rights clauses of the UN Charter to be non-self-executing.37 The Court found the Charter provisions to be vague and lacking the intent necessary to make them self-executing. The examination of the position taken by the US negotiators, and by the political branches in ratifying the Charter, led also to the conclusion that the US had not undertaken an immediate obligation to supersede conflicting national legislation. Thus, the Court held that the provisions Charter’s invoked were not intended to become rules of law for the judiciary to apply.38

The debate around the self-executing doctrine generated by the Fujii case and the Bricker Amendment exerted very considerable influence thereafter. The US did not ratify any major human rights treaty until 1986. Since then it has ratified the Genocide Convention in 1986, the Convention Against Torture and Other Cruel, Inhuman or Degrading Treatment or Punishment in 1990, the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights in 1992 and the Convention of the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination in 1994. However, ratification has been subjected to comprehensive reservations which raise questions about the seriousness of the US’s commitment, and to declarations establishing that the treaties are non-self-executing.

The constitutionality of these declarations is doubtful because they prevent judges from applying treaty law, for which they are empowered by the Constitution, and which contradicts the purpose of the Supremacy Clause.39 In any case, this episode evidences the risks linked to Exit. As a result of the Fujii case and the ensuing controversy, courts revitalised and expanded the self-executing treaty doctrine to hold a series of human rights treaties to be non-self-executing.40 International law was ousted from the civil rights litigation, and as a consequence it probably took longer for US racial segregation to end, even if the UN Charter may have had an indirect effect on the civil rights jurisprudence.41 More generally, courts discovered the use of the doctrine of non-self-executing treaties to circumvent the consequences that the enforcement of treaty obligations may have upon internal law.

This is why multilateral treaties, with much greater impact in internal law than bilateral treaties, are almost always regarded as non-self-executing in US law.42 Whenever the position of the US government is opposed to the enforcement of a treaty provision, or the latter may bring the court in conflict with, or embarrass, the political branches, courts may find a way out by determining the provisions of a treaty non-self-executing. In these situations courts avoid deciding substantive international law issues that cases may raise, so that the non-self-executing doctrine serves the same purpose as the ‘political question’ doctrine. The controlling rationale for both is the courts’ understanding of the demands of the constitutional separation of powers: the need to preserve the authority of the political organs in matters which have been considered particularly within their competence.43

The potential and fruitful interaction between international law and national law, including constitutional law, came out unfulfilled. One example is that while an increasing number of States favour the normativity of international law, notably human rights law, by resorting to it in interpreting ‘open – textured’ provisions of the national constitution, this trend is much less perceptible in the United States. In particular, the Supreme Court has shown considerable disinclination towards using international instruments as a guiding principle for constitutional interpretation.

In Stanford v. Kentucky (1989), for instance, the question of the relevance of international and comparative law for constitutional interpretation was raised before the Court in a case concerning the imposition of capital punishment upon juveniles aged sixteen and seventeen. The Supreme Court examined whether the punishment was contrary to ‘evolving standards of decency that mark the progress of a maturing society’, the criterion for the determination of the infringement of the Eighth Amendment’s prohibition against cruel and usual punishment. The majority’s opinion, written by Justice Scalia, held that in examining the ‘evolving standard of decency’ only US conceptions of decency were relevant, and refused to take into consideration comparative and international law practice in connection with the death penalty.44

The virtues of Voice: constitutional dialogues in the EC legal order

It is well known that EC law has evolved ‘into a vertically-integrated legal regime conferring judicially enforceable rights and obligations on all legal persons and entities, public and private, within EC territory’.45 This evolution was not explicitly envisaged by the founding treaties, but resulted, first and foremost, from a series of landmark decisions of the ECJ starting in the 1960s which established the doctrines of direct effect and supremacy of EC law in national legal systems, pre-emption, interpretation of national law in conformity with EC law, and the doctrine of governmental liability for failure to properly implement EC law.46

The deepening legal integration involved the need for national legal orders to come to terms with the vast constitutional implications of European Community integration. Recognition of the Community order meant the introduction of EC law among the sources of national law, with primacy over them; the transfer of law-making powers, policy determination authority and executive competences to Community institutions in ever-expanding fields; as well as, in many cases, the reinforcement of the judicial branch by introducing the principle of judicial review of the consistency of national legislation with EC law.

The alteration of the national constitutional structures and their adaptation to the EC legal order was achieved primarily by constitutional interpretation, effectuated by the supreme and constitutional courts of the Member States.47 In some cases, constitutions contained provisions permitting limitations of sovereignty and transfers of sovereign powers to international organisations.48 In other cases, such general clauses on membership of international organisations were adopted with the prospect of the country’s participation or accession to the EC.49 These rules were interpreted extensively so as to legitimise the constitutional adjustments required by the EC legal order. In addition, some countries inserted stipulations in their constitutions giving specific constitutional basis to European integration, notably in France and Germany in view of the ratification of the Maastricht Treaty (1992).50

However, the acceptance of the doctrines of EC legal integration and their consequences within national legal orders was not unconditional, nor did it necessarily comprise the endorsement of the ECJ’s rationale for the constitutionalisation of the EC legal order. In particular, the highest courts in the Member States did not seem to subscribe to the legal basis for EC supremacy offered by the ECJ – namely, the EC as a new and autonomous legal system prevailing over national law of its own force. Instead they insisted on a national constitutional basis51 or, exceptionally, an international law basis,52 for EC supremacy. Further, some supreme or constitutional courts specified that the constitutional provisions which mediate in the relationship between EC law and national law are subordinated to other constitutional provisions. In so doing, they established constitutional limits on European integration as well as reserved for them the ultimate authority to control the legality of EC law.

Thus, for instance, accepting supremacy of EC law without a guarantee that this supreme law would not violate the essential constitutional principles and fundamental rights enshrined in the constitution of a Member State would have been practically impossible. This was made particularly clear in Italy and Germany, given that in these countries human rights enjoy constitutional protection, post-war national identity is to a large extent founded on and shaped by the Constitution, and the constitutional legality is safeguarded by specialised constitutional courts.

In Italy, for example, the EC legal order was subject to the so-called ‘counter-limits’ (controlimiti) – that is, EC law’s respect for the fundamental principles of the constitutional system and the inalienable rights of individuals. The correlation in the jurisprudence of the Italian Constitutional Court between constitutional openness to European integration and its constitutional limitations arose for example in the Frontini case (1973).53 Here the Italian Constitutional Court affirmed that the Constitution authorised restrictions of the legislative power by effect of EC law, but if ever EC law led to ‘unacceptable power to violate the fundamental principles’ of the constitutional order ‘or the inalienable rights of man’ ‘the guarantee would always be assured that this Court would control the continuing compatibility of the Treaty with the above-mentioned fundamental principles’.54

Likewise, in its Granital decision (1984), the Constitutional Court recognised the immediate applicability and superiority of Community law over conflicting Italian legislation but also affirmed that ‘the law implementing the Treaty could be subject to review by this Court with regard to the basic principles of the municipal legal order and the inalienable rights of man’.55

In the Fragd decision (1989) the Constitutional Court declared itself competent ‘to verify whether or not a treaty norm, as interpreted and applied by the institutions and organs of the EEC, is in conflict with the fundamental principles of the Italian Constitution or violates the inalienable rights of man…Such a conflict, whilst being highly unlikely, could still happen.’56

In Germany, in the famous Solange I decision (1974)57 the Constitutional Court held that the German constitutional openness to the EC had to ‘be understood in the overall context of the Constitution’, and did not consent to ‘amending the basic structure of the Constitution, which forms the basis of its identity’. The Constitutional Court admitted that basic rights could be guaranteed on multiple levels but that, ‘as long as’ (Solange) ‘the integration process has not progressed so far that Community law also receives a catalogue of fundamental rights decided on by a parliament and of settled validity, which is adequate in comparison with the catalogue of fundamental rights contained in the Constitution’, the Constitutional Court would still control the constitutional legitimacy of EC law.58

After this decision, the Constitutional Court gradually showed more and more willingness to relinquish its control, on the very basis of the Solange I doctrine, as the Community system developed certain structural characteristics which ensured that the exercise of the competences transferred would not be contrary to the Constitution. The doctrine thus identified in the jurisprudence of the Constitutional Court a principle of structural congruence (strukturelle Kongruenz) – that is, the need for a substantial equivalence between the structure of the German constitutional order and the international organisation to which competences are transferred.59 Thus, in its Vielleicht (‘Maybe’) decision of 1979, the Constitutional Court declared in obiter dictum that it left open ‘whether and, if so, to what extent – maybe in view of political and legal developments in the European sphere occurring in the meantime – the principles contained in its decision of 29 May 1974 can continue to claim validity without limitation’.60

A turning point in the case law of the German Constitutional Court was its Solange II decision (1986).61 The Court held that, at the EC level, ‘there should be a guarantee of the application of fundamental rights which in substance and effectiveness is essentially similar to the protection of fundamental rights required unconditionally by the Constitution’,62 and that ‘so long as’ (Solange) an effective protection was thus ensured, the Court would not exercise its jurisdiction ‘to decide on the applicability of secondary Community legislation cited as the legal basis for any acts of German courts or authorities…and it will no longer review such legislation by the standard of the fundamental rights contained in the Constitution’.63 Thus, the Constitutional Court stressed the ‘functional interlocking of the jurisdiction of the European Communities with those of the Member-States’.64 This strengthened the position of the ECJ, now considered the effective ‘ordinary’ guardian of fundamental rights, but also implied the Constitutional Court’s final say in conflicts with the ECJ.

That all this concern for fundamental constitutional values may not have been unfounded may be illustrated with some practical examples. In Groener (1989), for instance, the ECJ balanced the protection of the Gaelic language in Ireland with the EC principle of free movement of labour, in holding that the Irish laws requiring teachers to pass a Gaelic-language exam to obtain a job was a reasonable and non-discriminatory restriction to EC law.65 In Grogan (1991), the freedom to supply services was balanced against the Irish prohibition of the distribution of information concerning abortion services in another Member State. The ECJ held that while abortion could be considered a service under EC law, the Irish prohibition in cause did not violate EC law because in this case the link between the providers of information and the providers of abortion in another Member State was too indirect.66

In general, the ECJ has been cautious in giving a decision that may directly clash with national constitutional values. Further, it has incorporated human rights into the EC legal order, adopting for its criteria the constitutional traditions common to the Member States and the international human rights conventions to which they have subscribed.67 Thus, the interaction between the ECJ and national constitutional courts has led to ‘stable accommodations on rights and to the obligation of ordinary courts to enforce EC law’.68 However, the problem remains who is the ultimate authority to determine the constitutionality of EC acts. This was recast in the Maastricht judgment of the German Constitutional Court in the form of the Kompetenz-Kompetenz problem, ‘the question as to which jurisdiction, Community or national, has the ultimate authority to declare the unconstitutionality of Community measures on the grounds of ultra vires and effectively to become the arbiter of the jurisdictional limits of the Community legal order’.69 The German Constitutional Court’s assertion of its competence reflects democracy concerns within national legal systems arising from the ever-expanding competences of the Community.

Thus, the legal integration with national legal systems attained by EC law was achieved in close partnership with national constitutional systems, which sanctioned, and therefore conditioned, the profound transformations of the EC legal order. It is precisely such legal integration that seemed ‘to be more solicitous to an involvement of national jurisdictions in the determination of jurisdictional limits of the Community legal order’.70

While international law would not justify, except in the narrowest circumstances, a State’s use of national law including constitutional law for non-performance of an international obligation, paradoxically this seems more acceptable in a vertically integrated system. As stated by Joseph Weiler and Ulrich Haltern, the approach of national constitutional courts ‘is an insistence on a more polycentred view of constitutional adjudication and will eventually force a more even conversation between the European Court and its national constitutional counterparts’.71

This conferred on European integration a new dimension, as it demanded the reconciliation of EC law with fundamental constitutional values.72 Constitutional limitations acted not as external constraints to the EC legal order but as demands that this had to satisfy within its own structure. While national constitutions were adapted to European integration, EC law ‘draws on and integrates the national constitutional orders’.73

Voice in investment treaty case law: the comparative law perspective

The investment treaty regime does not have an institutional structure anywhere similar to the EU. It is still largely an inter-governmental framework which allows for traditional forms of Voice, such as direct amendment by States of existing investment treaties or the issuance of binding interpretations of its terms. However, the investment treaty regime also has supranational features. Investment arbitration tribunals settle disputes in a binding form, allegedly constrain State action, and act as lawmakers in international investment law.74 The question is whether, within these supranational dynamics, a more system-internal type of Voice may be developing, along the lines of the stable accommodation and dialogue between legal orders characteristic of the EU system.

One such phenomenon may be the comparative public law approach in the interpretation of investment treaty protections, that draws on domestic administrative and constitutional law in construing the scope of such standards. The genuinely public law nature of international investment law would justify it, and the approach could be a way to legitimise the investment treaty regime by making it more acceptable to national legal orders.75

The comparative law methodology is not a new development in the field. It was already present in the second award ever issued in investment treaty arbitration made public only recently, the Saar Papier v. Poland award.76 The tribunal in this case made explicit use of domestic administrative law to interpret the provisions on indirect expropriation in the Germany–Poland BIT.77 The tribunal pointed out that ‘[t]o interpret the Treaty administrative law practice in Germany and Poland would be helpful’ and, after complaining that ‘[d]espite repeated requests, the arbitral tribunal received little help from the parties on German and Polish administrative law’, relied on ‘general administrative law and the principle of good faith to interpret the Treaty’,78 particularly the law of the States of nationality of the two arbitrators that formed the majority opinion, Germany and Switzerland.

The tribunal found that ‘[i]n administrative law practice two approaches converge to deal with this type of problem’, meaning the definition of indirect expropriation. First, the tribunal referred to an effects and proportionality test:

[I]f the right of property is limited in a way that in its economic effect must be equated to expropriation, compensation must be paid. This is called ‘materielle Enleignung’…A ‘materielle Enteignung’ is present in particular if a measure has a general impact but nevertheless burdens a particular right of ownership far more than all others.79

Secondly, the tribunal alluded to a legitimate expectations approach:

The second approach was developed mostly after World War II and starts from the general proposition that there is an obligation of good faith in public law which applies to all branches of government. Under certain circumstances a law is not applied to certain private persons or, if it is applied, they must be fully compensated even though the application of the law is lawful. This principle applies where the state has given misleading information about the law or where the law or administrative or court practice have changed.80

As noted by a commentator, the arbitrators in this case seemed to be ‘unaware of relevant international jurisprudence’ and ‘simply reached for the closest analogy that they could find’.81 This may be right, and indeed it is curious that, for example, no case of the Iran–US Claims Tribunal is cited as international law authority for the effects test. In any case, the fact remains that this is the first example of the comparative public law approach in investment treaty case law, providing comparative administrative law support for international law doctrines that have been subject to much criticism in today’s commentary.

Reasoning similar to the Saar Papier tribunal only resurfaced in investment treaty case law many years later, for example in the Tecmed v. Mexico award as far as the good faith principle and proportionality test is concerned.82 For its part, the comparative public law approach reappeared even later. In fact, this approach was not fully and explicitly used until the liability decision in Total v. Argentina, dated 27 December 2010. In this case the tribunal found that the comparative law analysis was justified in interpreting the fair and equitable treatment standard:

In determining the scope of a right or obligation, Tribunals have often looked as a benchmark to international or comparative standards. Indeed, as is often the case for general standards applicable in any legal system (such as ‘due process’), a comparative analysis of what is considered generally fair or unfair conduct by domestic public authorities in respect of private firms and investors in domestic law may also be relevant to identify the legal standards under BITs. Such an approach is justified because, factually, the situations and conduct to be evaluated under a BIT occur within the legal system and social, economic and business environment of the host State.83

The tribunal elaborated on the comparative law perspective, in particular in relation to the legitimate expectations doctrine:

Since the concept of legitimate expectations is based on the requirement of good faith, one of the general principles referred to in Article 38(1)(c) of the Statute of the International Court of Justice as a source of international law, the Tribunal believes that a comparative analysis of the protection of legitimate expectations in domestic jurisdictions is justified at this point.84

In this same line, the tribunal in Toto v. Lebanon stated that ‘[t]he fair and equitable treatment standard of international law does not depend on the perception of the frustrated investor, but should use public international law and comparative domestic public law as a benchmark’.85

The comparative law perspective is not without problems, for example that of the criteria for the selection of the comparative legal orders, and the inherent abstraction involved in assessing the recognition of a specific legal principle across different legal systems. Further, investment arbitration tribunals interpret treaty provisions and as such must apply international law. In this context, whether a certain principle of comparative law may be regarded as either a rule of customary international law or a general principle of law under Article 38(1) of the ICJ Statute may be arguable in many cases. No doubt this problem will need to be addressed in the jurisprudence if the comparative law perspective, with (and perhaps because of) its system-building capabilities, is to be applied in future cases.

Conclusion

The ad hoc nature of investment treaty tribunals makes it more likely, and perhaps even desirable,86 that tribunals focus on the application of the law to a given dispute rather than on systemic elucidations. This, however, does not exclude the emergence in the case law of some system-building paradigms regarding the interaction between the investment treaty regime and domestic legal principles and courts. One such phenomenon may be the comparative law perspective, which is reminiscent of the dynamics of Voice, in the form of a dialogue between legal orders, in the EC framework. Other forms of Voice, existing or to be developed in further case law, may concern a more clear division of competence between national courts and investment tribunals depending on the nature and substantiation of disputes,87 and the possibility of contract or domestic law counterclaims in investment cases.

Voice is a mechanism for the enhanced participation of domestic legal systems in the realm of international law. It has the virtue of contributing to the shaping of the international regime, gradually enriching it, and reinforcing its legitimacy. In contrast, Exit is the abandonment of the international regime altogether with the associated defeat of its fruitful interaction with national legal systems. In the investment treaty framework, both dynamics are at play. While exaggerated criticism pushes for Exit, Voice may be allowed to be heard in the more day-to-day workings of its supranational features – that is, investment treaty arbitration. As James Crawford suggested in 1997, ‘the relation between the international and constitutional levels can be reciprocal’ and this helps international law by ‘the co-opting of national constitutional limitations in the interests of international regularity’.88

1 e.g. Public Statement on the International Investment Regime, 31 August 2010, available at www.osgoode.yorku.ca/public_statement.

2 Horacio D. Rosatti, ‘Los tratados bilaterales de inversión: el arbitraje internacional obligatorio y el sistema constitucional argentino’, La Ley, 58 (2003), 1.

3 Carlos S. Fayt, La Constitución Nacional y los tribunales internacionales de arbitraje (Buenos Aires: La Ley, 2007).

4 e.g. Draft Law 4504-S-04, presented by Senator Capitanich in February 2005 and 532-S-05 presented by Senator Müller in March 2005.

5 Sentencia de la Corte Constitucional de Colombia C-294/02, 23 April 2002, available at http://corte-constitucional.vlex.com.co/vid/-43618351. Sentencia del Tribunal Constitucional de Bolivia sobre constitucionalidad de leyes ratificadoras de Convenios y Tratados, No. 0031/2006, 10 May 2006, available at http://italaw.com/sites/default/files/treaty-interpretations/ita0940.pdf.

6 ‘Ecuadorian Constitutional Court rulings on the constitutionality of UK, German, Chinese and Finish bilateral investment treaties’, Investment Arbitration Reporter, 28 August 2010, available at http://iareporter.com/articles/20100830_2; ‘Ecuador to Set Up Commission to Audit Bilateral Investment Treaties’, Practical Law Arbitration, 16 October 2013.

7 Ontario Supreme Court of Justice, The Council of Canadians et al. v. Her Majesty in Right of Canada, Decision of 8 July 2005 and Ontario Court of Appeal Decision of 30 November 2006, available at http://italaw.com/sites/default/files/treaty-interpretations/ita0941.pdf.

8 Gillard Government Trade Policy Statement, ‘Trading Our Way to More Jobs and Prosperity’ (Department of Foreign affairs and Trade, April 2011), available at http://blogs.usyd.edu.au/japaneselaw/2011_Gillard%20Govt%20Trade%20Policy%20Statement.pdf.

9 George Monbiot, ‘This Transatlantic Trade Deal is a Full-frontal Assault on Democracy’, The Guardian, 4 November 2013.

10 ‘Professor Martti Koskenniemi: Finland’s Legislative Power May Be in Jeopardy’, Helsinki Times, 16 December 2013, available at http://www.helsinkitimes.fi/finland/finland-news/domestic/8717-professor-finland-s-legislative-power-may-be-in-jeopardy.html.

11 Devashish Krishan, ‘Thinking about BITs and BIT Arbitration: The Legitimacy Crisis that Never Was’ in Todd Weiler and Freya Baetens (eds.), New Directions in International Economic Law: In Memoriam Thomas Wälde (Leiden: Martinus Nijhoff, 2011), 107, providing a long list of references at n. 32.

12 For empirical research see Susan Franck, ‘Empirically Evaluating Claims about Investment Treaty Arbitration’, North Carolina Law Review, 86 (2007), 1; Susan Franck, ‘Empiricism and International Law: Insights for Investment Treaty Dispute Resolution’, Virginia Journal of International Law, 48 (2008), 767; Susan Franck, ‘Development and Outcomes of Investment Treaty Arbitration’, Harvard International Law Journal, 50 (2009), 435; Kassi Tallent, ‘State Responsibility by the Numbers: Towards an Understanding of the Prevalence of the Latin America Countries in Investment Arbitration’, Transnational Dispute Management, 1 (2010).

13 Paul D. Marquardt, ‘Law without Borders: The Constitutionality of an International Criminal Court’, Columbia Journal of Transnational Law, 33 (1995), 73; Gordon A. Christenson and Kimberly Gambrel, ‘Constitutionality of Binational Panel Review in Canada–U.S. Free Trade Agreement’, International Lawyer, 23 (1989), 401; Bruce Ackerman and David Golove, ‘Is NAFTA Constitutional?’, Harvard Law Review, 108 (1995), 4; John Jackson, ‘The Great 1994 Sovereignty Debate: United States Acceptance and Implementation of the Uruguay Round Results’, Columbia Journal of Transnational Law, 36 (1997), 157; Steven Croley and John Jackson, ‘WTO Dispute Procedures, Standard of Review, and Deference to National Governments’, American Journal of International Law, 90 (1996), 193; Robert Kushen and Kenneth Harris, ‘Surrender of Fugitives by the United States to the War Crimes Tribunals for Yugoslavia and Rwanda’, American Journal of International Law, 90 (1996), 510.

14 Monroe Leigh, ‘The Yugoslav Tribunal: Use of Unnamed Witnesses against Accused’, American Journal of International Law, 90 (1996), 238.

15 W. Michael Reisman, ‘Introductory Remarks’, Symposium: Constitutionalism in the Post-Cold War World, Yale Journal of International Law, 19 (1994), 192.

16 Joseph H. H. Weiler, ‘The Transformation of Europe’, Yale Law Journal, 100 (1991), 2411.

17 Denunciations by Bolivia (16 May 2007), Ecuador (5 December 2007) and Venezuela (26 January 2012). See https://icsid.worldbank.org/ICSID/ICSID/ViewNewsReleases.jsp.

18 ‘Ecuadorian President Reportedly Asks Congress to Terminate 13 Bits; Move Comes on Heels of Earlier Termination of Multiple BITs’, Investment Arbitration Reporter, 30 October 2009, available at www.iaireporter.com/articles/20091124_8.

20 e.g. North American Free Trade Agreement, Notes of Interpretation of Certain Chapter 11 Provisions, NAFTA Free Trade Commission, 31 July 2001, available at www.sice.oas.org/tpd/nafta/Commission/CH11understanding_e.asp.

21 Lluís Paradell Trius, ‘International Law in National Legal Systems: Constitutional Obstacles and Opportunities’, TDM5 (2005).

22 Arts. 27 and 46 of the 1969 Vienna Convention of the Law of Treaties (Vienna, adopted 22 May 1969, entered into force 27 January 1980), 1155 UNTS 331.

23 James Crawford, Democracy in International Law (Cambridge University Press, 1994), 8 (reprinted in British Yearbook of International Law, 64 (1993), 113).

24 James Crawford, ‘International Law and Australian Federalism: Past, Present and Future’ in Brian Opeskin and Donald R. Rothwell (eds.), International Law and Australian Federalism (Carlton: Melbourne University Press, 1997), 325.

25 Shelley v. Kraemer, 334 US 1 (1948).

26 Paul Sayre, ‘Shelley v. Kraemer and United Nations Law’, Iowa Law Review, 34 (1948), 1.

27 See generally Bert B. Lockwood, ‘The United Nations Charter and United States Civil Rights Litigation: 1946–1955’, Iowa Law Review, 69 (1984), 901.

28 Oyama v. California, 332 US 633 (1948).

29 Ibid., 649–50 (Black, J., concurring), 673 (Murphy, J., concurring).

30 Namba v. McCourt, 204 P2d 569 (1949).

31 Ibid., 579.

32 Sei Fujii v. State, 217 P2d 481 (Cal D Ct App 1950), rehearing denied 218 P2d 595 (1950), affirmed on other grounds 242 P2d 617 (1952).

33 Ibid., 217 P2d 481, 484–8 (Cal D Ct App 1950).

34 See on the controversy e.g. George Finch, ‘The Need to Restrain the Treaty-making Power of the United States within Constitutional Limits’, American Journal of International Law, 48 (1954), 57; Quincy Wright, ‘National Courts and Human Rights: The Fujii Case’, American Journal of International Law, 45 (1951), 62; Oscar Schachter, ‘The Charter and the Constitution: The Human Rights Provisions in American Law’, Vanderbilt Law Review, 4 (1951), 643. See also Lockwood, ‘The United Nations Charter and United States Civil Rights Litigation: 1946–1955’, 924 et seq. The main criticism of the decision came from the American Bar Association as reflected in the pages of its journal. See e.g. Frank E. Holman, ‘Treaty Law-making: A Blank Check for Writing a New Constitution’, American Bar Association Journal, 36 (1950), 707; and Frank Ober, ‘The Treaty-making and Amendment Powers: Do They Protect Our Fundamental Rights?’, American Bar Association Journal, 36 (1950), 715.

35 But not ratified (Senate advice and consent) until 1986.

36 See Ch. 1, nn. 29et seq., and accompanying text.

37 Sei Fujii v. State, 242 P2d 617 (1952).

38 Ibid., 619–22.

39 See Thomas Buergenthal, ‘Modern Constitutions and Human Rights Treaties’, Columbia Journal of Transnational Law, 36 (1997), 211; and Louis Henkin, ‘U.S. Ratification of Human Rights Conventions: The Ghost of Senator Bricker’, American Journal of International Law, 89 (1995), 341.

40 Vlissidis v. Anadell, 262 F2d 398 (7th Cir, 1959) (Arts. 55 and 56 of the UN Charter non-self-executing); Pauling v. McElroy, 164 FSupp 390 (1958), affirmed 278 F2d 252 (DC Cir, 1960), certiorari denied 364 US 835 (1960) (same); Camacho v. Rogers, 199 FSupp 155, 158 (SDNY 1961) (same); Frolova v. USSR, 761 F2d 370, 374 (7th Cir, 1985) (same); In re Alien Children Educ. Litig., 501 FSupp 544, 590 (SD Tex 1980), affirmed mem. (5th Cir, 1981), affirmed sub nom. Plyler v. Doe, 457 US 202 (1982) (OAS Charter non-self-executing); Bertrand v. Sava, 684 F2d 204, 218–19 (2nd Cir, 1982) (Refugees Protocol non-self-executing); Spiess v. C. Itoh & Co. (America), Inc., 643 F2d 353 (5th Cir, 1981) (UN Charter non-self-executing).

41 Lockwood, ‘The United Nations Charter and United States Civil Rights Litigation: 1946–1955’, 901.

42 See e.g. United States v. Postal, 589 F2d 862 (5th Cir, 1979), certiorari denied 444 US 832 (1979); and People of Saipan v. United States Dept of Interior, 502 F2d 90 (9th Cir, 1974), certiorari denied 420 US 1003 (1975). See also Stefan Riesenfeld, ‘The Doctrine of Self-Executing Treaties and U.S. v. Postal: Win at Any Price?’, American Journal of International Law, 74 (1980), 892; and Richard Lillich and Hurst Hannum, ‘Linkages between International Human Rights and U.S. Constitutional Law’, American Journal of International Law, 79 (1985), 161.

43 Thomas Buergenthal, ‘Self-executing and Non-self-executing Treaties in National and International Law’, Collected Courses of the Hague Academy of International Law, 235 (1992), 303; Charles Stotter, ‘Self-executing Treaties and the Human Rights Provisions of the United Nations Charter: A Separation of Powers Problem’, Buffalo Law Review, 25 (1976), 773; Wright, ‘National Courts and Human Rights: The Fujii Case’, 62; Carlos Manuel Vázquez, ‘The Four Doctrines of Self-Executing Treaties’, American Journal of International Law, 89 (1995), 696, 722–3 (argues that the doctrine has an ‘allocation of powers function’, and is thus a matter of the proper institutional role of national courts).

44 Stanford v. Kentucky, 492 US 361, 369 n. 1 (1989). This decision contrasts with the earlier one in Thompson v. Oklahoma, 487 US 815, 821 (1988), another case concerning the execution of juveniles, in which a different Supreme Court majority had favoured the use of international and comparative law in eighth amendment analysis. The new majority in the Supreme Court abandoned any attempt to reconcile international and internal law regarding the death penalty, and tended to exacerbate the differences between the two legal orders. See generally Joan Fitzpatrick, ‘The Relevance of Customary International Norms to the Death Penalty in the United States’, Georgia Journal of International and Comparative Law, 25 (1995–6).

45 Alec Stone Sweet, ‘Constitutional Dialogues in the European Community’ in Anne-Marie Slaughter, Alec Stone Sweet and Joseph H. H. Weiler (eds.), European Court and the National Courts – Doctrine and Jurisprudence: Legal Change in its Social Context (Oxford: Hart, 1998), 306.

46 On these developments see, among many others, ibid.; Weiler, ‘The Transformation of Europe’, 2403; Jean-Victor Louis, L’Ordre juridique communautaire, 5th edn (Luxembourg: Office des publications officielles des Communautés européennes, 1990).

47 For an excellent and comprehensive description of the reception of the EC ‘constitutional’ doctrines in the various legal orders of the Member States see Henry Schermers and Denis Waelbroeck, Judicial Protection in the European Communities (Deventer: Kluwer, 1992). See also Thibaut de Berranger, Constitutions nationales et construction communautaire (Paris: LGDJ, 1995); and Santiago Muñoz Machado, La Unión europea y las mutaciones del Estado (Madrid: Alianza Universidad, 1993).

48 Art. 11, Italian Constitution (1948); Art. 24(1), German Constitution (1949); Para. 15, Preamble to the French Constitution (1946), in force as part of the preamble of the 1958 Constitution.

49 Art. 67 Netherlands Constitution (as amended in 1953, now renumbered Art. 92); Art. 49(bis) Luxembourg Constitution (1956 amendment); Art. 25(bis) Belgian Constitution (1970 amendment); Art. 20(1) Danish Constitution (1953); Art. 28(2) and (3) Greek Constitution (1975); Art. 93 Spanish Constitution (1978); Art. 7(5) Portuguese Constitution (1976). In the UK a legislative act, the European Communities Act (1972), was adopted at the time of accession.

50 Title XIV of the French Constitution (as amended by Constitutional Law 92–554, 25 June 1992); Art. 23 German Constitution (as amended on 21 December 1992). In Ireland, a specific reference to the EC has existed since 1972, in Art. 29(4)(3)–(6) of the Constitution, amended to permit the ratification of the Single European Act (1986) and the Maastricht Treaty (1992).

51 See Andrew Oppenheimer (ed.), The Relationship between European Community Law and National Law: The Cases (Cambridge University Press, 1994), 4–5, and the cases there cited and compiled. In the UK, supremacy was accepted on the basis of s. 2(1) of the 1972 European Communities Act.

52 In Belgium and Luxembourg. See Oppenheimer, The Relationship between European Community Law and National Law.

53 Frontini et altri v. Ministro delle finanze et altri (C. cost., 27 December 1973 no. 183), Rivista di diritto internazionale, 57 (1974), 130; 93 ILR 514 (English translation).

54 Ibid., 93 ILR, 525.

55 Spa Granital v. Amministrazione delle finanze dello Stato (C. cost., 5 June 1984 no. 170), Rivista di diritto internazionale, 67 (1984), 360; 93 ILR 527, 536 (English translation).

56 Fragd v. Amministrazione delle Finanze dello Stato (C. cost., 21 April 1989 no. 232), Rivista di diritto internazionale, 72 (1989), 104; 93 ILR 538, 542–3 (English translation).

57 Solange I - Internationale Handelsgesellschaft von Einfuhr- und Vorratsstelle für Getreide und Futtermittel, decision of 29 May 1974, BVerfGE 37, 271 [1974] CMLR 540.

58 Ibid., 395.

59 Filippo Donati, Diritto comunitario e sindacato di costituzionalità (Milano: Giuffrè, 1995), 263; Enzo Cannizzaro, Trattati internazionali e giudizio di costituzionalità (Milano: Giuffrè, 1991), 340, and doctrinal references there cited.

60 F.a. Steinike & Weinlig v. Bundesamt für Ernährung & Forstwirtschaft (Vielleicht), BVerfG 25 July 1979, 52 BVerfGE 187; [1980] CMLR 531, 537 (English translation) (emphasis added). In the CMLR the word vielleicht is translated as ‘for instance’, although ‘maybe’ is a more common translation and also gives name to the decision.

61 Wünsche Handelsgesellschaft (Solange II), BVerfG 22 October 1986, 73 BVerfGE 339; 93 ILR 403 (English translation).

62 Ibid., 93 ILR, 427–8.

63 Ibid., 436.

64 Ibid., 420.

65 Case C-379/87, Groener v. Minister for Education and the City of Dublin [1989] ECR I-3967.

66 Case C-159/90, Society for the Protection of the Unborn Children Ireland v. Grogan [1991] ECR I-4685. See also Diarmuid Rossa Phelan, ‘Right to Life of the Unborn v. Promotion of Trade in Services’, Modern Law Review, 55 (1992), 670; Jason Coppel and Aidan O’Neill, ‘The European Court of Justice: Taking Rights Seriously?’, Common Market Law Review, 29 (1992), 669.

67 On this jurisprudence see e.g. Joseph H. H. Weiler, ‘Eurocracy and Distrust: Some Questions Concerning the Role of the European Court of Justice in the Protection of Fundamental Rights within the Legal Order of the European Communities’, Washington Law Review, 61 (1986), 1103. The status of human rights as an integral part of EC law is now clearly stated in Art. F of the European Union Treaty (1992), amended by the Amsterdam Treaty (1997). See generally on this evolution F. Sudre, ‘La Communauté européenne et les droits fondamentaux après le Traité d’Amsterdam: vers un nouveau système européen de protection des droits de l’homme?’, Juris classeur periodique, part I, 100 (1998).

68 Sweet, ‘Constitutional Dialogues in the European Community’, 319.

69 Joseph H. H. Weiler and Ulrich Haltern, ‘Constitutional or International? The Foundations of the Community Legal Order and the Question of Judicial Kompetence-Kompetence’ in Anne-Marie Slaughter, Alec Stone Sweet and Joseph H. H. Weiler (eds.), European Court and the National Courts – Doctrine and Jurisprudence: Legal Change in its Social Context (Oxford: Hart, 1998), 331.

70 Ibid., 336.

71 Ibid., 363.

72 Marta Cartabia, Principi inviolabili e integrazione europea (Milano: Giuffrè, 1995), 136–7.

73 Weiler and Haltern, ‘Constitutional or International?’, 363.

74 Stephan Schill, ‘System-building in Investment Treaty Arbitration and Lawmaking’, German Law Journal, 12 (2011), 1083.

75 See e.g. Stephan Schill, ‘International Investment Law and Comparative Public Law: An Introduction’ in Stephan Schill (ed.), International Investment Law and Comparative Public Law (Oxford University Press, 2010), 3; Anthea Roberts, ‘Clash of Paradigms: Actors and Analogies Shaping the Investment Treaty System’, American Journal of International Law, 107 (2013), 45.

76 Saar Papier Vertriebs GmbH v. Republic of Poland (UNCITRAL), Final Award, 16 October 1995.

77 Jarrod Hepburn, ‘Saar Papier v. Poland: Comparative Public Law and the Second-ever Investment Treaty Award’, EJIL: Talk!, 3 February 2014, available at www.ejiltalk.org/saar-papier-v-poland-comparative-public-law-and-the-second-ever-investment-treaty-award/.

78 Saar Papier Vertriebs GmbH v. Republic of Poland, para. 79.

79 Ibid., paras. 81, 83.

80 Ibid., para. 92.

81 Hepburn, ‘Saar Papier v. Poland: Comparative Public Law and the Second-ever Investment Treaty Award’.

82 Técnicas Medioambientales Tecmed, S.A. v. The United Mexican States (ICSID Case No. ARB (AF)/00/2), Award, 29 May 2003.

83 Total S.A. v. The Argentine Republic (ICSID Case No. ARB/04/01), Decision on Liability, para. 111.

84 Ibid., para. 128.

85 Toto Costruzioni Generali S.p.A. v. The Republic of Lebanon (ICSID Case No. ARB/07/12), Award, 7 June 2012, para. 166; see also para. 193.

86 W. Michael Reisman, ‘“Case Specific Mandates” versus “Systemic Implications”: How Should Investment Tribunals Decide? – The Freshfields Arbitration Lecture’, Arbitration International, 29 (2013), 131.

87 See e.g. the application for the ‘prima facie’ test of jurisdiction ratione materiae in Iberdrola Energía S.A. v. Republic of Guatemala (ICSID Case No. ARB/09/5), Award, 17 August 2012. See also similarly, Robert Azinian, Kenneth Davitian, & Ellen Baca v. The United Mexican States (ICSID Case No. ARB (AF)/97/2), Award, 1 November 1999.

88 Crawford, ‘International Law and Australian Federalism: Past, Present and Future’, 325.

6 Polar territorial and maritime sovereignty in the twenty-first century

Donald R. Rothwell *

Introduction

Polar sovereignty was a relatively dormant issue in the second half of the twentieth century. The disputes that had emerged in Antarctica over territorial claims, which at one point had made their way to the International Court of Justice,1 had been effectively resolved with the adoption in 1959 of the Antarctic Treaty.2 Article IV of the Treaty proved capable of suppressing sovereignty tensions between the seven Antarctic territorial claimants,3 and also keeping in abeyance the interests of potential territorial claimants including the United States and the Soviet Union/Russian Federation.4 In the Arctic, territorial claims had also been settled by the time of World War II and, while the Cold War introduced military and security tensions into the Arctic, none of these directly related to contested territorial sovereignty.5

Nevertheless, there remain on-going sovereignty tensions, which if not properly managed have the potential to erupt into significant international disputes with implications reaching well beyond Antarctica and the Arctic. While Article IV of the Antarctic Treaty set aside sovereignty issues for the duration of the Treaty, tensions have been raised over recent submissions to the Commission on the Limits of the Continental Shelf (CLCS) over Southern Ocean outer continental shelf claims and by Japan’s refusal to acknowledge Australia’s proclaimed Whale Sanctuary offshore Antarctica and the on-going conduct of its Southern Ocean ‘scientific’ whaling programme. Arctic outer continental shelf claims are also a source of tension, placing a spotlight upon the CLCS as it reviews claims and how Arctic States resolve overlapping maritime claims. The status of certain waters also remains in dispute, including the Northwest Passage where the United States questions Canadian sovereignty over those waters. Melting ice means that the Arctic Ocean is also becoming more accessible to shipping, raising issues with respect to the freedom of navigation being exercised by non-Arctic States such as China.6 This chapter will review these issues and make observations as to how polar sovereignty may be understood in coming decades and, in doing so, will build upon some of James Crawford’s analysis of these issues.7

Polar sovereignty

Polar sovereignty and the effective assertion of territorial title to polar lands have held a fascination for international lawyers for over a century. This has no doubt been driven by the relative contemporary exploration of polar lands, which resulted in both the North and South Pole being first reached early in the twentieth century, and also because of the challenges in effectively asserting sovereignty over polar lands. As a result, notwithstanding discovery of polar lands and the assertions of title that were often associated with those discoveries, claims over Antarctica or the Arctic represented classic examples of inchoate titles in need of perfection. That the Eastern Greenland case acknowledged the challenges associated with the effective assertion of title over polar lands8 provided an additional legal basis for appreciating the distinctiveness of these issues.

There are five recognised methods of acquiring sovereignty over territory: occupation, annexation, accretion, prescription and cession.9 During early expeditions to the Arctic and Antarctic, various territorial claims were made, predominantly based upon acts of discovery, the raising of the flag and an act of proclamation.10 However, as was held in the Island of Palmas Arbitration,11 states whose basis of claim is discovery only have an inchoate title which must be perfected by later acts demonstrating an actual intent to exercise sovereignty over the discovered lands. This raised questions as to how traditional principles of territorial sovereignty could be applied in areas remote from the metropolitan power and where there was no immediate prospect of colonising those lands.

Throughout the twentieth century the effective exercise of sovereignty over polar lands was problematic given their relative inaccessibility and distance from metropolitan lands. Judge Huber in Island of Palmas recognised that differential standards may apply ‘according to conditions of time and place’, and also whether territory was inhabited or uninhabited.12 However, it was in Eastern Greenland that the Permanent Court made express reference to the particular challenges associated with fulfilling the requirements of effective occupation in the polar regions, noting that:

It is impossible to read the records of the decisions in cases as to territorial sovereignty without observing that in many cases the tribunal has been satisfied with very little in the way of the actual exercise of sovereign rights, provided that the other State could not make out a superior claim. This is particularly true in the case of claims to sovereignty over areas in thinly populated or unsettled countries.13

While publicists have agreed that the strict standards applied to more temperate lands do not apply to the polar regions,14 they have maintained that some of the traditional incidents of effective occupation must still be made out.15 This opens for consideration whether different standards should be applied to the determination of polar territorial claims in the twenty-first century than was previously the case. Two factors immediately would appear relevant. The first is that the polar regions are now more accessible than was the case at the time they were first discovered and when the early cases were decided. While they cannot necessarily be equated with ‘temperate lands’, they can be reached with an ease that would have been unimaginable a century ago and as such are no longer as ‘distant’ as previously imagined. The second is that modern technology has rendered the polar regions capable of settlement in much the same fashion as other parts of the globe. In the Arctic, the Russian city of Murmansk is the biggest city north of the Arctic Circle with a population of over 330,000.16 In Antarctica, the American base at McMurdo Sound has an austral winter population of up to 200 and a summer population of up to 1,100, while at the South Pole the American Amundsen/Scott base is also capable of accommodating 245 persons in summer.17

An unresolved aspect of polar sovereignty is the status of claims based upon the so-called ‘sector theory’ which is that States can assert a territorial claim along lines of latitude that run directly to the Pole, thereby effectively dividing up the region. A significant feature of Antarctic claims is that, with the exception of Norway, they are all based on a sector as all the claims commence at points along the Antarctic coast and converge along degrees of longitude at the geographic South Pole. The sector theory has also been influential in debates over Arctic territorial claims, where it was thought to have been based upon principles such as contiguity, ‘hinterland’ or the ‘spheres of influence’ doctrine.18 In the Arctic, sector claims are based on the geographic proximity of the claimant State, and have from time to time been asserted as a basis of claim to Arctic lands by Canada and Russia. In Antarctica, only Argentina and Chile are sufficiently geographically proximate to be able to rely upon a form of sector claim linked to contiguity or related bases of claim. Ultimately, sector theory has never been the subject of final determination by an international court or tribunal, has never been officially relied upon by claimant states to polar lands, and has been subject to widespread critique from commentators. Crawford has recently assessed the principle as one that ‘remains a rough method of delimitation, and has not become a separate rule of law’,19 while Shaw characterises it as a ‘political proposition’.20 Crawford’s further reservations extend to the observation that the sector principle inherits some of the defects of contiguity, that ‘its application is a little absurd insofar as there is a claim to a narrow sliver of sovereignty stretching to the Pole’ and that it cannot apply to areas of the high seas.21 It can therefore be observed that while the standard international law principles associated with the assertion of sovereignty and the perfection of territorial title apply to polar lands, there has also been some recognition of the distinctive aspects of polar sovereignty. Whether those points of distinction, including particular theories that have been applied in the past to polar lands such as the sector theory, have much contemporary application is a matter for determination.

Antarctic sovereignty

In 1959, when the Antarctic Treaty was negotiated, sovereignty over the continent was unresolved. To that end, Article IV of the Antarctic Treaty is a remarkable provision which has proven itself capable of multiple interpretations and some evolution over the more than fifty years the Treaty has been in force.22 Initially, the goal was to reach a settlement amongst the seven territorial claimants and the United States and Soviet Union so as to allow for the orderly management of Antarctic affairs and neutralise sovereignty from Antarctic discourse. This proved to be a major strength when the Antarctic Treaty became the focus of sustained criticism in the United Nations General Assembly during the 1980s. By being able to demonstrate that traditional notions of State sovereignty were not exercised in Antarctica, the Antarctic Treaty parties were able to successfully mount a diplomatic response, deflecting criticism of the Treaty and the Antarctic Treaty System (ATS).23 More recently, as some claimant States have sought to secure their positions with respect to maritime claims in the Southern Ocean, Article IV and its interpretation has once again become a live issue within the ATS.24

The issues concerning Antarctic sovereignty are highlighted by considering Australia’s position. Australia has been a long-standing player in polar affairs, formally commencing with Sir Douglas Mawson’s 1911–14 expedition which eventually paved the way for Australian interests in Antarctica to be formalised by way of the declaration of the Australian Antarctic Territory (AAT) in 1936.25 Australia’s polar interests have been predominantly realised through territorial claims to the AAT, and through its sub-Antarctic islands: Macquarie Island, Heard Island and McDonald Island. Those claims remain of considerable significance to Australia as was highlighted in 2012 when Australia proclaimed outer continental shelves offshore Heard Island and Macquarie Island, which extend deep into the Southern Ocean.26 Nevertheless, Australian sovereignty over Antarctica is not positively recognised by many States and, with the exception of the reciprocal recognition accorded Antarctic claims between Australia, France, New Zealand and the United Kingdom, lingering doubts remain over whether Australia’s claim to the AAT has been perfected.27

In the past decade, Australian sovereignty in Antarctica has been confronted with the challenges of Japanese whaling and outer continental shelf claims. Since the 1970s Australia has progressively adopted a pro-conservation position towards whales, and these developments have been reflected in Australian law. The Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999 (EPBC Act) creates an Australian Whale Sanctuary, which applies offshore the Australian continent, offshore territories and the AAT. Whaling within the Australian Whale Sanctuary is prohibited and the Act applies to all persons and vessels,28 giving no consideration to possible Antarctic Treaty constraints on the application of Australian law to foreign nationals.29 Notwithstanding Japan’s conduct of whaling operations within the Australian Whale Sanctuary, no Australian government agency has to date sought to enforce the prohibition on whaling. In 2004 a non-governmental organisation, Humane Society International (HSI), contested this view and commenced proceedings in the Australian courts, arguing that Japanese whaling activity was contrary to the EPBC Act. In a series of proceedings before the Federal Court from 2004–8,30 declaratory and injunctive relief was sought concerning whaling alleged to have been carried out by Kyodo Senpaku Kaisha, a corporation holding a licence from the Japanese government to conduct ‘special permit’ whaling in the Southern Ocean. Following a series of legal proceedings in 2008,31 the Federal Court of Australia delivered its final judgment in the matter.32 Satisfied that a ‘significant number of whales were taken inside the Australian Whale Sanctuary’,33 the Court concluded that Kyodo had contravened a number of relevant provisions of the EPBC Act in relation to both minke whales and fin whales, and issued orders that Kyodo be restrained from engaging in any such further acts.34 HSI arranged for the Federal Court’s judgment to be served upon Kyodo in Japan in late January 2008.35 These orders have not deterred Kyodo from continuing with its whaling programme and there have been continual infringements of the Australian Whale Sanctuary since 2008.36

What may be perceived as Australian reticence over the active enforcement of Australian law in the case of whaling can be contrasted with the more active assertion of Australian sovereignty over its Southern Ocean continental shelf. In 2004 Australia made its CLCS submission of data with respect to an outer continental shelf in the Southern Ocean, and more generally offshore the Australian continent and territories.37 This process, made consistently with mechanisms provided for under Article 76 of the 1982 United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (LOSC),38 asserted a potential Australian Southern Ocean outer continental shelf claim offshore the AAT, Heard and McDonald Islands, and Macquarie Island. However, mindful of the fact that the Commission does not consider continental shelf claims with respect to disputed territory, Australia requested the CLCS ‘not to take any action for the time being’ with respect to the continental shelf appurtenant to Antarctica.39 Nevertheless, Australia’s submission generated responses from eight states, of which six made direct observations regarding a claimed outer continental shelf off the AAT coast.40 Japan, for example, indicated in its communication to the United Nations Secretary-General that it ‘does not recognize any State’s right of or claims to territorial sovereignty in Antarctica’.41 Because Australia was the first State to go before the CLCS with data associated with continental shelf claims offshore Antarctica, some reaction could have been anticipated,42 and to that end Australia paved the way for other Antarctic claimants in their CLCS dealings. Likewise, Australia was also the first State to assert an outer continental shelf in the Southern Ocean. In May 2012 Australia formally proclaimed adjusted outer limits of the Australian continental shelf, which in the case of both the Heard and McDonald Islands, and Macquarie Island, at their southern limit terminate within the Antarctic Treaty area.43

Arctic sovereignty

Arctic territorial sovereignty has been less contentious than in Antarctica, superficially because there has been less disputed territory. Following the period of intense discovery of Arctic lands in the late nineteenth and early twentieth century, which included the ‘race for the Pole’, Arctic territorial disputes were settled in a relatively orderly fashion, including by reference to the Permanent Court of International Justice (PCIJ). At present, the only territorial dispute is that between Canada and Denmark over Hans Island, which is a very small island that straddles Nares Strait between Greenland and Ellesmere Island.44 There have, nevertheless, been sovereignty tensions in the Arctic, especially as discussed below between Canada and the United States over the characterisation of the Northwest Passage as either internal waters or an international strait.

The dawn of the twenty-first century has seen a significant shift in the debate over Arctic sovereignty and this has been due to a number of factors. The first is the effects of the melting of the sea ice of the Arctic Ocean. In recent years the effect of the melt has been dramatic, with significant tracts of open water appearing in parts of the Arctic Ocean and a shifting ice pattern becoming discernible.45 The permanent disappearance of Arctic sea ice throughout much of the region during the summer months has resource access implications. Previously inaccessible areas of the Arctic Ocean will potentially become accessible for various forms of resource exploitation, ranging from the non-living resources of the sea-bed, to fish stocks and other living resources of the water column. With increased resource exploitation, there is the potential for demands for greater foreign access by States which may not traditionally have had an interest in the region. This may especially be the case with respect to Arctic fisheries and that area of Arctic high seas beyond the limits of coastal State jurisdiction. It follows that this will in turn raise issues of increased navigational interest in Arctic waters, not only with respect to navigation within the Arctic but by members of the international community eager to gain access to new shipping routes between the North Pacific and North Atlantic. A second factor is the rising tension associated with outer continental shelf claims, which will potentially converge in the central Arctic Ocean, resulting in the need for resolution of additional maritime boundaries to settle overlapping claims.46

The combination of climate change and the potential for at least a partially ice-free Arctic Ocean, combined with an acknowledgement of continental shelf rights in an area that is becoming more accessible to a range of maritime activities, has generated considerable political interest, with accompanying legal and policy implications.47 One particular dimension of this renewed interest in the Arctic has been the attention given to Arctic shipping in general, and navigational issues in particular.48 Two Arctic shipping routes have traditionally attracted attention. The first – the so-called Northern Sea Route49 – runs along Russia’s northern coast primarily within coastal waters. As there has been little dispute over Russia’s capacity to control navigation within these waters consistent with the law of the sea, the Northern Sea Route has rarely been the subject of controversy. This has not been the case with respect to the Northwest Passage. A variety of interconnected sea routes which pass between the islands that make up the Canadian Arctic Archipelago, the status of the Northwest Passage has been the subject of on-going dispute between Canada and the US ever since the voyage of the SS Manhattan in 1969. In response to the Manhattan voyage, which attempted to demonstrate the capacity of a supertanker to shuttle between the Alaskan oil fields and the United States’s eastern seaboard, Canada adopted the Arctic Waters Pollution Prevention Act, placing significant constraints on the passage of vessels through its Arctic waters on environmental grounds. Canada took further steps in the 1980s to bolster its control of its Arctic waters through the declaration of straight baselines around the outer limits of its Arctic islands with the effect that all vessels passing through the Northwest Passage would be within Canadian internal waters. The significance of Canada’s initiatives has been to convert waters that may at one time have been a part of the territorial sea or exclusive economic zone, within which certain navigational rights existed for foreign ships, into waters over which Canada has complete sovereignty and the capacity to regulate all shipping – including the right to deny entry to foreign vessels.50 Canada’s position with respect to navigation through the Northwest Passage has been tolerated, though subject to protest by the United States. It has not been tested, however, before any international court or tribunal, and while Canada’s position finds some support in Article 234 of the LOSC granting to coastal States a capacity to adopt additional environmental measures for ice-covered waters,51 this does not provide a foundation for Canada’s baselines interpretation or the constraints which have been placed on navigation. This remains a dormant legal issue which has the potential to erupt directly as a result of climate change and the new opportunities for safe and efficient navigation through the Northwest Passage.

A significant increase in Arctic shipping has the potential to stoke new sovereignty tensions. The 2009 Arctic Maritime Shipping Assessment (AMSA) Report52 highlighted the potential for an increase in not only destinational Arctic shipping, but also trans-Arctic shipping via shipping routes that cross the Arctic Ocean from a point of entry to a point of exit. Such shipping routes may operate via the Northern Sea Route or Northwest Passage, or through the Central Arctic Ocean, with the effect that the Bering Strait (where the Russian Federation and United States are the littoral states) would become a pivotal route for access or egress to the Arctic.53 A trans-Arctic shipping route through the Bering Strait, across the Arctic Ocean and then via the Fram and Greenland Straits to Iceland, is almost 5,000 miles shorter than using the Panama Canal between Hamburg and Yokohama. Polar class vessels, capable of operating in a substantially ice-reduced Arctic, are on order and are being built in order to take advantage of these opportunities.54

In the case of the Arctic, much of the Arctic Ocean remains beyond the limits of existing 200-nautical-mile continental shelf claims, including the seabed at the North Pole. A great deal of the Arctic Ocean is potentially susceptible to an outer continental shelf claim by the Arctic Ocean littoral states, which include Canada, Denmark (Greenland), Norway, the Russian Federation and the United States. The potential of these claims to raise sovereignty hackles was famously highlighted in August 2007 by the planting of a Russian flag by a mini-submarine on the Arctic Ocean seabed at the North Pole.55 More substantively, the growing number of claims before the CLCS by Arctic States, including Canada’s anticipated claim, plus the uncertainty as to the position of the United States and its claims offshore Alaska, has contributed to not only a growing media fascination with Arctic sovereignty but parallel consideration of Arctic legal issues and governance that was absent for much of the twentieth century.56 Russia was the first Arctic State to make its CLCS submission in 2001, which has since been followed by Norway, and Denmark. A Canadian claim is anticipated in 2013 while the position of the United States is uncertain as it has yet to become a party to the LOSC.

Contemporary challenges

The contemporary issues confronting the polar regions ultimately reflect the phenomenon of globalisation. A century ago Antarctica and the Arctic were literally the last places on earth subject to exploration, and even after the Poles were conquered it was not really until the advent of reliable polar air transportation that comprehensive mapping of polar lands was completed in the 1950s. In the twenty-first century another type of exploration is taking place as the polar seabed is mapped to support CLCS submissions. The consequence has been that as a result of the dual effects of climate change and the contemporary law of the sea polar sovereignty has again come into the public and political spotlight.

International law does provide a framework for the resolution of these issues, a fact the five Arctic littoral States recognised in May 2008 when they issued the Ilulissat Declaration. The Declaration affirms the capacity of the law of the sea to provide ‘important rights and obligations concerning the delineation of the outer limits of the continental shelf, the protection of the marine environment, including ice-covered areas, freedom of navigation, marine scientific research, and other uses of the sea’.57 In a direct reference to resolution of Arctic maritime boundaries, the Declaration also stated that ‘We remain committed to this legal framework and to the orderly settlement of any possible overlapping claims.’58 The law of the sea is therefore central to how polar maritime sovereignty is to be determined and ultimately exercised, within which the CLCS will play a pivotal part.

The CLCS operates under a mandate based upon Article 76 and Annex II of the LOSC, and its Rules of Procedure make clear that it will not become engaged in political or legal disputes. To date, the CLCS has sought to strictly maintain its role as a scientific and technical body, and as such the Commission has sought to neatly side-step claims which have been asserted offshore disputed territories, or which may result in overlapping claims between two or more states. In the Southern Ocean, both Australia and New Zealand indicated their desire for the CLCS to set aside for the time being potential outer continental shelf claims that could be asserted offshore their Antarctic territories. An alternative approach was taken by Argentina whose 2009 CLCS submission claimed an outer continental shelf offshore its Antarctic territories and adjacent islands.59 While Argentina has notified the CLCS as to the existence of disputes with the United Kingdom with respect to the Falkland Islands, South Georgia and the South Sandwich Islands, no such indication was made in the case of its claim over continental Antarctica, or whether there existed constraints upon Argentina’s capacity to assert such a claim under the Antarctic Treaty.60 Argentina’s CLCS submission, which remains queued for the time being with no immediate prospect of consideration by the Commission in the near future, has been the subject of diplomatic communications made via the United Nations Secretary-General to the Commission from six Antarctic Treaty parties.61

The position in the Arctic is also complex, not because of issues regarding territorial sovereignty but because the configuration of the Arctic Ocean is such that the continental shelf claims will predominantly converge in the Central Arctic Ocean, necessitating the resolution of maritime boundaries between the littoral states whose claims overlap. On current projections, this would potentially involve the resolution of boundaries between Denmark (Greenland) and Canada, Canada and the United States, the United States and Russia, Russia and Norway, and Norway and Denmark (Greenland).62 The CLCS is therefore set to become an important forum for resolving some of the controversies over Arctic seabed claims, and this may prove to be a catalyst for forcing the US to reassess its position towards the LOSC. Because there is to date so little State practice with respect to outer continental shelf claims under the LOSC, it cannot be said – unlike the general position with respect to 200-nautical-mile continental shelf claims – to be reflective of customary international law. There could be no basis for the United States asserting a unilateral claim to an outer continental shelf without having first acceded to the Convention and having made a submission before the CLCS. This is not to suggest that the United States would have to sit on the sidelines indefinitely whilst other Arctic states assert claims to the Arctic Ocean. One option may be for the United States to collaborate in submitting a joint CLCS Arctic claim. There is certainly precedent for the CLCS considering such claims, but in each instance the relevant claimant States have been parties to the LOSC and this may prove to be a hurdle for the United States adopting such a strategy. For this reason the United States may be forced in the very near future to accede to the LOSC.

Concluding remarks

Polar territorial and maritime sovereignty is significantly advanced in the twenty-first century compared to when it was first contemplated one hundred years ago. However, notwithstanding the developments in international law including the specific recognition of particular issues associated with polar sovereignty in the Eastern Greenland case and the Antarctic Treaty, and the manner in which maritime sovereignty can be claimed and exercised under the LOSC, there remain tensions over polar sovereignty which show no sign of abating. The stewardship of polar lands has been a dominant theme in political discourse and has been responsible for some remarkable diplomatic about-turns with respect to mining in the Arctic and Antarctica.63 However, as climate change continues its onward march and the polar regions become more accessible, polar stewardship will be further challenged and in its place polar sovereignty will inevitably assume even greater significance. In the Arctic this will raise particular issues for indigenous peoples whose culture and livelihoods will be threatened by climate change and by new visitors challenging indigenous notions of sovereignty.64 The polar regions are therefore rapidly approaching a crossroads where decisions will need to be made as to whether to continue the status quo which has served regional legal governance relatively well in recent decades, whether more traditional notions of State sovereignty are (re)applied or in the Arctic there is a significant rethinking of what is meant by sovereignty so as to encompass the views of indigenous peoples who have been the custodians of the region for centuries. Whatever the outcomes, international law will be tested by these developments and innovative solutions may be needed to ensure Antarctica and the Arctic remain areas of relative international peace and harmony where protection of the environment is a fundamental principle.

* With acknowledgement to James Crawford, who along with Ivan Shearer, supervised my University of Sydney PhD entitled ‘The Polar Regions and the Development of International Law’ (1995).

1 Antarctica cases (UK v. Argentina; UK v. Chile), ICJ Pleadings (1956).

2 Antarctic Treaty (Washington, adopted 1 December 1959, entered in force 23 June 1961), 402 UNTS 71.

3 The seven claimant States are: Argentina, Australia, Chile, France, New Zealand, Norway and the United Kingdom.

4 David Day, Antarctica: A Biography (North Sydney: Random House/Knopf Australia, 2012), 434–91.

5 Shelagh D. Grant, Polar Imperative: A History of Arctic Sovereignty in North America (Toronto: Douglas & McIntyre, 2010), 193–246.

6 See e.g. Olya Gayazova, ‘China’s Rights in the Marine Arctic’, International Journal of Marine and Coastal Law, 28 (2013), 61–95.

7 Crawford’s contributions to matters associated with polar sovereignty can be found in James Crawford and Donald Rothwell, ‘Legal Issues Confronting Australia’s Antarctica’, Australian Yearbook of International Law, 13 (1992), 53–88; James Crawford, Brownlie’s Principles of Public International Law, 8th edn (Oxford University Press, 2012), 241–2.

8 Legal Status of Eastern Greenland (Norway v. Denmark), Judgment, 5 September 1933, PCIJ Series A/B, No. 53.

9 See e.g. Ivan Anthony Shearer (ed.), Starke’s International Law, 11th edn (London: Butterworths, 1994), 145; Robert Jennings and Arthur Watts (eds.), Oppenheim’s International Law, 9th edn, 2 vols. (London: Longman, 1992), I, Parts II–IV, 679 (who substitute subjugation for annexation).

10 In the case of Antarctica, see the discussion in Day, Antarctica: A Biography, 227–52.

11 The Netherlands v. United States of America (4 April 1928), Reports of International Arbitral Awards, II, 829.

12 Ibid., 840.

13 Legal Status of Eastern Greenland (Norway v. Denmark), 46.

14 See e.g. F. M. Auburn, Antarctic Law and Politics (Canberra: Croom Helm, 1982), 13; Gillian D. Triggs, International Law and Australian Sovereignty in Antarctica (Sydney: Legal Books, 1986), 82; Philip C. Jessup and Howard J. Taubenfeld, Controls for Outer Space and the Antarctic Analogy (New York: Columbia University Press, 1959), 141.

15 See e.g. A. C. Castles, ‘The International Status of the Australian Antarctic Territory’ in Daniel Patrick O’Connell (ed.), International Law in Australia (Sydney: Law Book Company, 1966), 355.

16 Charles Emmerson, The Future History of the Arctic (London: Vintage, 2010), 68.

17 United States Antarctic Program, United States Antarctic Program Participant Guide, 2010–12 edn (US Antarctic Program, 2010), 72.

18 Jennings and Watts, Oppenheim’s International Law, I, Parts II–IV, 693; Daniel Patrick O’Connell, International Law, 2nd edn, 2 vols. (London: Stevens and Son, 1970), I, 449; Gustav Smedal, Acquisition of Sovereignty over Polar Areas (Oslo: I Kommisjon Hos Jacob Dybwad, 1931), 54–76; Oscar Svarlien, ‘The Sector Principle in Law and Practice’, Polar Record, 10 (1960), 248–63.

19 Crawford, Brownlie’s Principles of Public International Law, 241; see also Auburn, Antarctic Law and Politics, 31.

20 Malcolm N. Shaw, International Law, 6th edn (Cambridge University Press, 2008), 535.

21 Crawford, Brownlie’s Principles of Public International Law, 241.

22 See the discussion in Crawford and Rothwell, ‘Legal Issues Confronting Australia’s Antarctica’, 79–82.

23 See discussion in Richard Woolcott, The Hot Seat: Reflections on Diplomacy from Stalin’s Death to the Bali Bombings (New South Wales: Harper Collins, 2003), 209–18.

24 Donald R. Rothwell, ‘Sovereignty and the Antarctic Treaty’, Polar Record, 46 (2010), 17–20.

25 Australian Antarctic Territory Acceptance Act 1933 (Australia).

26 Seas and Submerged Lands (Limits of Continental Shelf) Proclamation 2012 (Australia), Federal Register of Legislative Instruments F2012L01081 (24 May 2012).

27 The most thorough contemporary analysis can be found in Triggs, International Law and Australian Sovereignty in Antarctica; see also Crawford and Rothwell, ‘Legal Issues Confronting Australia’s Antarctica’, 59–61.

28 Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999 (Australia), s. 229.

29 As to the issues arising regarding the enforcement of Australian law offshore the AAT see Crawford and Rothwell, ‘Legal Issues Confronting Australia’s Antarctica’, 78–85.

30 Commencing with Humane Society International, Inc. v. Kyodo Senpaku Kaisha Ltd [2004] FCA 1510.

31 See discussion in Tim Stephens and Donald Rothwell, ‘Japanese Whaling in Antarctica: Humane Society International, Inc. v. Kyodo Senpaku Kaisha Ltd’, Review of European Community and International Environmental Law, 16 (2007), 243–6.

32 Humane Society International, Inc. v. Kyodo Senpaku Kaisha Ltd [2008] FCA 3.

33 Ibid., para. 39.

34 Ibid., para. 55.

35 Peter Alford, ‘Aussie Judgment Served on Whalers’, The Australian (Sydney), 24 January 2008, 7.

36 In 2012 vessels from the Japanese whaling fleet entered the Australian Whale Sanctuary offshore Macquarie Island which brought about a response from the Australian government; see Nicola Roxon MP, ‘Japanese Whaling Vessels Nearing Macquarie Island’, Attorney-General for Australia Media Release, 25 February 2012, available at www.attorneygeneral.gov.au/Media-releases/.

37 For analysis see Andrew Serdy, ‘Towards Certainty of Seabed Jurisdiction beyond 200 Nautical Miles from the Territorial Sea Baseline: Australia’s Submission to the Commission on the Limits of the Continental Shelf’, Ocean Development and International Law, 36 (2005), 201–17.

38 United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (Montego Bay, adopted 10 December 1982, entered into force 10 November 1994), 1833 UNTS 397.

39 ‘Note from the Permanent Mission of Australia to the Secretary-General of the United Nations Accompanying the Lodgement of Australia’s Submission’, Note 89/2004 (November 2004) available at www.un.org/Depts/los/clcs_new/submissions_files/submission_aus.htm.

40 The States that directly commented on this matter were Germany, India, Japan, the Netherlands, Russian Federation and USA.

41 The Permanent Mission of Japan to the United Nations (SC/05/039) (19 January 2005) available at www.un.org/depts/los/clcs_new/submissions_files/aus04/clcs_03_2004_los_jap.pdf.

42 See discussion in Alan D. Hemmings and Tim Stephens, ‘The Extended Continental Shelves of Sub-Antarctic Islands: Implications for Antarctic Governance’, Polar Record, 46 (2010), 312–27.

43 See above n. 26.

44 Christopher Stevenson, ‘Hans Off! The Struggle for Hans Island and the Potential Ramifications for International Border Dispute Resolution’, Boston College International and Comparative Law Review, 30 (2007), 263–75.

45 The first time that consistent reports emerged of the Northwest Passage being ice-free was 2007, which coincided with a then record minimum sea ice extent being recorded for Arctic sea ice. See John Roach, ‘Arctic Melt Opens Northwest Passage’, National Geographic News, 17 September 2007, available at http://news.nationalgeographoc.com/news/pf/38614724.html.

46 See e.g. Timo Koivurova, ‘The Actions of Arctic States Respecting the Continental Shelf: A Reflective Essay’, Ocean Development and International Law, 42 (2011), 211–26.

47 See e.g. James Kraska (ed.), Arctic Security in an Age of Climate Change (Cambridge University Press, 2011); Scott G. Borgerson, ‘Arctic Meltdown: The Economic and Security Implications of Global Warming’, Foreign Affairs, 87 (2008), 63–77.

48 See e.g. Aldo Chircop, ‘The Growth of International Shipping in the Arctic: Is a Regulatory Review Timely?’, International Journal of Marine and Coastal Law, 24 (2009), 355–80; E. J. Molenaar, ‘Arctic Marine Shipping: Overview of the International Legal Framework, Gaps, and Options’, Journal of Transnational Law and Policy, 18 (2009), 289–325.

49 Also referred to as the Northeast Passage.

50 See Donat Pharad, Canada’s Arctic Waters in International Law (Cambridge University Press, 1988).

51 Ted L. McDorman, Salt Water Neighbors: International Ocean Law Relations between the United States and Canada (Oxford University Press, 2009), 93–5.

52 Arctic Council, Arctic Marine Shipping Assessment 2009 Report (Arctic Council, 2009) (AMSA Report).

53 Donald R. Rothwell, ‘International Straits and Trans-Arctic Navigation’, Ocean Development and International Law, 43 (2012), 267–82.

54 Chircop, ‘The Growth of International Shipping in the Arctic’, 356–7.

55 C. J. Chivers, ‘Russia Plants Underwater Flag at North Pole’, New York Times, 2 August 2007, available at www.nytimes.com/2007/08/02/world/europe/02cnd-artic.html?module=Search&mabReward=relbias%3; T. Parfitt, ‘Russian plants flag on North Pole seabed’, The Guardian, 2 August 2007, available at www.guardian.co.uk/world/2007/aug/02/russia.arctic.

56 See e.g. ‘Special Report: The Arctic’, The Economist, 16–22 June 2012. Some of the recent literature relevant includes Tessa Mendez, ‘Thin Ice, Shifting Geopolitics: The Legal Implications of Arctic Ice Melt’, Denver Journal of International Law and Policy, 38 (2010), 527–47; Tavis Potts and Clive Schofield, ‘An Arctic Scramble? Opportunities and Threats in the (Formerly) Frozen North’, International Journal of Marine and Coastal Law, 23 (2008), 151–76; Louise A. de La Fayette, ‘Oceans Governance in the Arctic’, International Journal of Marine and Coastal Law, 23 (2008), 531–66.

57 See the Ilulissat Declaration, available at www.arcticgovernance.org/the-ilulissat-declaration.4872424.html.

59 Outer Limits of the Continental Shelf: Argentine Submission (Executive Summary) (21 April 2009), available at www.un.org/depts/los/clcs_new/submissions_files/arg25_09/arg2009e_summary_eng.pdf.

60 Ibid., 8–9; Argentina refers to these islands as Islas Malvinas, Georgias del Sur and Sandwich del Sur.

61 See e.g. Permanent Mission of Japan to the United Nations (SC/09/390) (19 November 2009) available at www.un.org/Depts/los/clcs_new/submissions_files/arg25_09/jpn_re_arg_2009. Other States to have lodged communications on this matter were the United Kingdom, United States, the Russian Federation, India and the Netherlands.

62 Alex G. Oude Elferink, ‘The Outer Continental Shelf in the Arctic: The Application of Article 76 of the LOS Convention in a Regional Context’ in Alex G. Oude Elferink and Donald R. Rothwell (eds.), The Law of the Sea and Polar Maritime Delimitation and Jurisdiction (The Hague, New York: Martinus Nijhoff, 2001), 149.

63 See e.g. Andrew Jackson and Peter Boyce, ‘Mining and “World Park Antarctica”, 1982–1991’ in Marcus Haward and Tom Griffiths (eds.), Australia and the Antarctic Treaty System: 50 Years of Influence (Sydney: University of New South Wales Press, 2011), 300–19.

64 See, generally, James Crawford, ‘The Rights of Peoples: Some Conclusions’ in James Crawford (ed.), The Rights of Peoples (Oxford: Clarendon, 1988), 159–75.

7 An enquiry into the palimpsestic nature of territorial sovereignty in East Asia – with particular reference to the Senkaku/Diaoyudao question*

Keun-Gwan Lee

I Introduction

China is rising (or it has already risen). According to press reports, in 2010 China replaced Japan as the second biggest economy of the world.1 The inexorable rise of China has led some international relations scholars to predict the inevitable conflict between China and the incumbent hegemon – that is, the United States.2 China, which would like to avoid confrontation with the other superpower while it pursues the policy of economic modernisation, calls into question the conventional wisdom of the realist bent, in particular its thesis of the inevitability of conflict in the case of big change in power relations. China in 2012 promoted its own revisionist theory entitled ‘a new type of great power relationship’ (Xinxing Daguo Guanxi).3

Against this background, an important question for international law scholars is whether and how the rise of China will translate into (hopefully peaceful) change in the normative configurations of international society. To adduce an example, the rise of China brings with it a renewed and even (to some ears) ‘retro-sounding’ emphasis on the principle of (State) sovereignty. Recently, there have been premature rumours of the death of sovereignty, and the concept of sovereignty is often criticised for being a stumbling block in the increasingly globalising world. In contrast, the newly rising (or, to use Kissinger’s perceptive expression, ‘returning’4) China unabashedly claims itself to be ‘a most enthusiastic champion’ for the principle.5

The impact of China’s rise on current international law is strongly felt, among others, in the field of territorial sovereignty that delineates the space within which State sovereignty (imperium, jurisdictio) is exercised.6 The recent flare-up between China and Japan over the Senkaku/Diaoyudao Islands is a case in point. In 2013, China began to call into doubt even the territorial status quo of Okinawa.7 It is well known that China has fervently emphasised the principle of territorial integrity8 and is faced with some thorny territorial issues (actual or potential) of its own. An immediate question is why and on what ground China raises such claims vis-à-vis Japan that carry the risk of boomeranging back to itself.

If one looks at the question from a broader historical perspective, one can ask whether the historical fact that the traditional East Asian world order (which enjoyed an exceptional longevity spanning a couple of millennia9) was abruptly and violently replaced by a new normative order called the ‘public law of Europe’ bears on the issue of territorial sovereignty over the islands.

It is in this connection that the metaphors of tabula rasa and palimpsest come in handy. Is international law in East Asia a tabula rasa onto which only the European set of norms are indelibly etched? Or is it a palimpsest – that is, a parchment which, though overwritten, still retains traces from the past practices of East Asia? As will be shown below, China seems to subscribe to the latter conceptualisation in dealing with its territorial differences with Japan. Then the question arises of whether and how these traces, if any, will impact on the articulation and functioning of international law in East Asia and, in particular, on the equitable resolution of territorial issues in the region.

I will begin by presenting a brief historical overview of the question (II). I will go on to describe the respective claims of Japan and China over the Senkaku/Diaoyu Islands (III) and then offer some critical remarks on the respective positions (IV). This will be followed by an attempt to elucidate what I called the palimpsestic nature of territorial sovereignty in East Asia (V). I will also provide brief concluding remarks (VI).

II Historical overview of the question of the Senkaku/Diaoyu Islands

It is beyond argument that many Chinese books and maps (dating from the Ming (1386–1644) and Qing periods (1644–1911)) recorded the group of uninhabited islands and rocks called Senkaku by the Japanese and Diayudao by the Chinese.10 They were used as navigational markers by various investiture missions sent to Ryukyu (present-day Okinawa) by China. More importantly, the islands were incorporated into the coastal defence system of the Ming Dynasty in 1561.11

A change to this state of affairs took place with the annexation of the Ryukyu Kingdom into Japan in 1879. According to Japan, five years later a Japanese explorer ‘discovered’ these islands. In January 1895, when Japan’s victory over China in the Sino-Japanese War was virtually sealed, Japan formally annexed these islands as terra nullius.

During World War II, the Allies adopted the Cairo Declaration on 1 December 1943 and declared their ‘purpose…that all the territories Japan has stolen from the Chinese, such as Manchuria, Formosa and the Pescadores, shall be restored to the Republic of China’.12 The implementation of this Declaration was confirmed by Paragraph 8 of the Potsdam Proclamation of 26 July 1945, which Japan undertook to carry out in the Instrument of Surrender of 2 September 1945.13 China claims that in accordance with these documents ‘Diaoyu Dao, as affiliated islands of Taiwan, should be returned, together with Taiwan, to China.’14

After the end of World War II, these islands were put under the trusteeship of the United States in accordance with the 1951 San Francisco Peace Treaty with Japan. The United States exercised effective administration over these islands, using them as firing ranges. However, there was no protest from the Chinese side from 1945 until late 1971.

It was only in the late 1960s that the Chinese interest in the islands resurfaced upon the publication of a report by the UN Economic Commission for Asia and the Far East indicating potential oil and gas reserves in the vicinity of the islands.15 On 30 December 1971 the government of the People’s Republic of China (PRC) raised its territorial claim over the islands (the Republic of China government did so on 12 June 1971).16China argues that both sides recognised the existence of a territorial dispute over the Senkaku/Diaoyudao Islands in 1972 and 1978 and agreed to defer its settlement to a later date. Japan denies the existence of such an agreement.17

China and Japan remained in a ‘stagnant confrontation’18 until recently. The problem of delimiting the Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ)/continental shelf in the East China Sea was compounded by the territorial question over the islands.19 The stagnant confrontation flared up into an open diplomatic and even military confrontation after September 2010 when a Chinese fishing boat collided with the patrol boats of the Japan Coast Guard. Upon the ‘nationalisation’ of three islands (including the biggest one, Uotsurishima/Diaoyudao) by the Japanese government in September 2012, the Chinese government upped the ante by establishing straight baselines around the islands.20 China has also tried to erode the status quo ante by sending naval ships to patrol the waters near the Senkaku/Diaoyudao Islands.21

Based on this summary, let me now proceed to a brief description and analysis of the respective claims of China and Japan.

III The respective positions of China and Japan on the Senkaku/Diaoyu Islands

I will present brief descriptions of the respective positions of China and Japan concerning title to the Senkaku/Diaoyu Islands, limiting myself to the facts that are closely related to the main argument of this chapter, the palimpsestic structure or nature of territorial sovereignty in East Asia.

1 Overview of the Chinese position

Until recently, it was not necessarily easy to ascertain the official position of China in sufficient detail. Because of the lack of official statements, interested parties had to rely mainly on scholarly writings. This situation has changed in the past couple of years with the publication of Zhongguo Guojifa Shijianyu Anli (International Law in China: Cases and Practice)22 in March 2011 and the official pamphlet titled Diaoyu Dao She Zhonggude Lingtu (Diaoyu Dao, an Inherent Territory of China)23 compiled by the Information Office of the State Council, a Peoples’ Republic of China in September 2012. The former was compiled by the Department of Treaty and Law, the PRC Ministry of Foreign Affairs.24 China’s position on the Diaoyu Islands appears in pages 134–8. The latter publication was published in the pivotal month of September 2012 when Japan ‘nationalised’ the three islands of the Senkaku/Diaoyu group. The pamphlet is very helpful in that it contains the most detailed official view of the Chinese government, in particular, the legal grounds China invokes to found its territorial sovereignty for the islands. Another pamphlet that is largely similar in its main points was published by the PRC National Marine Data and Information Service under (rather confusingly) the same English title.

The central pillar of the Chinese claim is that the group of islands is part of ‘China’s inherent territory’. The expression ‘inherent territory’, which is widely used in East Asia (for instance, Takeshima – known as Dokdo in Korea – is claimed to be ‘an inherent part of the territory of Japan’,25 and ‘the Senkaku Islands are clearly an inherent part of the territory of Japan’26), appears to signify historic title.27 Indeed, China’s position as indicated in the 2012 pamphlet, in the 2011 book compiled by the PRC Foreign Ministry, and in scholarly and media materials, gives central focus to this title. In so doing, China adamantly refutes Japan’s contention that the Senkaku/Diaoyu Islands were terra nullius in January 1895.28

To corroborate its argument founded on historic title, China adduces a substantial amount of historical records dating back to as early as 1403. These records document a long series of Chinese practices or actions relating to the islands such as their usage as navigational aids for various investiture missions, at the latest, since 1534. China also invokes many cases of the islands’ entry in the local gazetteers and, more importantly, the practices of incorporating the islands within the Chinese coastal defence system.29 Cartographic evidence is also proffered, such as the inclusion of the islands as Chinese territory in an official Chinese map entitled Imperial Map of Native and Foreign Lands (Huangchao Zhongwai Yitong Yutu, 1863).30

In discussing whether the islands were terra nullius in January 1895, Chinese commentators hint at the existence of not a single normative system, but of a double-layered normative order in East Asia at the end of the nineteenth century. In other words, as far as China is concerned, the question of the Senkaku/Diaoyu Islands being terra nullius or not in January 1895 should not be assessed solely according to ‘modern international law’ (that had been recently ‘introduced’ into the region). The traditional concept of territorial sovereignty as practiced in East Asia should be taken into account (at least, along with modern international law) in the evaluation of the question.

In this vein, a Chinese commentator mentions the need to ‘[consider] as special the Chinese ancient values on territorial sovereignty, instead of disqualifying the legal effect of [China’s “obviously ineffective display of sovereignty” in the pre-1895 period]’.31 He admits that ‘[traditionally] China’s approaches to displaying its sovereignty are all alien to Western international law doctrines’.32 These arguments are offered, in part, to counter Japan’s attempt to discredit the relevance of the pre-1895 Chinese records and practices.33 From the standpoint of China, it would be highly inappropriate to apply the yardstick of modern international law in appreciating the facts that took place under a substantially different normative order.

2 Overview of the Japanese position

While China presented its official position in an elaborate manner only recently, the Japanese government had already published a document titled ‘The Basic View on the Sovereignty over the Senkaku Islands’ (hereinafter, ‘Basic View’) in March 1972. The following discussion is based on this document, together with the supplementary information such as ‘Q&A on the Senkaku Islands’, which is available on the homepage of the Japanese Ministry of Foreign Affairs.34 The ‘Basic View’ has evolved since its first appearance in 1972 and it is worthwhile to compare the 1972 version and the currently available one.35

The first paragraph of the currently available ‘Basic View’ summarises the Japanese position. According to the provisional translation offered at the homepage of the Japanese Ministry of Foreign Affairs, the central part of the paragraph reads: ‘[t]here is no doubt that the Senkaku Islands are clearly an inherent part of the territory of Japan, in light of historical facts and based upon international law’.36

The current version of the ‘Basic View’ contains four more paragraphs that serve to elaborate the main argument as put forth in the first paragraph. The main grounds Japan invokes to support its claim of territorial sovereignty over the islands can be summarised as follows:

  1. (a) historic title as reconfirmed by the act of annexation as terra nullius in 1895

  2. (b) confirmation of Japan’s sovereignty in the 1951 San Francisco Peace Treaty

  3. (c) China’s acquiescence in (or even recognition of) Japan’s territorial sovereignty until 1971.

According to Japan, ‘the Senkaku Islands have continuously been an integral part of the Nansei Shoto Islands [present-day Okinawa Islands], which are the territory of Japan’.37 Normally, such a statement would be followed by the enumeration of records and practices proving the claimant State’s historic title over the islands in question. However, in the case of the Senkaku Islands, very curiously, Japan states that after confirming that ‘the Senkaku Islands had been not only uninhabited but also showed no trace of having been under the control of the Qing Dynasty of China’,38 it annexed the islands as terra nullius on 14 January 1895. An acute logical problem implicit in this argument will be discussed in more detail later.

Japan also invokes the resounding and prolonged silence of China regarding the islands from 1895 until 1971. It goes further by adducing some evidence which, Japan argues, proves China’s recognition of Japan’s territorial sovereignty over the islands. One prominent example is an article of the People’s Daily, the official newspaper of the Communist Party of China, which appeared on 8 January 1953. The article, titled ‘Battle of People in the Ryukyu Islands against the U.S. Occupation’, stated that ‘the Ryukyu Islands…consist of 7 groups of islands; the Senkaku Islands, the Sakishima Islands’.39 Based on these practices, Japan argues that China acquiesced in and even recognised Japanese territorial sovereignty over the islands. This would constitute an ‘Achilles’ heel’ for China in a judicial setting.

IV Some critical remarks on the respective positions of China and Japan

This section will offer some critical remarks on the respective positions of China and Japan over the question of the Senkaku/Diaoyu Islands. It will focus on the questions that have an immediate relevance to the main question under consideration – that is, whether modern international law alone should be taken into account when tackling the problem of determining territorial sovereignty over the Senkaku/Diaoyu Islands.

1 Critique of the Chinese position

The Chinese position is mainly anchored on historic title – a claim about which the Japanese side raises serious doubt, calling into question the relevance of the historical documents and maps that China relies upon. According to Japan, these documents and maps fall short of the legal standards set by modern international law and, as such, do not deserve to be taken into account in resolving the question.

For this reason some Chinese commentators put forth the need to evaluate these documents not from the standpoint of modern European international law, but from the viewpoint of a different normative order contemporaneous with the alleged annexation of the islands by Japan – that is, the traditional East Asian world order.40 China holds a deep sense of mistrust and victimisation in regard to modern international law given that it perceives itself to have been on the receiving end of the instrumental (ab)use of such law by the Western and Japanese powers throughout the ‘century of humiliation’.41

To this extent, China’s reliance on the double-layered nature of international law in the region is understandable. However, China’s approach is riddled with serious problems. First, it is a highly daunting task to come up with an articulate description of the traditional normative order in East Asia as a sophisticated and coherent system. Secondly, supposing one could reconstruct this order in an elaborate and coherent way, it should be recalibrated to ensure its compatibility with the fundamental principles of modern international law. For instance, the basic tenet of the traditional order is the (axiomatic) positional superiority of China and the resultant verticality of its relationship with the other members of the order. It is obvious that this verticality is diametrically opposed to the founding principle of modern international law – that is, the principle of sovereign equality of states. Thirdly, the no less difficult task of securing an interface between this order and modern international law remains.

At the present stage, it appears that Chinese commentators are resorting to and invoking the traditional regional order without articulating the architecture and concrete contents of the order. From this, it follows that they do not know how to articulate the relationship between this order and modern international law.

2 Critique of the Japanese position

In contrast to the Chinese position, Japan appears to operate under a single normative system – that is, modern international law originating from Europe. The seemingly straightforward position of the Japanese government gives the impression that both points in time – namely, the year 1895 (when the islands were annexed as terra nullius) and the present – are placed within a single and seamlessly continuing normative space, obviating the need to discuss the double-layered nature of international law in East Asia.

The main Japanese position is built on historic title as reconfirmed by the act of annexation as terra nullius in 1895. When one compares the 1972 ‘Basic View’ with its current version, there is a subtle yet important difference concerning the title of occupation of terra nullius. In the older version, this title is accorded the central role in establishing Japan’s territorial sovereignty over the islands. The original claim was that ‘[s]ince [January 1895] the Senkaku Islands have been consistently a part of Japan’s territory of Nansei Shoto’.42 In stark contrast, the current ‘Basic View’ states that ‘[h]istorically, the Senkaku Islands have continuously been an integral part of the Nansei Shoto Islands, which are the territory of Japan’. Thus, there has been a substantial shift in the Japanese position with respect to when the islands have been regarded as the ‘inherent territory’ of Japan. In sum, according to the 1972 ‘Basic View’, the islands have been a part of Japan’s territory of Nansei Shoto since January 1895, while the current ‘Basic View’ regards them as having been an integral part of the Nansei Shoto Islands historically, seemingly indicating that they have been so ‘from time immemorial’.

This difference is not merely temporal. It compels one to reconstruct the logical relationship between the titles. According to the 1972 ‘Basic View’, this relationship is straightforward. The islands were annexed as terra nullius in 1895 and have since then remained a part of Japan’s territory. Under the current ‘Basic View’, Japan annexed the islands not as terra nullius, but in order to reconfirm its historic title over them. It is clear that an acute logical problem (‘annexing as terra nullius the islands that have been a historically inherent part of your territory’) lurks in the new formulation.

An important question is why Japan is taking the risk of committing such a logical fallacy. If nothing had happened to the once unassailable superiority of modern international law, such retreat into a logical quagmire by Japan would not have been necessary. The compulsion, as it were, to take such a substantial risk suggests that a significant change has taken place to, generally, the international legal order of East Asia, and, more specifically, to the normative parameters of territorial questions in the region. The unquestionable superiority of modern international law (in particular, the positivity and legitimacy of annexation of terra nullius as a title of territorial acquisition), obviating the need to look at any other normative system, gave way to the necessity to reformulate Japan’s argument concerning its territorial title, even at the risk of logical inconsistency.

3 Preliminary conclusion

The critical survey conducted above suggests that the rise or return of China as a world power has dented the unquestionable authority of modern international law as the ultimate normative benchmark for the region. This probably has led China to invoke the ‘pre-modern’ documents and practices with more ease and conviction. Japan seems to be compelled to take into account this change, even at the risk of logical selfcontradiction.

Does this imply that the contemporary legal order in East Asia is of a palimpsestic nature? Supposing that that order is (at least partially) palimpsestic, how can one secure an ‘interface’ between modern international law and the traditional regional order in an articulate and coherent manner? Is this mode of viewing contemporary international law applicable to the other non-European regions? Does this approach not carry the risk of further aggravating the ‘fragmentation of international law’ about which much concern has been expressed from various angles? One can come up with a very long list of questions concerning the palimpsestic nature or structure of international law, some of which are discussed in the next section.

V The palimpsestic nature of territorial sovereignty in East Asia

This chapter does not aim to evaluate the merits of the respective claims of China and Japan over the Senkaku/Diaoyu Islands, but to examine the fundamental question underlying China’s argument: the existence and relevance of the traditional concept of territorial sovereignty and its implications for the resolution of the Senkaku/Diaoyu dispute. I will first describe the dilemma faced by the Chinese side and then suggest a strategy for a palimpsestic reconstruction of its claims over the Senkaku/Diaoyu Islands.

1 Dilemma faced by the Chinese scholars

A fundamental difference between the approaches of China and Japan concerning the Senkaku/Diaoyu Islands lies in the choice of normative system(s) to be applied to the question at hand. In this connection, the Chinese side places a substantial reliance on the traditional concept of territorial sovereignty.

Concerning the Chinese argument based on the double-layered structure of international law in East Asia, let me first point out that a substantial degree of uncertainty surrounds such resort to the traditional order. Chinese commentators do not elaborate what the substantive contours or contents of this order are in reference to territorial acquisition. They stop at suggesting the existence and relevance of this order. While unable to articulate the architecture and contents of this order, they still believe that this normative dimension exists and could (or should) impact, in one way or another, the resolution of the question. There exists a perception that there is ‘something important’, but it remains on the furthest edges of their epistemological horizon, defying a comprehensible and detailed exposition.

Without a clear idea of what this traditional order is, it is very difficult to expect scholars to proceed to the ‘Herculean’ task of securing and clarifying the relationship or interaction between the traditional order and modern international law. Until and unless this relationship or interface is constructed in an intelligible and coherent manner, the traditional order is in danger of remaining just that, a hodge-podge of ‘pre-modern’ practices not susceptible of scientific or systemic treatment or categorisation by modern international law. That this is not an idle worry is amply demonstrated by a series of decisions of the International Court of Justice and international arbitral tribunals.43

2 Strategy for a palimpsestic reconstruction

Let me now address the question of how to ascertain the substantive contours or contents of the traditional East Asian order, often known as the Sino-centric order. The late Professor Wang Tieya observed in his 1990 Hague Lectures that ‘for thousands of years in the context of Chinese traditional order, no international law of any kind could possibly exist’.44 The veracity of this sweeping statement can be questioned in many ways. However, the question of the correctness of the ‘Wang thesis’ should not detain us here. What is important for our purposes is that the supposed or professed cultural or moral character of the order (or, seen from a different angle, the alleged absence of an ‘inter-State’ relationship) resulted in a dearth of reflections or scientific treatments of the subject now called international law. For example, books were written dealing with diplomatic rituals. However, little literature on the ‘legal’ nature of the tributary relations (often assimilated to ‘suzerainty’, a highly misleading term having a European origin) was produced.45 To use the Hegelian terms, the Sino-centric order existed and functioned as a ‘being-in-itself’ (an-sich-sein), lacking in self-awareness and remaining ‘self-identical’. In other words, the order did not reach the stage of ‘being-for-itself’ (für-sich-sein), ‘the fully deployed, exteriorized, which therefore lies, as it were “before itself”’.46

As a result, it is not surprising that Chinese scholars could not present a systematic exposition of the substantive contents of the order in spite of their repeated invocations of it. There lies the difficult task for the scholars who are interested in the palimpsestic nature of international law in East Asia and other non-European regions. They have first to articulate the traditional orders in their regions in a systematic and coherent manner. Given the absence or dearth of academic or reflective heritage in this regard and the resultant need to work from scratch, the enormity of the task can be readily understood.

It is beyond my ability to provide an articulate description of the order in this chapter. All I can do is merely to suggest a research strategy for the future. The first task is to collate cases or practices relating to territorial questions from historical materials. In analysing these cases, one needs to find recurrent patterns and determine whether they have normative implications. In doing so, the risk of uncritically subsuming these practices under the ready-made categories and concepts of modern international law should be avoided. One should not overlook or ignore a certain overlap or commonality between the two normative orders. At the same time, every effort should be made to remain aware of and alert to the characteristics peculiar to the traditional East Asian order.

Let me adduce an example. China accords substantial weight to the fact that the Chinese first discovered and named the Diaoyu Islands. In this connection, let me discuss an official Chinese map entitled Imperial Map of Native and Foreign Lands (Huangchao Zhongwai Yitong Yutu, 1863). In the explanatory part to the compilation of maps, a co-compiler of the maps, Yan Shusen, stated the principle of ‘the name follows its owner’ (mingcongzhuren). He strengthened the authority of the principle by tracing it to one of the canonical texts of Confucianism, ‘The Commentary of Gongyang to the Springs and Autumns Annals’. If a certain locality on the map belonged to non-Sinic frontier lands (siyi), both the Chinese and vernacular names were used. He subsequently provided a select list of vernacular expressions for, among others, river, mountain, castle, lake and their Chinese counterparts.47

In connection with the Senkaku/Daioyu question, this principle could assume a certain importance. On the 1863 map, the three islands belonging to the Senkaku/Diaoyu Islands are indicated in Chinese names only, while those islands belonging to the present-day Okinawa are indicated in both Chinese and the vernacular – that is, Ryukyuan – names. According to the Chinese side, this fact is interpreted to reflect Qing China’s clear conception of territorial ownership of the Diaoyu Islands.48

There is much need for further research into the significance of the principle as expressed in the 1863 map. The Chinese interpretation would be further strengthened if one could prove that this supposed principle, rather than being a one-off in 1863, was in fact widely used in traditional East Asia. Then the Chinese side could be justified in claiming that the islands in question fell under the Chinese dominium under the traditional East Asian order, thereby refuting Japan’s argument based on the annexation of the islands as terra nullius.49

To address this thorny question, interdisciplinary and international co-operation among scholars is required. Even if one were able to articulate the substantive contours or contents of the traditional order, the no less daunting challenge of securing an interface between this order and modern international law remains. In carrying out this difficult task, one should not conceptualise the relationship between the two orders as two separate circles that never overlap. This would be as grave an error as supposing that both an island dispute in mid-nineteenth-century East Asia and one in early twenty-first-century Europe occupy the same normative space. There should be a certain level of overlap or commonality between the orders in respect of the conception of territory (and the concomitant rules such as its inviolability in time of peace), the catalogue of valid territorial titles, the probative value of maps and so on. In so doing, one should construct the interface in such a way as to ensure compatibility between the traditional order and modern international law.

VI Concluding remarks

In this short chapter, I have conducted a preliminary investigation into China’s ‘rise’ or ‘return’ and its implications for the resolution of a territorial question between China and Japan, concerning the Senkaku/Diaoyu Islands. In so doing, I have attempted to demonstrate that while Japan operates under the European version of territorial law that has enjoyed a monopolistic authority in the region since the latter half of the nineteenth century, China places a substantial reliance on, in addition to contemporary international law, the normative discourse that reigned supreme in traditional East Asia. I have used the metaphor of palimpsest to delve into the (at least partially) double-layered structure or nature of international law in today’s East Asia. The metaphor can be utilised in other non-European regions of the world.

One may ask about the differences between China’s rise and its challenge for contemporary public international law, on the one hand, and the other challenges coming from outside Western Europe in the past, on the other. As regards the latter, three examples come to mind. First, Japan’s rise in the post-1945 period was partial in the sense that it was limited to the economic and financial field. More importantly, Japan seems to lack an animus to change the international legal order. Secondly, the rise of the Soviet Union led to a fierce rivalry between the capitalist and the socialist camps and posed a great challenge to the unity and continuity of international law. The theory of peaceful co-existence, firmly premised on the fundamental incompatibility between the two camps,50 is an apt example. However, ‘peaceful co-existence’ meant co-survival in a state of ‘cold peace’ without meaningful interchange. This constitutes a significant contrast to the relationship between China and the rest of the world that can be characterised as one of profound entanglement. Thirdly, there was a serious attempt by the G-77 states to reformulate the international legal order during the period of de-colonisation, as is exemplified by the effort to establish a new international economic order or a new international information order. However, the rise of this group of states at the discursive level was not matched by a rise at the material level. In other words, their rise, if ever, had only animus, lacking in corpus. Thus looked at, the challenge China’s rise poses for current international law is unprecedented and, therefore, requires a focused and, at the same time, flexible response.

To use the metaphor of giant, China can be described as a giant that does not yet know how to articulate its normative past. The rise of China will surely impact on the configurations of the international normative system in one way or another, thus ensuring that the current international law is recalibrated to reflect the normative experiences and expectations of China. In the region, discomfort with the current system of international law is not limited to China. The late Professor Han-key Lee, who is regarded as one of the pioneers of modern international law research in Korea, proposed the establishment of a Regional International Court of Justice of Asia for the pacific settlement of disputes, especially disputes arising from State boundary or territory problems. This court was to ‘solve regional problems on the basis of regional philosophy of law and practices’.51

The re-conceptualisation of international law in East Asia from a palimpsestic perspective and the resultant recalibration of current international law carry the risk of furthering the centrifugal tendency of international law. This exercise cannot be a nostalgic and unreflective attempt to return to an ostensibly idyllic past, which is unfeasible given that international law has been transformed (probably irrevocably) by the ‘public law of Europe’. East Asians cannot return to the days when the positional superiority of China was the founding principle of the regional order. In particular, one should beware the danger of the palimpsestic approach to territorial questions in East Asia falling prey to the siren call of irredentism, which runs diametrically counter to the fundamental principle of the stability of boundaries. It should aim at a more modest and pragmatic goal of achieving a peaceful change or polyphonic reconstruction of international law without radically undermining the stability and security of the current international order.

* Part of this chapter is based on the presentation the author made at the 2011 ILA Asia-Pacific Regional Conference (Taipei, 29 May–1 June 2011) under the title ‘Territorial Questions in the East China Sea from a Trans-temporal Perspective’.

1 Mure Dickie, ‘China Economy Overtakes Japan’, Financial Times, 14 February 2011.

2 e.g. John J. Mearsheimer, The Tragedy of Great Power Politics (New York: W. W. Norton, 2001); ibid.,‘China’s Unpeaceful Rise’, Current History (April 2006), 160–2. For detailed discussions of the question, see Steve Chan, China, the U.S. and the Power-Transition Theory: A Critique (London and New York: Routledge, 2008); Barry Buzan, ‘China in International Society: Is “Peaceful Rise” Possible?’, The Chinese Journal of International Politics, 3 (2010), 5–36.

3 Cui Tiankai and Pang Hanzhao, ‘China–US Relations in China’s Overall Diplomacy in the New Era: On China and US Working Together to Build a New-Type Relationship Between Major Countries’ (20 July 2012), available at www.fmprc.gov.cn/ce/cggb/eng/gyzg/xwdt/t953682.htm.

4 Henry Kissinger, On China (New York: Penguin, 2012), 546.

5 Wang Tieya, ‘International Law in China: Historical and Contemporary Perspectives’, Recueil des Cours, 221 (1990), 288; Li Zhaojie, ‘Legacy of Modern Chinese History: Its Relevance to the Chinese Perspective of the Contemporary International Legal Order’, Singapore Journal of International and Comparative Law, 5 (2001), 318. For a detailed discussion of the principle of sovereignty from Chinese perspective, see Xue Hanqin, Chinese Contemporary Perspectives on International Law: History, Culture and International Law (Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, 2012), 68–96; Yang Zewei, Zhuquanlun: Guojifa shangde Zhuquan Wenti ji qi Fazhan Qushi Yanjiu [On Sovereignty: Sovereignty and Its Development Tendency in International Law] (Peking University Press, 2005).

6 For a detailed discussion of the relationship between souveraineté territoriale (territoriale Souveränität) and suprématie territoriale (Gebietshoheit), see Julio A. Barberis, ‘Les Liens juridiques entre l’état et son territoire: perpspectives théoriques et évolution du droit international’, Annuaire Français de Droit International, 45 (1999), 132–46; Alfred Verdross, Bruno Simma and Rudolf Geiger, Territoriale Souveränität und Gebietshoheit: Zur völkerrechtlichen Lage der Oder-Neiße-Gebiete (Bonn: Kulturstiftung der Deutschen Vertriebenen, 1980).

7 Reiji Yoshida, ‘Japan Protests China’s Okinawa Commentary’, Japan Times, 10 May 2013.

8 The principle of mutual respect for sovereignty and territorial integrity is the first among the Five Principles of Peaceful Co-existence that were promulgated by China and India in 1954. Xue, Chinese Contemporary Perspectives on International Law, 36.

9 For a classical discussion of this subject, see John King Fairbank (ed.), The Chinese World Order: Traditional China’s Foreign Relations (Harvard University Press, 1968).

10 Due to space constraints, I will not provide a detailed description of the Senkaku/Diayudao question, which one can find elsewhere. For instance, Tao Cheng, ‘The Sino-Japanese Dispute over the Tiao-yu-tai (Senkaku) Islands and the Law of Territorial Acquisition’, Virginia Journal of International Law, 14 (1974), 221–65; Yoshiro Matsui, ‘International Law of Territorial Acquisition and the Dispute over the Senkaku (Diaoyu) Islands’, Japanese Annual of International Law, 40 (1997), 3–31; Han-yi Shaw, The Diaoyutai/Senkaku Islands Dispute: Its History and an Analysis of the Ownership Claims of the P.R.C., R.O.C., and Japan (Occasional Papers/Reprints Series in Contemporary Asian Studies No. 3–1999 (152)); Unryu Suganuma, Sovereign Rights and Territorial Space in Sino-Japanese Relations: Irredentism and the Diaoyu/Senkaku Islands (Hawaii University Press, 2000); Seokwoo Lee, ‘Territorial Disputes among Japan, China and Taiwan Concerning the Senkaku Islands’, Boundary and Territory Briefings, 3 (2002), 1–37; Junwu Pan, Toward a New Framework for Peaceful Settlement of China’s Territorial and Boundary Disputes (Leiden: Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, 2009); Masahiko Asada, ‘Diaoyu/Senkaku Islands’, Max Planck Encyclopedia of Public International Law, 10 vols. (Oxford University Press, 2011), III, 90–3.

11 Information Office of the State Council, The Peoples’ Republic of China, ‘Diaoyu Dao, an Inherent Territory of China’ (Foreign Language Press, 2012), available at www.fmprc.gov.cn/eng/topics/diaodao/t973774.htm.

12 Supplement to the American Journal of International Law, 38 (1944), 8.

13 James Crawford, The Creation of States in International Law, 2nd edn (Oxford University Press, 2006), 198.

14 Information Office of the State Council, PRC, ‘Diaoyu Dao, an Inherent Territory of China’, 12.

15 Committee for Co-ordination of Joint Prospecting for Mineral Resources in Asian Offshore Areas, United Nations Economic Commission for Asia and the Far East, ‘Geological Structure and Some Water Characteristics of the East China Sea and Yellow Sea’, Technical Bulletin2 (1969), 39–40.

16 According to the PRC, ‘On December 30, 1971, the Chinese Ministry of Foreign Affairs issued a solemn statement, pointing out that “it is completely illegal for the government of the United States and Japan to include China’s Diaoyu Dao Islands into the territories to be returned to Japan in the Okinawa Reversion Agreement and that it can by no means change the People’s Republic of China’s territorial sovereignty over the Diaoyu Dao Islands”. The Taiwan authorities also expressed firm opposition to the backroom deal between the United States and Japan.’ Above n. 11, at 13.

17 For the Japanese position on whether the question was shelved in 1972 and 1978, see Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Japan, ‘Q&A on the Senkaku Islands’ (in particular, Question No. 14), available at www.mofa.go.jp/region/asia-paci/senkaku/qa_1010.html#qa14.

18 Steven Wei Su, ‘The Territorial Dispute over the Tiaoyu/Senkaku Islands: An Update’, Ocean Development and International Law, 36 (2005), 45.

19 For a detailed discussion of this question, see Gao Jianjun, ‘Joint Development in the East China Sea: Not an Easier Challenge than Delimitation’, The International Journal of Marine and Coastal Law, 23 (2008), 39–75.

20 ‘Statement of the Government of the People’s Republic of China on the Baselines of the Territorial Sea of Diaoyu Dao and Its Affiliated Islands’ (September 10, 2012), available at www.un.org/depts/los/LEGISLATIONANDTREATIES/PDFFILES/DEPOSIT/chn_mzn89_2012_e.pdf.

21 Martin Fackler, ‘Japan Says China Aimed Radar at Ship’, New York Times, 5 February 2013.

22 Duan Jielong (ed.), Zhongguo Guojifa Shijianyu Anli (International Law in China: Cases and Practice) (Beijing: Law Press China, 2011).

23 Above n. 11.

24 The publication is available from the following website: www.soa.gov.cn/soa/news/specialtopic/diaoyudao/gylt/webinfo/2012/09/1347338540445425.htm.

25 Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Japan, ‘Japan’s Inalterable Position on the Sovereignty of Takeshima’, available at www.mofa.go.jp/region/asia-paci/takeshima/index.html.

26 Ibid., and ‘The Basic View on the Sovereignty over the Senkaku Islands’ (May 2013), available at www.mofa.go.jp/region/asia-paci/senkaku/basic_view.html.

27 For a concise discussion of historic title, see Andrea Gioia, ‘Historic Titles’, Max Planck Encyclopedia of Public International Law, 10 vols. (Oxford University Press, 2011), IV, 814–23.

28 For a detailed discussion of various modes of territorial acquisition, see James Crawford, Brownlie’s Principles of Public International Law, 8th edn (Oxford University Press, 2012), ch. 9.

29 Information Office of the State Council, PRC, ‘Diaoyu Dao, an Inherent Territory of China’, 5; Shaw, The Diaoyutai/Senkaku Islands Dispute, 55–7; Cheng, ‘The Sino-Japanese Dispute over the Tiao-yu-tai (Senkaku) Islands and the Law of Territorial Acquisition’, 256–7.

30 Information Office of the State Council, PRC, ‘Diaoyu Dao, an Inherent Territory of China’, 6; Shaw, The Diaoyutai/Senkaku Islands Dispute, 55.

31 Su, ‘The Territorial Dispute over the Tiaoyu/Senkaku Islands: An Update’, 52.

33 e.g. Toshio Okuhara, ‘Senkaku Retto no Ryoyuken Kizoku Mondai’ (The Problem of To Whom the Territorial Sovereignty over the Senkaku Islands Belongs), Asahi Asia Review, 3 (1972).

34 Above n. 7.

35 The most recent version is effective as of May 2013. The following discussion is based on this version.

36 The ‘Basic View on the Sovereignty over the Senkaku Islands’.

39 Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Japan, ‘Q&A on the Senkaku Islands’ (in particular, Question No. 4).

40 e.g. Shaw discusses the relevance of the ‘East Asian World Order’ throughout his book The Diaoyutai/Senkaku Islands Dispute.

41 Xue observes that ‘China’s persistent stand on the primacy of State sovereignty has its deep roots embedded in the miserable experience in its modern history’, Chinese Contemporary Perspectives on International Law, 71.

42 The English version of the 1972 ‘Basic View’ of Japan is available from the following source: Jerome Alan Cohen and Hungdah Chiu, People’s China and International Law: A Documentary Study, 2 vols. (Princeton University Press, 1974), I, 351–2.

43 Cases involving territorial sovereignty in which arguments based on ‘pre-modern’ legal concepts or practices were rejected by international judicial organs include, among others, Western Sahara (Advisory Opinion) (1975), Case concerning the Territorial Dispute (Libya/Chad) (1994) and Eritrea-Yemen Arbitration, Phase I Award (1998).

44 Wang, ‘International Law in China’, 219. See also Fairbank, The Chinese World Order, 5 (‘the traditional Chinese world order can hardly be called international’).

45 For discussions on the history of international law in East Asia, see Keishiro Iriye, ‘The Principles of International Law in the Light of Confucian Doctrine’, Recueil des Cours, 120 (1967), 1–57; Onuma Yasuaki, ‘When Was the Law of International Society Born? – An Inquiry of the History of International Law from an Intercivilizational Perspective’, Journal of the History of International Law, 2 (2000), 27–32, 51–4.

46 Charles Taylor, Hegel (Cambridge University Press, 1975), 112.

47 e.g. Toshio Okuhara, ‘Senkaku Retto no Ryoyuken Kizoku Mondai’ (The Problem of to Whom the Territorial Sovereignty over the Senkaku Islands Belongs), Asahi Asia Review, 3 (1972).

48 Shaw, The Diaoyutai/Senkaku Islands Dispute, 55.

49 China could argue that under the standard of modern international law the inclusion of these uninhabited and remote islands in an official map can amount to not only ‘symbolical’ but ‘effective’ occupation. On the other hand, Japan could invoke the case law as elaborated in the Island of Palmas arbitration and regard the 1863 act of China, at most, as creating an ‘inchoate’ title. For a detailed discussion of discovery creating only an inchoate title, see Island of Palmas or (Miangas), United States v. Netherlands, Arbitration (1928), Reports of International Arbitral Awards, vol. 2, 843–6.

50 For a detailed discussion of the subject, see Grigory I. Tunkin, ‘Coexistence and International Law, Recueil des Cours, 95 (1958), 1–81.

51 Han-Key Lee and MyongWhai Kim, ‘Background Paper on Hongkong Conference in International Law’, Korean Journal of International Law, 12 (1967), 181–2.

8 General legal characteristics of States A view from the past of the Permanent Court of International Justice

Ole Spiermann

Contributors to this book share the privilege of having been supervised by Professor Crawford in an atmosphere combining theoretical curiosity and vast practical experience that is unique to James: a truly open system. These were supervisions at their most effective, open-minded and thought-provoking; they were also supervisions by a master not to be imitated by his students, as this chapter will confirm. With James Crawford in the Whewell chair, international law at Cambridge acknowledged a close relationship between law and history long before it became flavour of the month. This chapter will take the general characteristics of States listed in The Creation of States in International Law and discuss these, albeit not quite in the Crawfordian style, with a view to the past of the Permanent Court of International Justice.

The Permanent Court stands as a monument to the possible impact to be exercised on and from the bench of the World Court by eminent scholars. In their generation, Max Huber and Dionisio Anzilotti were second to none. The Permanent Court was the first significant court of justice at the international level. Obscure cases decided by the Permanent Court are household names, familiar to present generations of international lawyers, because they were, by chance, the first place for authoritative expression of various principles of general international law. Such statements of principle have found wide use far beyond their original context. Many are also to the point today. As Crawford has noted, ‘[o]ur system is one which international lawyers of four generations ago would have had no particular difficulty in recognizing or working with, once they had got over its bulk’.1 To the question ‘what are the constitutional underpinnings of the processes that are producing such developments as these?’, Crawford’s answer has been: ‘the same old concepts of consent, treaty-making and state authority’. To the question ‘what are the legal techniques at play in determining the results of these processes?’, he has answered: ‘[t]he same old techniques’.2

General legal characteristics of States

In The Creation of States in International Law, Crawford lists five general legal characteristics of States, including the following:

  1. (1) In principle, States have plenary competence to perform acts, make treaties and so on in the international sphere: this is one meaning of the term ‘sovereign’ as applied to States.

  2. (2) In principle, States are exclusively competent with respect to their internal affairs, a principle reflected by Article 2(7) of the United Nations Charter. This does not of course mean that international law imposes no constraints: it does mean that their jurisdiction over internal matters is prima facie both plenary and not subject to the control of other States.

  3. (4) In international law States are regarded as ‘equal’, a principle recognized by the Charter (Article 2(1)). This is in part a restatement of the foregoing principles, but it has other corollaries. It is a formal, not a moral principle. It does not mean, for example, that all States are entitled to an equal vote in international organizations: States may consent to unequal voting rights by becoming members of organizations with weighted voting…Still less does it mean that they are entitled to equal voice or influence. But it does mean that at a basic level, States have equal status and standing…3

Essentially, these three general characteristics of States combine three notions that are fundamental to international law and international lawyers.

First, sovereignty: States have ‘plenary competence’, both ‘in the international sphere’ (1) and ‘with respect to their internal affairs’ (2).

Secondly, independence: States are ‘prima facie…not subject to the control of other States’, in international matters (4) as well as in ‘internal matters’ (2).

Thirdly, international/national divide: sometimes States act ‘in the international sphere’ (1 and 4), sometimes in ‘their internal affairs’ (2).

It takes a plurality of States, and the acknowledgement thereof, to move from sovereignty to independence and the international/national divide. This move cannot be explained or questioned within international law. It is axiomatic to international law. International lawyers have an understanding of what constitutes ‘the international sphere’ before they become, or see themselves as, international lawyers. This minimum of internationalism is beyond sovereign will. Sovereignty is competence while independence is restriction upon competence, something to be accepted in order to secure the sovereignty of other states through international law.

Yet another general legal characteristic of States, as formulated by Crawford, is the following:

  1. (3) In principle States are not subject to compulsory international process, jurisdiction, or settlement without their consent, given either generally or in the specific case.4

Independence translates into a variety of principles, which are substantive in kind, the necessary minimum of international law and, in terms of scope, an international sphere, as distinct from internal affairs. The substantive principles into which independence translates have been categorised by tradition as customary international law, sometimes supplemented by general principles of civilised nations. Some have tried to introduce avant-gardist terms such as ‘international law of co-existence’. Crawford prefers the more appropriate term ‘general international law’.

It is a choice to include the absence of compulsory jurisdiction in general international law as a general, and legal, characteristic of States. It means that jurisdiction takes consent and treaty form. It is an aspect of substantive international law. Instead of this negative aspect of general international law, one could just as well refer to some of the positive aspects as general legal characteristics of States, such as the principle of peaceful settlement of disputes.

The last general legal characteristic of States listed by Crawford is the following:

  1. (5) Derogations from these principles will not be presumed: in case of doubt an international court or tribunal will tend to decide in favour of the freedom of action of States, whether with respect to external or internal affairs, or as not having consented to a specific exercise of international jurisdiction, or to a particular derogation from equality. This presumption – rebuttable in any case – has declined in importance, but it is still invoked from time to time and is still part of the hidden grammar of international legal language. It will be referred to as the Lotus presumption – its classic formulation being the judgment of the Permanent Court in The Lotus.5

This last general characteristic of States is accompanied by a footnote occupying almost a full page, and it is controversial, not least from the point of view of the Permanent Court.

Independence and the Permanent Court

The flow of grand statements from the Permanent Court that are still quoted today are almost exclusively the fruits of the work of the Permanent Court in its first composition in the 1920s. This period saw a tendency to employ the most general principles in deciding the most specific issues, and an interest in ‘developing’ international law.

The first thing to note about this period is that the focus of the Permanent Court was on independence, as distinct from sovereignty, as illustrated by the following cases.

In the Eastern Carelia Opinion, independence was characterised as ‘a fundamental principle of international law [la base même du droit international]’. The Permanent Court added: ‘It is well established in international law that no State can, without its consent, be compelled to submit its disputes with other States either to mediation or to arbitration, or to any other kind of pacific settlement.’6

Just before the Eastern Carelia Opinion, in the Nationality Decrees Opinion, the Permanent Court took independence (in the form of a principle of non-intervention) as a blueprint when interpreting Article 15(8) of the Covenant of the League of Nations. According to Article 15(8), the Council of the League of Nations should make no recommendations in matters ‘within the domestic jurisdiction’. In the view of the Permanent Court, ‘at a given point’ the League’s interest in being able to make recommendations gave ‘way to the equally essential interest of the individual State to maintain intact its independence in matters which international law recognises to be solely within its jurisdiction’.7 ‘Without this reservation’, the Permanent Court explained, ‘the internal affairs of a country might, directly they appeared to affect the interests of another country, be brought before the Council and form the subject of recommendations by the League of Nations’. However, a caveat was entered. According to the same paragraph of the motifs, ‘[t]he question whether a certain matter is or is not solely within the jurisdiction of a State is an essentially relative question; it depends upon the development of international relations’.8 Article 15(8) was ‘limited by rules of international law’ so that if a State had undertaken treaty obligations, Article 15(8) ‘then ceases to apply as regards those States which are entitled to invoke such rules’, the dispute taking on ‘an international character’. In short, independence was not synonymous with sovereignty nor a principle of in dubio pro libertate, a presumption against international law.

In The Lotus then, the Permanent Court was again dealing with independence, as distinct from sovereignty:

International law governs relations between independent States. The rules of law binding upon States therefore emanate from their own free will as expressed in conventions or by usages generally accepted as expressing principles of law and established in order to regulate the relations between these co-existing independent communities [la co-existence de ces communautés indépendantes] or with a view to the achievement of common aims. Restrictions upon the independence of States cannot therefore be presumed.9

The last sentence, ‘[r]estrictions upon the independence of States cannot therefore be presumed’, has been taken by many academics to imply that the Permanent Court saw no need for international law, that each State was sovereign and self-contained, and that it supported a presumption against international law.

In the Nuclear Weapons Opinion, the International Court of Justice for the first and only time confronted that particular sentence, just in order to side-step it. According to the International Court, none of the States appearing before the Court had disputed that ‘their independence to act was indeed restricted by the principles and rules of international law’.10 Therefore, the International Court assumed that the Permanent Court had been using the word ‘independence’ as synonymous with ‘sovereignty’, while the approach of the Permanent Court was, in fact, the exact opposite. In 1931, Max Huber had made it known that the majority opinion in The Lotus ‘a été quelquefois mal interprété par les critiques du dit arrêt’.11 Åke Hammerskjöld, the ingenious Registrar of the Permanent Court, was equally critical of the readers, writing under pseudonym.12

What the Permanent Court dealt with in that critical passage of the judgment in The Lotus was the making of international law outside general international law, namely treaty law. Clearly the Permanent Court assumed that only states can make international law and, because ‘independent’, no State could lay down international law with binding effect on another State: ‘The rules of law binding upon States therefore emanate from their own free will.’ This was the only way to make international law. At least, ‘[r]estrictions upon the independence of States cannot therefore be presumed’. Accordingly, this statement referred back to the Eastern Carelia Opinion, according to which ‘the principle of independence of States’ is ‘a fundamental principle of international law’.

Sovereignty and the Permanent Court

It was in decisions other than The Lotus that the Permanent Court explored notions of sovereignty, not always entirely successfully, beginning with The Wimbledon. Pleadings on the part of the German government were taken to imply that the matter concerned ‘a personal and imprescriptible right, which forms an essential part of her sovereignty and which she neither could nor intended to renounce by anticipation’. The Permanent Court responded eagerly:

The Court declines to see in the conclusion of any Treaty by which a State undertakes to perform or refrain from performing a particular act an abandonment of its sovereignty. No doubt any convention creating an obligation of this kind places a restriction upon the exercise of the sovereign rights of the State, in the sense that it requires them to be exercised in a certain way. But the right of entering into international engagements is an attribute of State sovereignty.13

The Permanent Court agreed to proceed on the basis of sovereignty, upon which, it said, ‘an obligation of this kind places a restriction’. But, invoking the international/national divide, the counter-argument simply transferred sovereignty from the national to the international sphere: ‘the right of entering into international engagements is an attribute of State sovereignty’. This playing with words has amused scholars ever since, and it has attracted much less criticism than The Lotus, albeit it would have been much more straightforward had the Permanent Court simply stated that treaty obligations are binding as a matter of international law.

In The Wimbledon, as in a number of other decisions, the Permanent Court alluded to a principle of restrictive interpretation. According to the majority:

the fact remains that Germany has to submit to an important limitation of the exercise of the sovereign rights which no one disputes that she possesses over the Kiel Canal. This fact constitutes a sufficient reason for the restrictive interpretation, in case of doubt, of the clause which produces such a limitation. But the Court feels obliged to stop at the point where the so-called restrictive interpretation would be contrary to the plain terms of the article and would destroy what has been clearly granted.14

In the context of the motifs, this was an empty gesture, as the Permanent Court had already held that the text of the treaty provision in question was ‘clear’. Yet it was again a less than ideal way in which to overcome sovereignty. As Crawford has noted:

These days that concession would not be made: the language of treaties is not subject to any particular presumption but will be read so as to give effect to the object and purpose of the treaty in its context.15

The international/national divide and the Permanent Court

The international/national divide played into decisions of the Permanent Court other than The Wimbledon in various ways, but none is more thought-provoking than the treatment given to non-State actors. The Jurisdiction of Courts of Danzig Opinion went down in history. The Polish government contended that an international agreement (between two states or State-like entities) could not create rights and obligations for individuals. The Permanent Court’s response was memorable, at least to a degree:

It may be readily admitted that, according to a well established principle of international law, the Beamtenabkommen, being an international agreement, cannot, as such, create direct rights and obligations for private individuals. But it cannot be disputed that the very object of an international agreement, according to the intention of the contracting Parties, may be the adoption by the Parties of some definite rules creating individual rights and obligations and enforceable by the national courts.16

According to Dionisio Anzilotti, the Permanent Court’s opinion:

ne dit pas qu’un traité, comme tel, peut créer des droits et des obligations pour des individus, sans besoin que les règles y afférentes soient incorporées dans le droit interne: il dit seulement que l’intention des Parties contractantes peut être celle d’adopter des règles déterminées créant des droits et des obligations pour des individus et susceptibles d’être appliquées par les tribunaux nationaux.17

That being said, Anzilotti pointed to an argument that had been put at the end of the motifs:

Poland would contend that the Danzig Courts could not apply the provisions of the Beamtenabkommen because they were not duly inserted in the Polish national law, the Court would have to observe that, at any rate, Poland could not avail herself of an objection which, according to the construction placed upon the Beamtenabkommen by the Court, would amount to relying upon the non-fulfilment of an obligation imposed upon her by an international engagement.18

Here then, the Permanent Court found comfort in treaty obligations simply being binding as a matter of international law, rather than sovereignty.

Many years later, in the judgment from 2001 in the LaGrand case, the International Court confirmed rather unobtrusively that a treaty may create individual rights.19 International law is no longer a law of exclusion. Nevertheless, relatively few international lawyers have been willing unhesitatingly to characterise individuals as international legal subjects or persons.

In The Creation of States in International Law, having emphasised the position of individuals as holders of international rights and obligations, Crawford adds: ‘But it remains true that these forums are created and ultimately controlled by States or by intergovernmental organizations, and it is these entities that remain the gatekeepers and legislators of the international system.’20 In a footnote, Crawford states explicitly that individuals are not ‘in any meaningful sense “international legal persons”’, the reason being that ‘[a]s holders of rights and even obligations they do not cease to be subject to the State of their nationality, residence or incorporation, as the case may be’.21 This may be mainly a question of terminology, as suggested by Crawford’s characterisation of international law as an open system. In his words, ‘[i]t may be that the system is so open in this respect that the former threshold concept [of legal personality] has ceased to have much significance’.22

1 James Crawford, International Law as an Open System (London: Cameron May, 2002), 17.

2 Ibid., 37.

3 James Crawford, The Creation of States in International Law, 2nd edn (Oxford University Press, 2006), 40–1.

4 Ibid., 41.

5 Ibid., 41–2.

6 Status of Eastern Carelia (USSR v. Finland), Advisory Opinion, 23 July 1923, PCIJ Series B, No. 5 (1923), 27.

7 Nationality Decrees Issued in Tunis and Morocco (French Zone), Advisory Opinion, 7 February 1923, PCIJ Series B, No. 4 (1923), 25.

8 Ibid., 24.

9 SS Lotus (France v. Turkey), Judgment, 7 September 1927, PCIJ Series A, No. 10 (1927), 18.

10 Legality of the Threat of Using Nuclear Weapons, Advisory Opinion, 8 July 1996, ICJ Reports (1996), 226, para. 21.

11 Max Weber, ‘Observations de M. Huber’, Annuaire de l’institut de droit international, 36-I (1931), 79.

12 Michel de la Grotte, ‘Les Affaires traitées par la Cour Permanente de Justice Internationale pendant la période 1926–1928’, Revue de droit international et de législation comparée, 10 (1929), 387.

13 SS Wimbledon (United Kingdom v. Germany), Judgment, 17 August 1923, PCIJ Series A, No. 1 (1923), 25.

14 Ibid., 24–5.

15 James Crawford, ‘Sovereignty as a Legal Value’ in James Crawford and Martti Koskenniemi (eds.), The Cambridge Companion to International Law (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 117, para. 123.

16 Jurisdiction of Courts of Danzig, Advisory Opinion, 3 March 1928, PCIJ Series B, No. 15 (1928), 17–18.

17 Dionisio Anzilotti, Cours de droit international (1929), 407–8. [Translation: ‘The Court’s opinion does not say that a treaty can, in itself, create rights and obligations for individuals, obviating the need to incorporate the rules pertaining to it into internal law: it only says that the contracting parties might resolve to adopt specific rules which create rights and obligations for individual and can be applied by national tribunals.’]

18 Jurisdiction of Courts of Danzig, 26–7.

19 LaGrand case (Germany v. United States of America), Judgment, 27 June 2001, ICJ Reports (2001), 466, para. 77.

20 Crawford, The Creation of States in International Law, 29.

21 Ibid., 30, note 132.

22 Crawford, International Law as an Open System, 21.

Footnotes

* We thank Simon Stern for his valuable suggestions on the subject of cliché and the Global Law Students Association, Melbourne Law School for the opportunity to discuss a draft of this chapter.

1 Martin Amis, The War against Cliché (London: Vintage, 2002), xv.

2 See e.g. Eric Partridge, A Dictionary of Clichés, 5th edn (London: Routledge, 1978); James Rogers, The Dictionary of Clichés (New York: Ballantine, 1991); and Lucy Fisher, Clichés: A Dictionary of Received Ideas (Kindle, 2012).

3 Partridge, A Dictionary of Clichés, 2.

4 On this, see Elizabeth Barry, Beckett and Authority: The Uses of Cliché (Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan, 2006), 3.

5 Walter Redfern, Clichés and Coinages (Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1989), 16.

6 Hannah Arendt, Eichmann in Jerusalem (London: Penguin, 1994 [1963]), 49. See further Jakob Norberg, ‘The Political Theory of Cliché: Hannah Arendt Reading Adolf Eichmann’, Cultural Critique, 76 (2010), 74.

7 Gillian Beer, ‘The Making of a Cliché: “No Man is an Island”’, European Journal of English Studies, 1 (1997), 33.

9 Redfern, Clichés and Coinages, 8.

10 Norberg, ‘The Political Theory of Cliché’, 81.

11 The Oxford English Dictionary refers to cliché in its literal sense as the French name for what in English is simply called a cast or, in a more technical idiom, a ‘dab’.

12 Barry, Beckett and Authority, 11 et seq.

13 Ibid., 16.

14 Gustave Flaubert, Bouvard and Pécuchet, with Dictionary of Received Ideas, tr. A. Krailsheimer (London: Penguin, 1976).

15 Ibid., 324, 328.

16 George Orwell, ‘Politics and the English Language’, reprinted in Why I Write (London: Penguin, 2004), 102.

18 Ibid., 112, 106.

19 Ibid., 114.

20 Ibid., 119.

21 We join here a wider literature on law as rhetoric and the roles of imagery in law, including international law. What distinguishes clichés is that they involve failed metaphors, whereas the legal literature tends to focus on successful imagery.

22 Ruth Amossy and Elisheva Rosen, Le Discours du cliché (Paris: Société d’édition d’enseignement supérieur, 1982), 9.

24 Partridge, A Dictionary of Clichés, 9.

25 Hephzibah Anderson, ‘In Praise of the Cliché’, Prospect, 14 November 2012.

26 Redfern, Clichés and Coinages, 3.

27 Amossy and Rosen, Le Discours du cliché, 9.

28 On the distinction between cliché and idiom, see further Barry, Beckett and Authority, 4.

29 Oscar Schachter, ‘The Invisible College of International Lawyers’, Northwestern University Law Review, 72 (1977–8), 217.

30 Thomas Franck, The Power of Legitimacy among Nations (New York: Oxford University Press, 1990), 16.

31 R (Abassi) v. Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs [2002] EWCA Civ 1598, para. 64; Johan Steyn, ‘Guantanamo Bay: The Legal Black Hole’, International and Comparative Law Quarterly, 53 (2004), 1.

32 David Kennedy, The Dark Sides of Virtue: Reassessing International Humanitarianism (Princeton University Press, 2004).

33 Louis Henkin, How Nations Behave: Law and Foreign Policy, 2nd edn (New York: Council on Foreign Relations, 1979), 47 (emphasis omitted).

34 Western Sahara, Advisory Opinion, 16 October 1975, ICJ Reports (1975), 12, 116.

35 Robert Musil, ‘Monuments’ in Posthumous Papers of a Living Author, tr. Peter Wortsman (London: Penguin, 1993), 61.

36 Orwell, ‘Politics and the English Language’, 116.

37 Christopher Ricks, ‘Clichés’ in Leonard Michaels and Christopher Ricks (eds.), The State of the Language (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1980), 54.

38 Ibid., 55.

39 Orwell, ‘Politics and the English Language’, 120.

40 Ricks, ‘Clichés’, 55.

41 Ibid., 55–6.

42 Ibid., 56.

43 Ibid., 55.

44 Ibid., 57.

45 Orwell, ‘Politics and the English Language’, 117.

46 Ricks, ‘Clichés’, 58.

47 Redfern, Clichés and Coinages, 7.

48 Ibid., 5.

49 George Lakoff and Mark Johnson, Metaphors We Live By (University of Chicago Press, 1980), 55.

50 See esp. Barry, Beckett and Authority, 3. On the idea that metaphors may be ‘not dead but sleeping’, see William Empson, Seven Types of Ambiguity (London: Hogarth Press, 1991), 25.

51 Chaim Perelman and Lucie Olbrechts-Tyteca, The New Rhetoric: A Treatise on Argumentation, tr. John Wilkinson and Purcell Weaver (London: Notre Dame Press, 1969), 405et seq.

52 Ibid., 405.

53 The bracketed terms are our own.

54 As Ricks, among others, observes. See Ricks, ‘Clichés’, 58.

55 Marshall McLuhan with Wilfred Watson, From Cliché to Archetype (New York: Viking Press, 1970), 54 (quoted by Ricks, ‘Clichés’, 59).

56 Samuel Beckett, The Complete Dramatic Works (London: Faber and Faber, 1986), 135, 144, 146–7.

57 H. Porter Abbott, ‘The Art of Making it New, Revisited: Beckett and Cliché’, Poetics Today, 29 (2008), 596.

58 Schachter, ‘The Invisible College of International Lawyers’, 217.

60 Ibid., 226.

61 Ibid., 222.

62 David Bederman and Lucy Reed, ‘The Visible College of International Law: An Introduction’, American Society of International Law Proceedings, 95 (2001), ix.

64 Samuel Beckett, Waiting for Godot, 2nd edn (London: Faber and Faber, 1965), 18. See Barry, Beckett and Authority, 206. For an account of this passage as an illustration of the strategy of literalisation, see Abbott, ‘The Art of Making it New, Revisited’, 596–7.

66 Hilary Charlesworth, ‘Transforming the United Men’s Club: Feminist Futures for the United Nations’, Transnational Law and Contemporary Problems, 4 (1994), 421.

67 Mieke Clincy, ‘An Interview with Oscar Schachter’, American Society of International Law Proceedings, 95 (2001), 18.

68 Louis Henkin, ‘The Mythology of Sovereignty’, Canadian Council on International Law Proceedings, 21 (1992), 16. See also Louis Henkin, ‘That “S” Word: Sovereignty, and Globalization, and Human Rights, Et Cetera’, Fordham Law Review, 68 (1999), 1.

69 Ibid., 16.

70 David Kennedy, ‘Some Reflections on “The Role of Sovereignty in the New International Order”’, Canadian Council on International Law Proceedings, 21 (1992), 245.

71 Ibid., 244.

72 Ibid., 238.

73 Ibid., 239.

74 R (Abassi) v. Secretary of State for Foreign and Commonwealth Affairs, para. 64.

75 Steyn, ‘Guantanamo Bay’, 1.

76 Fleur Johns, ‘Guantánamo Bay and the Annihilation of the Exception’, European Journal of International Law, 16 (2005), 613. See also Fleur Johns, Non-Legality in International Law (Cambridge University Press, 2012), ch. 3.

77 Ibid., 618.

80 Partha Chatterjee, The Black Hole of Empire (Princeton University Press, 2012), xi, 1.

81 For a play on the clichéd meaning, see David Dyzenhaus, ‘Schmitt v. Dicey: Are States of Emergency Inside or Outside the Legal Order’, Cardozo Law Review, 27 (2006), 2018 (‘grey holes’).

82 Sundhya Pahuja, Decolonising International Law (Cambridge University Press, 2011).

83 Barry, Beckett and Authority, 5.

84 See Ricks, ‘Clichés’, 58.

86 Redfern, Clichés and Coinages, 256.

1 Tony Blair, ‘The Global Threat of Terrorism’, speech, Sedgefield, 5 March 2004, BBC News, full text available at http://news.bbc.co.uk/2/hi/3536131.stm.

2 On norm entrepreneurs, see Martha Finnemore and Kathryn Sikkink, ‘International Norm Dynamics and Political Change’, International Organization, 52 (1998), 887; Margaret Keck and Kathryn Sikkink, Activists Beyond Borders: Advocacy Networks in International Politics (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1998); Ian Johnstone, ‘The Secretary-General as Norm Entrepreneur’ in Simon Chesterman (ed.), Secretary or General?: The UN Secretary-General in World Politics (Cambridge University Press, 2007), 123.

3 The broader aspects of R2P are well-documented elsewhere. See e.g. Gareth Evans, The Responsibility to Protect: Ending Mass Atrocity Crimes Once and For All (Washington, DC: Brookings Institution, 2008); Ramesh Thakur, The Responsibility to Protect: Norms, Laws, and the Use of Force in International Politics (London: Routledge, 2011).

4 Art. 2(4), UN Charter (San Francisco, adopted 26 June 1945, entered into force 24 October 1945), 1 UNTS XVI.

5 Art. 31, Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties (Vienna, adopted 22 May 1969, entered into force 27 January 1980), 1155 UNTS 331. The Vienna Convention codified the customary international law of treaty interpretation, as to which see Lord McNair, The Law of Treaties (Oxford University Press, 1961), 366–82.

6 UN Charter.

7 SC Res. 221, 9 April 1966.

8 SC Res. 733, 23 January 1992.

9 SC Res. 755, 28 August 1992.

10 SC Res. 794, 3 December 1992.

11 SC Res. 743, 21 February 1992.

12 SC Res. 819, 16 April 1993.

13 SC Res. 836, 4 June 1993.

14 Central Intelligence Agency, ‘National Intelligence Daily’, 23 April 2004, available at www.gwu.edu/~nsarchiv/NSAEBB/NSAEBB117/Rw34.pdf.

15 Linda Melvern, A People Betrayed: The Role of the West in Rwanda’s Genocide (London: Zed Books, 2000), 180.

16 See Sir Jeremy Greenstock, UK Permanent Representative to the UN, statement to the Security Council on 24 March 1999, UN Doc. S/PV.3988, 11–12, reproduced in British Yearbook of International Law, 70 (1999), 580–1. See also ‘Fourth Report of the House of Commons Foreign Affairs Committee’, (2000) HC-28-I, which points out that the UK government justified humanitarian intervention only ‘as an exceptional measure in support of purposes laid down by the UN Security Council…where that is the only means to avert an immediate and overwhelming humanitarian catastrophe’.

17 See e.g. ‘In the President’s Words: “We Act to Prevent a Wider War”’, New York Times, 25 March 1999, A15. After the war, Secretary of State Madeleine Albright stressed that Kosovo was ‘a unique situation sui generis in the region of the Balkans’ and that it was important ‘not to overdraw the various lessons that come out of it’. Press conference with Russian Foreign Minister Igor Ivanov, Singapore, 26 July 1999, cited in vol. II of the ICISS report, ‘The Responsibility to Protect’ (Ottawa: International Development Research Centre, 2002), 128.

18 Foreign Minister Klaus Kinkel said: ‘With their decision, NATO states did not intend to create any new legal instrument that could ground a general power of authority of NATO for intervention. The NATO decision must not be allowed to become a precedent. We must not enter onto a slippery slope with respect to the Security Council’s monopoly on the use of force.’ Deutscher Bundestag, Plenarprotokoll 13/248, 16 October 1998, 23129 (author’s translation). German original available at http://dip21.bundestag.de/dip21/btp/13/13248.asc.

19 Kofi Annan, ‘No Government Has the Right to Hide Behind National Sovereignty in Order to Violate Human Rights’, The Guardian, 7 April 1999, available at www.guardian.co.uk/world/1999/apr/07/balkans.unitednations.

20 Foreign Secretary Robin Cook, ‘Speech to the American Bar Association, 19 July 2000’, British Yearbook of International Law, 71 (2000), 646.

21 See Ministerial Declaration, 23rd Annual Meeting of the Ministers for Foreign Affairs of the Group of 77, 24 September 1999, para. 69, available at www.g77.org/doc/Decl1999.html; Declaration of the Group of 77 South Summit, Havana, Cuba, 10–14 April 2000, para. 54, available at www.g77.org/doc/docs/summitfinaldocs_english.pdf.

22 Kofi Annan, ‘Preventing War and Disaster’ (United Nations: Annual report on the work of the Organization, 1999), 8, para. 66, UN Doc. A/54/1.

23 ICISS, ‘The Responsibility to Protect’, I, vii.

24 Ibid., 16, para. 2.27.

25 Ibid., 54–5, para. 6.36. On ‘Uniting for Peace’ see UNGA Res. A-RES-377(V) (3 November 1950); and Dominik Zaum, ‘The Security Council, the General Assembly and War: The Uniting for Peace Resolution’ in Vaughan Loweet al. (eds.), The United Nations Security Council and War: The Evolution of Thought and Practice since 1945 (Oxford University Press, 2008), 154.

26 Constitutive Act of the African Union, 11 July 2002, OAU Doc. CAB/LEG/23.15.

27 Dan Kuwali, ‘The End of Humanitarian Intervention: Evaluation of the African Union’s Right of Intervention’, African Journal on Conflict Resolution, 9 (2009), 48.

28 In 2003, the adoption of a ‘Protocol Relating to the Establishment of the Peace and Security Council of the African Union’ provided an implementing mechanism for decisions to intervene taken by the Assembly. Available at: www.africa-union.org/root/au/organs/psc/Protocol_peace%20and%20security.pdf.

29 Art. 17(1) of the Protocol (ibid.) reads: ‘In the fulfillment of its mandate in the promotion and maintenance of peace, security and stability in Africa, the Peace and Security Council shall cooperate and work closely with the United Nations Security Council, which has the primary responsibility for the maintenance of international peace and security.’ Nothing in the words ‘cooperate and work closely with’ or ‘primary responsibility’ implies a relationship of legal dependence.

30 Paul D. Williams, ‘The African Union’s Conflict Management Capabilities’, Council on Foreign Relations, October 2011, 5, available at www.cfr.org/content/publications/attachments/IIGG_WorkingPaper7.pdf.

31 See similarly Kuwali, ‘The End of Humanitarian Intervention’, 45–6.

32 Blair, ‘The Global Threat of Terrorism’ (emphasis added).

34 Russian Foreign Minister Sergey Lavrov likewise invoked the term ‘responsibility to protect’ to justify the invasion of Georgia in 2008, but it is clear that he was referring to a principle in Russian domestic law concerning the duty of the Russian government to protect its citizens. See ‘Interview by Minister of Foreign Affairs of the Russian Federation Sergey Lavrov to BBC’, Moscow, 9 August 2008, available at www.un.int/russia/new/MainRoot/docs/off_news/090808/newen2.htm.

35 ‘Address by Prime Minister Paul Martin at the United Nations’, 21 September 2004, available at http://news.gc.ca/web/article.

36 ‘A More Secure World: Our Shared Responsibility’, Report of the High-level Panel on Threats, Challenges and Change, 2 December 2004, UN Doc. A/59/565, 57, para. 202.

37 Ibid., 56–7, para. 201.

38 Ibid., 57, para. 203.

39 Ibid., 57–8, para. 207.

40 Ibid., 58, para. 208.

41 ‘In Larger Freedom: Towards Development, Security and Human Rights for All’, Report of the Secretary-General, 21 March 2005, UN Doc. A/59/2005, paras. 132 and 135.

42 ‘World Summit Outcome Document’, 15 September 2005, paras. 138 and 139, available at www.un.org/summit2005/documents.html.

43 That said, Carsten Stahn has argued that ‘states did not categorically reject the option of (individual or collective) unilateral action in the Outcome Document. This discrepancy leaves some leeway to argue that the concept of responsibility to protect is not meant to rule out such action in the future.’ Carsten Stahn, ‘Responsibility to Protect: Political Rhetoric or Emerging Legal Norm?’, American Journal of International Law, 101 (2007), 120. However, as a general principle of interpretation, a text’s silence on any particular issue does not imply a gap.

44 SC Res. 1674, 28 April 2006.

45 See Application of the Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide (Bosnia and Herzegovina v. Serbia and Montenegro), Order of 13 September 1993, 440, para. 100 (Separate Opinion of Judge ad hoc Elihu Lauterpacht). In the Tadić case, the International Criminal Tribunal for the Former Yugoslavia wrote: ‘the determination that there exists such a threat [to the peace] is not a totally unfettered discretion, as it has to remain, at the very least, within the limits of the Purposes and Principles of the Charter’. However, the tribunal went on to note that ‘the practice of the Security Council is rich with cases of civil war or internal strife which it classified as a “threat to the peace” and dealt with under Chapter VII, with the encouragement or even at the behest of the General Assembly’. Prosecutor v. Duško Tadić (Decision on the Defence Motion for Interlocutory Appeal on Jurisdiction), Case No. IT-94–1, ICTY Appeals Chamber, Judgment, 2 October 1995.

46 See discussion, n. 39.

47 ‘World Summit Outcome Document’.

48 In para. 12 of Resolution 1706, adopted on 31 August 2006, the Security Council, ‘Acting under Chapter VII of the Charter of the United Nations: (a) Decides that UNMIS is authorized to use all necessary means, in the areas of deployment of its forces and as it deems within its capabilities…to protect civilians under threat of physical violence …’

50 See e.g. ‘UN Force for Darfur Takes Shape’, New York Times, 1 August 2007, available at www.nytimes.com/2007/08/01/world/africa/01iht-darfur.4.6942617.html?_r=0.

51 In one TV broadcast, Gaddafi told the residents of Benghazi to lay down their arms; otherwise, he warned, his troops would come that night and ‘find you in your closets; we will have no mercy and no pity’. Dan Bilefsky and Mark Landler, ‘As U.N. Backs Military Action in Libya, U.S. Role Is Unclear’, New York Times, 17 March 2011, available at www.nytimes.com/2011/03/18/world/africa/18nations.html.

52 SC Res. 1973, 17 March 2011.

53 Of course, all military actions remain subject to the rules of international humanitarian law, including those set out in the 1949 Geneva Conventions and 1977 Additional Protocols.

54 Art. 42, Hague Regulations concerning the Laws and Customs of War on Land, as annexed to the 1907 Convention (IV) respecting the Laws and Customs of War on Land (The Hague, adopted 18 October 1907, entered into force 26 January 2010), 205 CTS 277.

55 Similar references appear in the preambles of SC Res. 1975, 30 March 2011 (Côte d’Ivoire), SC Res. 1996, 8 July 2011 (South Sudan) and SC Res. 2014, 21 October 2011 (Yemen).

56 That human rights were the principal motivating factor behind Resolution 1973 is supported by the fact that, at the time of the intervention, the Libyan regime posed no threat to other countries. Gaddafi forswore his nuclear and chemical weapons programmes in 2003 and was removed from the US list of state sponsors of terror in 2006.

57 See e.g. Gareth Evans, Ramesh Thakur and Robert A. Pape, ‘Humanitarian Intervention and the Responsibility to Protect (R2P)’, International Security, 37 (2013), 206 (‘[T]he R2P consensus underpinning Resolution 1973 fell apart over the course of 2011, damaged by gaps in expectation, communication, and accountability between those who mandated the operation and those who executed it.’); Spencer Zifcak, ‘The Responsibility to Protect after Libya and Syria’, Melbourne Journal of International Law, 13 (2012), 1; Noele Crossley, ‘The Responsibility to Protect in 2012: R2P Fails in Syria, Brazil’s “RWP” Emerges’, Global Policy Journal blog, 28 December 2012, available at www.globalpolicyjournal.com/blog/28/12/2012/.

58 UN SCOR, 66th Session, 6627th Meeting, UN Doc. S/PV.6627 (4 October 2011), 4.

59 As Hugh Roberts writes, ‘Those who subsequently said that they did not know that regime change had been authorised either did not understand the logic of events or were pretending to misunderstand in order to excuse their failure to oppose it.’ Hugh Roberts, ‘Who Said Gaddafi Had to Go?’, 33, London Review of Books, 17 November 2011.

60 Michael Byers, ‘Agreeing to Disagree: Security Council Resolution 1441 and Intentional Ambiguity’, Global Governance, 10 (2004), 165.

61 ‘The League and Syria’ in ‘Times Topics: Arab League’, New York Times website, available at http://topics.nytimes.com/topics/reference/timestopics/organizations/a/arab_league/index.html.

62 Julian Borger, ‘Russian Military Presence in Syria Poses Challenge to US-led Intervention’, The Guardian, 23 December 2012, available at www.guardian.co.uk/world/2012/dec/23/syria-crisis-russian-military-presence.

63 ‘Chemical Weapon Use by Syrian Regime – UK Government Legal Position’, 29 August 2013, available at www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/235098/.

64 Foreign Secretary Robin Cook, ‘Speech to the American Bar Association, 19 July 2000’.

65 Andrew Grice, ‘David Cameron’s Plans for Military Action in Syria Shot Down in Dramatic Commons Vote’, The Independent, 30 August 2013, available at www.independent.co.uk/news/uk/politics/david-camerons-plans-for-military-action-in-syria-shot-down-in-dramatic-commons-vote-8788612.html.

66 Secretary of State John Kerry, ‘Statement on Syria’, 30 August 2013, available at www.state.gov/secretary/remarks/2013/08/213668.htm.

67 ‘21st Ambassadors’ Conference – Speech by François Hollande’, 27 August 2013, available at www.diplomatie.gouv.fr/en/the-ministry-158/events-5815/article/21st-ambassadors-conference-speech.

69 See, perhaps most problematically, Lee Feinstein and Anne-Marie Slaughter, ‘A Duty to Prevent’, Foreign Affairs, 83 (2004), 136.

70 See Michael Byers and Simon Chesterman, ‘Changing the Rules about Rules? Unilateral Humanitarian Intervention and the Future of International Law’ in J. L. Holzgrefe and Robert O. Keohane (eds.), Humanitarian Intervention: Ethical, Legal and Political Dilemmas (Cambridge University Press, 2003), 183–4.

71 Gareth Evans, ‘Russia and the ‘Responsibility to Protect’, Los Angeles Times, 31 August 2008, available at http://www.latimes.com/la-oe-evans31-2008aug31-story.html.

72 As the International Court of Justice explained in the Nicaragua case, it is sometimes necessary ‘to distinguish the most grave forms of the use of force (those constituting an armed attack) from other less grave forms’. Military and Paramilitary Activities in and against Nicaragua (Nicaragua v. US), Judgment, 27 June 1986, ICJ Reports (1986), 101, para. 191.

73 See Ian Brownlie, International Law and the Use of Force by States (Oxford University Press, 1963), 70–1. The only possible and controversial exception to this ban has concerned the provision of support to groups engaged in wars of ‘national liberation’. For example, in 1981 the UN General Assembly appealed ‘to all States to provide all necessary humanitarian, educational, financial and other necessary assistance to the oppressed people of South Africa and their national liberation movement in their legitimate struggle’. GA Res. 36/172 (1981), para. 16.

74 Declaration on Principles of International Law concerning Friendly Relations and Co-operation Among States in Accordance with the Charter of the United Nations, GA Res. 2625 (XXV) (1970).

75 See Anthony D’Amato, The Concept of Custom in International Law (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1971), 469, where the author writes, with respect to the widespread use of torture by states, that the ‘objective evidence shows hiding, cover-up, minimization, and non-justification – all the things that betoken a violation of the law’.

76 Nicaragua case.

77 Ibid., 108, para. 206.

78 Ibid., 108–9, para. 206.

79 See Joanna Spear, ‘Arms Limitations, Confidence-building Measures, and Internal Conflict’ in Michael Edward Brown (ed.), The International Dimensions of Internal Conflict (Cambridge, MA: Center for Science and International Affairs, 1996), 383.

80 See Frederic Mégret, ‘Beyond the “Salvation” Paradigm: Responsibility to Protect (Others) vs the Power of Protecting Oneself’, Security Dialogue, 40 (2009), 575.

81 Daniel D. Polsby and Don B. Kates, ‘Of Holocausts and Gun Control’, Washington University Law Quarterly, 75 (1997), 1237.

82 Kenneth D. Heath, ‘Could We Have Armed the Kosovo Liberation Army: The New Norms Governing Intervention in Civil War’, UCLA Journal of International Law and Foreign Affairs, 4 (1999–2000), 259.

83 James Risen and Doyle McManus, ‘U.S. OKd Iranian Arms for Bosnia, Officials Say’, Los Angeles Times, 5 April 1996, available at http://articles.latimes.com/1996-04-05/news/mn-55275_1_iranian-arms-shipments.

84 James Risen, ‘Administration Defends its OK of Bosnia Arms’, Los Angeles Times, 6 April 1996, available at http://articles.latimes.com/1996-04-06/news/mn-55492_1_arms-embargo.

85 Rupert Cornwell, ‘US “Secretly Agreed Iran Arms for Bosnia”’, The Independent, 6 April 1996, available at www.independent.co.uk/news/world/us-secretly-agreed-iran-arms-for-bosnia-1303474.html.

86 SC Res. 1970, 26 February 2011.

87 SC Res. 1973, para. 4 (emphasis added).

88 ‘Switzerland Halts Arms Exports to UAE, as Report says Swiss Arms Used by Syria Rebels’, Haaretz and Reuters, 5 July 2012, available at www.haaretz.com/news/middle-east/switzerland-halts-arms-exports-to-u-a-e-as-report-says-swiss-arms-used-by-syria-rebels-1.449022.

89 Mark Hosenball, ‘Exclusive: Obama Authorizes Secret U.S. Support for Syrian Rebels’, Reuters, 1 August 2012, available at www.reuters.com/article/2012/08/01/us-usa-syria-obama-order-idUSBRE8701OK20120801.

90 ‘France Gives Non-lethal Military Aid to Syrian Opposition: PM’, Al Arabiya News, 22 August 2012, available at: http://english.alarabiya.net/articles/2012/08/22/233570.html.

91 ‘Syria Conflict: UK to Give Extra £5m to Opposition Groups’, BBC News, 10 August 2012, available at www.bbc.co.uk/news/uk-19205204.

92 ‘Hague: “Options Open” on Military Support for Syrian Rebels’, BBC News, 10 January 2013, available at www.bbc.co.uk/news/uk-politics-20969386.

94 Arms Trade Treaty (New York, adopted 2 April 2013, not yet in force).

95 On the role of treaties as state practice, see Richard Baxter, ‘Treaties and Custom’, Recueil des Cours, 129 (1970-I), 25; D’Amato, The Concept of Custom in International Law, 89–90 and 160; Mark Villiger, Customary International Law and Treaties (Dordrecht: Martinus Nijhoff, 1985).

96 Eric Schmitt, ‘C.I.A. Said to Aid in Steering Arms to Syrian Opposition’, New York Times, 21 June 2012, available at www.nytimes.com/2012/06/21/world/middleeast/cia-said-to-aid-in-steering-arms-to-syrian-rebels.html.

97 Ian Black, ‘Arm Syrian Rebels to Contain Jihadis, says Saudi Royal’, The Guardian, 25 January 2013, available at www.guardian.co.uk/world/2013/jan/25/arm-syrian-rebels-jihadis-saudi.

98 Mark Mazzetti, Michael R. Gordon and Mark Landler, ‘U.S. Is Said to Plan to Send Weapons to Syrian Rebels’, New York Times, 13 June 2013, available at www.nytimes.com/2013/06/14/world/middleeast/syria-chemical-weapons.html.

99 John B. Bellinger III, ‘U.N. Rules and Syrian Intervention’, Washington Post, 17 January 2013, available at http://articles.washingtonpost.com/2013–01–17/opinions/36410395_1_syrian-opposition-assad-regime-intervention.

100 Corfu Channel (United Kingdom v. Albania), Judgment, 9 April 1949, ICJ Reports (1949), 4, 36.

101 SC Res. 138, 23 June 1960.

102 Ibid.

103 Byers and Chesterman, ‘Changing the Rules about Rules?’, 200–1.

104 See discussion, nn. 445.

105 See discussion, nn. 423.

106 See discussion, nn. 369.

107 See SC Res. 788 and 866, 19 November 1992 and 22 September 1993 (Liberia) and 1181, 13 July 1998 (Sierra Leone).

108 James Crawford, The International Law Commission’s Articles on State Responsibility: Introduction, Text and Commentaries (Cambridge University Press, 2002).

109 See discussion, nn. 758.

110 See e.g. the International Coalition for the Responsibility to Protect, a coalition of forty-nine NGOs which includes the following ‘essential element’ in its ‘common understanding’ of R2P: ‘when a state “manifestly fails” in its protection responsibilities, and peaceful means are inadequate, the international community must take stronger measures including Chapter VII measures under the UN Charter, including but not limited to the collective use of force authorized by the Security Council’. Available at www.responsibilitytoprotect.org/index.php/about-coalition/our-understanding-of-rtop (emphasis added).

* The work on this piece was funded by the Leverhulme Trust and the European Research Council. It reproduces, with permission, some parts of a longer article, ‘Human Rights beyond Borders at the World Court: The Significance of the International Court of Justice’s Jurisprudence on the Extraterritorial Application of International Human Rights Law Treaties’, Chinese Journal of International Law, 12(4) (2013), 639–77, open access at http://chinesejil.oxfordjournals.org/cgi/content/full/jmt039?ijkey=4g2d5iTs7GmwWHX&keytype=ref.

1 Legal Consequences of the Construction of a Wall in the Occupied Palestinian Territories, Advisory Opinion, 9 July 2004, ICJ Reports (2004), 136 (Wall Advisory Opinion); Case concerning Armed Activities on the Territory of the Congo (Democratic Republic of the Congo v. Uganda), Judgment, 19 December 2005, ICJ Reports (2005) (DRC v. Uganda); Application of the International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination (Georgia v. Russian Federation), Order Indicating Provisional Measures, 15 October 2008 (Georgia v. Russia Provisional Measures).

2 Legal Consequences for States of the Continued Presence of South Africa in Namibia (South West Africa) Notwithstanding Security Council Resolution 276 (1970), Advisory Opinion, ICJ Reports (1971), 16 (Namibia Advisory Opinion).

3 See the following, and the sources cited therein: Gentian Zyberi, The Humanitarian Face of the International Court of Justice: Its Contribution in Interpreting and Developing International Human Rights and Humanitarian Law and Rules (Antwerp: Intersentia, 2008); Sandesh Sivakumaran, ‘The International Court of Justice and Human Rights’ in Sarah Joseph and Adam McBeth (eds.), Research Handbook on International Human Rights Law (Cheltenham: Edward Elgar, 2010), 299–325; Bruno Simma, ‘Mainstream Human Rights: The Contribution of the International Court of Justice’, Journal of International Dispute Settlement, 3 (2012), 7–29. For the human rights instruments whose provisions will be addressed in the present piece, see American Declaration of the Rights and Duties of Man, 1948, OAS Res. XXX (1948) (American Declaration) [not a treaty]; European Convention for the Protection of Human Rights and Fundamental Freedoms (Rome, adopted 4 November 1950, entered into force 3 September 1953), 213 UNTS 221 (ECHR); International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights (New York, adopted 16 December 1966, entered into force 23 March 1976), 993 UNTS 3 (ICESCR); International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (New York, adopted 16 December 1966, entered into force 23 March 1976), 999 UNTS 171 (ICCPR); American Convention on Human Rights, 1969, 1144 UNTS 123 (ACHR); International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Racial Discrimination (New York, adopted 7 March 1966, entered into force 4 January 1969), 660 UNTS 195 (ICERD or CERD); International Convention on the Elimination of All Forms of Discrimination Against Women (New York, adopted 18 December 1979, entered into force 3 September 1981), 1249 UNTS 13 (CEDAW); African Charter on Human and Peoples’ Rights (OAU Doc. CAB/LEG/67/3 rev. 5, Nairobi, adopted 27 June 1981, entered into force 21 October 1986) (ACHPR); Convention on the Rights of the Child (New York, adopted 20 November 1989, 2 September 1990), 1577 UNTS 3 (CRC); Optional Protocol to the Convention on the Rights of the Child on the Involvement of Children in Armed Conflict of 2000 (CRC Optional Protocol) (New York, adopted 25 May 2000, entered into force 12 February 2002), 2173 UNTS 222; Convention Against Torture and Other Cruel, Inhuman or Degrading Treatment or Punishment (New York, adopted 10 December 1984, entered into force 26 June 1987), 1465 UNTS 85 (CAT).

4 See the following, and the sources cited therein: Fons Coomans and Menno Kamminga (eds.), Extraterritorial Application of Human Rights Treaties (Antwerp and Oxford: Intersentia, 2004); Michael J. Dennis, ‘Application of Human Rights Treaties Extraterritorially in Times of Armed Conflict and Military Occupation’, American Journal of International Law, 99 (2005), 119; Ralph Wilde, ‘Legal “Black Hole”?: Extraterritorial State Action and International Treaty Law on Civil and Political Rights’, Melbourne Journal of International Law, 26 (2005), 739; Michał Gondek, The Reach of Human Rights in a Globalising World: Extraterritorial Application of Human Rights Treaties (Antwerp: Intersentia, 2009); Ralph Wilde, ‘Compliance with Human Rights Norms Extraterritorially: “Human Rights Imperialism”?’ in Laurence Boisson de Chazournes and Marcelo Kohen (eds.), International Law and the Quest for its Implementation: Liber Amicorum Vera Gowlland-Debbas (The Netherlands: Brill/Martinus Nijhoff, 2010); Marko Milanovic, Extraterritorial Application of Human Rights Treaties: Law, Principles, and Policy (Oxford University Press, 2011); Karen da Costa, The Extraterritorial Application of Selected Human Rights Treaties (The Netherlands: Brill, 2012). Sandesh Sivakumaran highlights this significance in the Court’s intervention on the topic. See Sivakumaran, ‘The International Court of Justice and Human Rights’, 307.

5 See the sources cited ibid.

6 See ECHR, Art. 1; ACHR, Art. 1.

7 CAT, Art. 2.

8 CRC, Art. 2.1.

9 ICCPR, Art. 2.

10 American Declaration; ACHPR; CEDAW; CERD; CRC Optional Protocol.

11 Coard v. U.S., Case 10.951, Report No. 109/99, OEA/Ser.L./V/II.85, doc. 9 rev. (1999) (Coard), para. 37.

12 ICESCR, above n. 3, Art. 2.

13 General Comment No. 31, UN Doc. CCPR/C/21/Rev.1/Add. 13 (26 May 2004) (HRC General Comment No. 31); para. 10; HRC, Lilian Celiberti de Casariego v. Uruguay, Communication No. 56/1979, UN Doc. CCPR/C/13/D/56/1979 (29 July 1981) (Celiberti de Casariego), para. 10.3; HRC, Sergio Euben Lopez Burgos v. Uruguay, Communication No. R.12/52, UN Doc. Supp. No. 40 (A/36/40) (6 June 1979) (Lopez Burgos).

14 Coard, paras. 37, 39, 41.

15 WM v. Denmark, Application No. 17392/90, 73 Eur Comm’n HR Dec. and Rep. 193 (1992), 196, Section ‘The Law’, para. 1 (WM); Loizidou v. Turkey, Application No. 40/1993/435/514, Judgment, 23 February 1995, 1996-VI ECtHR, Ser. A, 2216 (GC) (Merits), paras. 52–6; Cyprus v. Turkey, Application No. 25781/94, Judgment, 10 May 2001, 2001-IV, ECtHR, 1 (GC), para. 77; Banković and others v. Belgium and others, Application No. 52207/99, Judgment, 12 December 2001, 2001–XII ECtHR (GC), 333, paras. 70–1; Öcalan v. Turkey, Application No. 46221/99, ECtHR (GC), 12 May 2005 (Öcalan), para. 91; Isaak v Turkey, Application No. 44587/98, ECtHR, Judgment, 28 September 2006 (Admissibility) (Isaak), p. 21; Issa and others v. Turkey, ECtHR, Admissibility Decision, 30 May 2000 (Issa (Admissibility)) and 41 ECtHR 27 (2004) (Merits) (Issa (Merits)), para. 71; Al-Saadoon and Mufdhi v. United Kingdom, Application No. 61498/08, ECtHR, Chamber decision, 2 March 2010 (Al-Saadoon); Al Skeini and others v. United Kingdom, Application No. 55721/07, ECtHR, Judgment, 7 July 2011.

16 Consideration of Reports Submitted by States Parties under Article 19 of the Convention, Conclusions and Recommendations: United States of America, UN Doc. CAT/C/USA/CO/2 (25 July 2006), para. 15; General Comment No. 2: Implementation of Article 2 by States Parties, 23 November 2007, UN Doc. CAT/C/GC/2 (24 January 2008), para. 16.

17 Concluding Observations of the Committee on the Rights of the Child: Israel, UN Doc. CRC/C/15/Add.195, 4 October 2002, paras. 2, 5, 57–8.

18 R v. Immigration Officer at Prague Airport and another (Respondents), ex p. European Roma Rights Centre and others (Appellants) [2004] UKHL 55, 9 December 2004; R (on the application of Al-Skeini and others) v. Secretary of State for Defence (The Redress Trust intervening) [2007] UKHL 26, [2007] 3 WLR 33; R (on the application of Al-Skeini and others) v. Secretary of State for Defence [2005] EWCA Civ 1609, 21 December 2005; R (on the application of Al-Skeini and others) v. Secretary of State for Defence [2004] EWHC 2911 (Admin), 14 December 2004.

19 Namibia case, 54, para. 118.

20 The two triggers are discussed below, nn. 29 and 30 and accompanying text.

22 Sandesh Sivakumaran observes that the Court’s later decisions on the extraterritorial application of the ICCPR, ICESCR and CRC (addressed below) are ‘timely and important’ but also ‘no more than the specific application to human rights treaties of’ this earlier idea. Sivakumaran, ‘The International Court of Justice and Human Rights’, 309.

23 See e.g. the discussion in Wilde ‘Legal “Black Hole”?’, 776–8, and sources cited therein.

24 See the discussions in the literature cited above, n. 4; for one example of a commentator who advocates this position, see Dennis, ‘Application of Human Rights Treaties Extraterritorially in Times of Armed Conflict and Military Occupation’. For Israel’s position with respect to the ICCPR, see e.g. Wall Advisory Opinion, para. 110, and sources cited therein.

25 See the Wall Advisory Opinion, para. 112.

26 See decisions cited above nn. 1417.

27 Coard, above n. 11, para. 37.

28 General Comment No. 31, Celiberti de Casariego, Lopez Burgos, above n. 13.

29 See e.g. Cyprus v. Turkey; Loizidou v. Turkey (Preliminary Objections), Merits; Banković; Al-Skeini (DC), (CA), (HL), (ECtHR); Issa.

30 Celiberti de Casariego, para. 10.3; Lopez Burgos, para. 12.3; Öcalan; Isaak, p. 21; Coard, paras. 1–4, 37, 39, 41; Al-Skeini (DC), (CA), (HL), (ECtHR), passim; Al-Saadoon, passim; WM, p. 196, section ‘The Law’, para. 1.

31 Wall Advisory Opinion, para. 113.

32 Ibid., para. 109 (on the Committee’s general position on extraterritorial applicability) and para. 110 (on the Committee’s position on Israel in the Palestinian territories in particular); DRC v. Uganda, para. 216.

33 Wall Advisory Opinion, para. 113; DRC v. Uganda Judgment, paras. 216–7. On the decision of the Committee on the Rights of the Child, see above, n. 17.

34 See the discussions in the literature cited above n. 4; for one example of a commentator who advocates this position, see Dennis, ‘Application of Human Rights Treaties Extraterritorially in Times of Armed Conflict and Military Occupation’. For Israel’s position with respect to the ICCPR, see e.g. Wall Advisory Opinion, para. 110, and sources cited therein.

35 On the ICESCR, see Wall Advisory Opinion, paras. 111–12; on the ACHPR and the CRC Optional Protocol, see DRC v. Uganda Judgment, paras. 216–7.

36 Wall Advisory Opinion, para. 112.

38 See Opinion of Lord Bingham, Roma Rights case, para. 4.

39 See Opinion of Lady Hale, Roma Rights case, paras. 97–102 and Opinion of Lord Steyn, paras. 44 and 46.

40 Georgia v. Russia (Provisional Measures), para. 109.

41 Ibid., para. 149.

42 Wall Advisory Opinion, para. 109.

44 Ibid., para. 112.

45 Banković, para. 67.

46 See Al-Skeini (HC), paras. 245 and 269; Al-Skeini (CA), paras. 75–6.

47 Al Skeini (ECtHR), paras. 131–2.

48 See Banković; Al-Skeini (DC), (CA), (HL), (ECtHR), 63; Wilde, ‘Compliance with Human Rights Norms Extraterritorially’.

49 See ICCPR and ICESCR.

1 Martti Koskenniemi and Päivi Leino, ‘Fragmentation of International Law? Postmodern Anxieties’, Leiden Journal of International Law, 15 (2002), 553.

2 ILC Study Group, ‘Fragmentation of International Law: Difficulties Arising from the Diversification and Expansion of International Law, Conclusions of the Work of the Study Group’, A/CN.4/L.702 (18 July 2006); see also Report of the ILC Study Group, ‘Fragmentation of International Law: Difficulties Arising from the Diversification and Expansion of International Law’, finalised by Martti Koskenniemi, A/CN.4/L.682 and Corr.1 (13 April 2006).

3 See generally, Margaret A. Young (ed.), Regime Interaction in International Law: Facing Fragmentation (Cambridge University Press, 2012).

4 Tomer Broude and Yuval Shany, ‘The International Law and Policy of Multi-sourced Equivalent Norms’ in Tomer Broude and Yuval Shany (eds.), Multi-sourced Equivalent Norms in International Law (Oxford: Hart, 2011), 1.

5 For the risks in defining regimes and theorising their interactions (especially with respect to reductive thinking and essentialising tendencies), see Margaret A. Young, ‘Introduction: The Productive Friction between Regimes’ in Margaret A. Young (ed.), Regime Interaction in International Law: Facing Fragmentation (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 10–11.

6 Agreement Establishing the World Trade Organization (Marrakesh, 15 April 1994, 1 January 1995), 33 ILM 1143.

7 United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (New York, adopted 9 May 1992, entered into force 21 March 1994), 31 ILM 849.

8 United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (Montegobay, adopted 10 December 1982, entered into force 16 November 1994), 1833 UNTS 397.

9 Young, ‘Introduction: The Productive Friction between Regimes’, 11, building on Stephen Krasner’s seminal definition in his ‘Structural Causes and Regime Consequences: Regimes as Intervening Variables’ in Stephen Krasner (ed.), International Regimes (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1983), 3 (regimes are ‘sets of implicit or explicit principles, norms, rules, and decision-making procedures around which actors’ expectations converge in a given area of international relations’); see also Oran Young, International Cooperation: Building Regimes for Natural Resources and the Environment (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1989), 1. Note the different use of the term ‘regime’ to refer to government authority within a state, see e.g. James Crawford, ‘Sovereignty as a Legal Value’ in James Crawford and Martti Koskenniemi (eds.), The Cambridge Companion to International Law (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 127; also exemplified by the genteelism ‘regime change’ when governmental authority is challenged by intervention in domestic affairs by an external state.

10 The following overview is a brief summary of the more detailed analysis in Young, ‘Introduction: The Productive Friction between Regimes’, 4–11.

11 See e.g. Kal Raustiala and David Victor, ‘The Regime Complex for Plant Genetic Resources’, International Organization, 58 (2004), 277; Robert Keohane and David Victor, ‘The Regime Complex for Climate Change’, Perspectives on Politics, 9 (2011), 7.

12 Consular Staff in Tehran (USA v. Iran), ICJ Reports (1979), para. 86. See further Bruno Simma, ‘Self-Contained Regimes’, Netherlands Yearbook of International Law, 16 (1985), 115 and 117. For criticism of the Court’s use of the term, see James Crawford and Penelope Nevill, ‘Relations between International Courts and Tribunals: The “Regime Problem”’ in Margaret A. Young (ed.), Regime Interaction in International Law: Facing Fragmentation (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 235, 259.

13 See ILC Study Group Analytical Study, 81–2 (para. 152), 248 (para. 492). For definitions, see ILC Study Group Conclusions, 11–12, para. 12.

14 This usage applies when ‘all the rules and principles that regulate a certain problem area are collected together so as to express a “special regime”. Expressions such as “law of the sea”, “humanitarian law”, “human rights law”, “environmental law” and “trade law”, etc. give expression to some such regimes. For interpretative purposes, such regimes may often be considered in their entirety.’ Conclusions, ibid.

15 ILC Analytical Study, 72, para. 136.

16 On the influence of experts on international law, see Martti Koskenniemi, ‘The Fate of Public International Law: Between Technique and Politics’, Modern Law Review, 70 (2000), 1; David Kennedy, ‘The Mystery of Global Governance’, Ohio Northern University Law Review, 34 (2008), 827. See also Andrew T. F. Lang, ‘Legal Regimes and Professional Knowledges: The Internal Politics of Regime Definition’ in Margaret A. Young (ed.), Regime Interaction in International Law: Facing Fragmentation (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 113.

17 See e.g. Peter Haas, ‘Introduction: Epistemic Communities and International Policy Coordination’, International Organization, 46 (1992), 1.

18 Andreas Fischer-Lescano and Gunther Teubner, ‘Regime-collisions: The Vain Search for Legal Unity in the Fragmentation of Global Law’, Michigan Journal of International Law, 25 (2004), 999.

19 See Oran Young, ‘The Politics of International Regime Formation: Managing Natural Resources and the Environment’, International Organization, 43 (1989), 353–4.

20 Abram Chayes and Antonia Handler Chayes, The New Sovereignty: Compliance with International Regulatory Agreements (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1995).

21 Dianne Otto, ‘Institutional Partnership or Critical Seepages? The Role of Human Rights NGOs in the United Nations’ in Mashood A. Baderin and Manisuli Ssenyonjo (eds.), International Human Rights Law: Six Decades After the UDHR and Beyond (Aldershot: Ashgate, 2010), 317.

22 Thomas Gehring and Sebastian Oberthür, ‘Institutional Interaction: Ten Years of Scholarly Development’ in Sebastian Oberthür and Olav Schram Stokke (eds.), Managing Institutional Complexity: Regime Interplay and Global Environmental Change (Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 2011), 25.

23 Rüdiger Wolfrum and Nele Matz, Conflicts in International Environmental Law (Berlin: Springer-Verlag, 2003), 3 and references cited therein.

24 Jagdish Bhagwati, Termites in the Trading System: How Preferential Agreements Undermine Free Trade (Oxford University Press, 2008), 63.

25 Steven R. Ratner, ‘Regulatory Takings in Institutional Context: Beyond the Fear of Fragmented International Law’, American Journal of International Law, 102 (2008), 475.

26 Claire Charters, ‘Multi-sourced Equivalent Norms and the Legitimacy of Indigenous Peoples’ Rights under International Law’ in Tomer Broude and Yuval Shany (eds.), Multi-sourced Equivalent Norms in International Law (Oxford: Hart, 2011), 289.

27 Toshiyuki Kono and Steven van Uytsel (eds.), The UNESCO Convention on the Diversity of Cultural Expressions: A Tale of Fragmentation in International Law (Cambridge: Intersentia, 2012).

28 Especially as one considers how the rhetoric of fragmentation has been used strategically throughout history: Anne-Charlotte Martineau, ‘The Rhetoric of Fragmentation: Fear and Faith in International Law’, Leiden Journal of International Law, 22 (2009), 1.

29 See e.g. Alexander Orakhelashvili, ‘The Interaction between Human Rights and Humanitarian Law: Fragmentation, Conflict, Parallelism, or Convergence?’, European Journal of International Law, 19 (2008), 161.

30 Stephen Humphreys, ‘Introduction: Human Rights and Climate Change’ in Stephen Humphreys (ed.), Human Rights and Climate Change (Cambridge University Press, 2009), 1.

31 Margaret A. Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish: The Interaction between Regimes in International Law (Cambridge University Press, 2011).

32 Harro van Asselt, ‘Managing the Fragmentation of International Environmental Law: Forests at the Intersection of the Climate and Biodiversity Regimes’, New York University Journal of International Law and Politics, 44 (2012), 1205.

33 Powers relate not only to enforcement (with the WTO regime notably the strongest), but also to the ability of organisations to establish their own administrative arrangements.

34 For examples, see Crawford and Nevill, ‘Relations between International Courts and Tribunals’, 235–60.

35 See also Jeffrey L. Dunoff, ‘A New Approach to Regime Interaction’ in Margaret A. Young (ed.), Regime Interaction in International Law: Facing Fragmentation (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 136.

36 Young, ‘Introduction: The Productive Friction between Regimes’.

37 See above n. 9 and associated text.

38 See Gunther Teubner and Peter Korth, ‘Two Kinds of Legal Pluralism: Collision of Transnational Regimes in the Double Fragmentation of World Society’ in Margaret A. Young (ed.), Regime Interaction in International Law: Facing Fragmentation (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 23.

39 See, generally, Christian Joerges, Inger-Johanne Sand and Gunther Teubner (eds.), Transnational Governance and Constitutionalism (Oxford: Hart, 2004).

40 ILC Analytical Study, 249.

41 Ibid., 252.

42 Ibid., 249.

43 Hent Kalmo and Quentin Skinner, ‘Introduction: A Concept in Fragments’ in Hent Kalmo and Quentin Skinner (eds.), Sovereignty in Fragments: The Past, Present and Future of a Contested Concept (Cambridge University Press, 2011), 1.

44 Crawford, ‘Sovereignty as a Legal Value’, 132.

45 See Richard Joyce, Competing Sovereignties (Abingdon: Routledge, 2013), 1–2, and sources therein; see also Stephen Krasner, Sovereignty: Organized Hypocrisy (Princeton University Press, 1999), 3.

46 Thomas M. Franck, ‘Can the United States Delegate Aspects of Sovereignty to International Regimes?’ in Thomas M. Franck (ed.), Delegating State Powers: The Effect of Treaty Regimes on Democracy and Sovereignty (New York: Transnational Publishers, 2000), 1. See also Oona Hathaway, ‘International Delegation and State Sovereignty’, Law and Contemporary Problems, 71 (2008), 115.

47 Hathaway, ‘International Delegation and State Sovereignty’, 141–5.

48 Vienna Convention on the Law of Treaties (Vienna, adopted 22 May 1969, entered into force 27 January 1980), 1155 UNTS 331.

49 Panel Report, EC – Measures Affecting the Approval and Marketing of Biotech Products WT/DS291/R, WT/ DS292/R, WT/DS293/R (circulated 29 September 2006), para. 7.68. See further Margaret A. Young, ‘The WTO’s Use of Relevant Rules of International Law: An Analysis of the Biotech Case’, International and Comparative Law Quarterly, 56 (2007), 907.

50 The domestic analogue to this is a presumption of full policy co-ordination within state agencies, with the state then presenting a united and coherent front to all international regimes. For examples demonstrating the fiction behind such ideals, see Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 249–53.

51 The following statement by the Permanent Court of Justice is often pointed to as a founding argument for sovereignty: ‘International law governs relations between independent States. The rules of law binding upon States therefore emanate from their own free will as expressed in conventions or by usages generally accepted as expressing principles of law…Restrictions upon the independence of States cannot therefore be presumed.’ See SS Lotus Case (France v. Turkey), Judgment, 7 September 1927, PCIJ Series A, No. 10 (1927), 18. Yet, as James Crawford points out, the presumption is lessened in external affairs, since the equal rights of other States must be taken into account: James Crawford, ‘The Criteria for Statehood in International Law’, British Yearbook of International Law, 48 (1976), 108. In the Lotus case, the Permanent Court was concerned with the freedoms of Turkey (in prosecuting a French officer of the watch after a collision between a French and a Turkish steamship). At Cambridge, we students of James Crawford were prompted to consider how the jurisdictional issue would have been resolved had France’s freedoms been at issue.

52 Margaret A. Young, ‘Regime Interaction in Creating, Implementing and Enforcing International Law’ in Margaret A. Young (ed.), Regime Interaction in International Law: Facing Fragmentation (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 85, 95–6.

53 Convention on International Trade in Endangered Species of Wild Fauna and Flora (Washington, DC adopted 3 March 1973, entered into force 1 July 1975), 983 UNTS 243. See further ibid., 96–7.

54 Appellate Body Report, United States – Import Prohibition of Certain Shrimp and Shrimp Products WT/DS58/AB/R (circulated 12 October 1998); the Appellate Body was following norms of interpretation in the VCLT, especially Art. 31(1); see further Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 189–240.

55 Duncan Hollis, ‘Private Actors in Public International Law: Amicus Curiae and the Case for the Retention of State Sovereignty’, Boston College International and Comparative Law Review, 25 (2002), 235.

56 See International Bank for Reconstruction and Development, Charter Establishing the Forest Carbon Partnership Facility (March 2010), Recital B (‘[T]he Forest Carbon Partnership Facility [aims] to build partnerships among developed and developing countries, public and private sector entities, international organizations, non-governmental organizations, forest-dependent indigenous peoples and forest dwellers to prepare for possible future systems of positive incentives for REDD, including innovative approaches to sustainable use of forest resources and biodiversity conservation’).

57 William Boyd, ‘Climate Change, Fragmentation, and the Challenges of Global Environmental Law: Elements of a Post-Copenhagen Assemblage’, University of Pennsylvania Journal of International Law, 32 (2010), 457.

58 Reparation for Injuries Suffered in the Service of the United Nations, Advisory Opinion, 11 April 1949, ICJ Reports (1949), 174. See further James Crawford, ‘International Law as an Open System’ in James Crawford, International Law as an Open System: Selected Essays (London: Cameron May, 2002), 19–22.

59 Legality of the Use by a State of Nuclear Weapons in Armed Conflict, Advisory Opinion, 8 July 1996, ICJ Reports (1996), 79.

60 Koskenniemi, ‘The Fate of Public International Law’; see also Martti Koskenniemi, ‘International Law: Constitutionalism, Managerialism and the Ethos of Legal Education’, European Journal of Legal Studies, 1 (2007) (online reference: see www.ejls.eu/1/4UK.pdf); Stephen Toope, ‘Emerging Patterns of Governance and International Law’ in Michael Byers (ed.), The Role of Law in International Politics (Oxford University Press, 2000), 106.

61 Martti Koskenniemi, ‘Hegemonic Regimes’ in Margaret A. Young (ed.), Regime Interaction in International Law: Facing Fragmentation (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 305.

62 For an analysis of how powerful states maintain their dominance in conditions of fragmentation, see Eyal Benvenisti and George W. Downs, ‘The Empire’s New Clothes: Political Economy and the Fragmentation of International Law’, Stanford Law Review, 60 (2007), 595.

63 Michael Biggs, ‘Putting the State on the Map: Cartography, Territory, and European State Formation’, Comparative Studies in Society and History, 41 (1999), 399.

64 Crawford, ‘International Law as an Open System’, 38.

65 See e.g. the call for NGO participation in WTO decision-making to ensure the inclusion of ideas that are ‘overlooked or undervalued by governments’: Steve Charnovitz, ‘WTO Cosmopolitics’, NYU Journal of International Law and Politics, 34 (2002), 343.

66 Michael Dorf and Charles Sabel, ‘A Constitution of Democratic Experimentalism’, Columbia Law Review, 98 (1998), 267.

67 See e.g. David Victor, Kal Raustiala and Eugene Skolnikoff, ‘Introduction and Overview’ in David Victor, Kal Raustiala and Eugene Skolnikoff (eds.), The Implementation and Effectiveness of International Environmental Commitments: Theory and Practice (Cambridge, MA: MIT Press, 1998), 21–4.

68 See e.g. the need for a wide range of inter-governmental organisations, besides the ones with traditional mandates for fisheries, to co-operate on sustainability: Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 275.

69 On multiplicity of actors, see further Saskia Sassen, Territory, Authority, Rights: From Medieval to Global Assemblages (Princeton University Press, 2006), 340.

70 The following is developed from what I have argued to be a ‘legal framework for regime interaction’ in the context of fisheries governance: see Young, ‘Regime Interaction in Creating, Implementing and Enforcing International Law’, 98–109. See further, Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 241–306.

71 Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 278.

72 Relatedly, standard setting bodies are also encouraged to operate with open, impartial and transparent procedures: see WTO Doc. G/TBT/1/Rev.8 (Decision of the TBT Committee on Principles for the Development of International Standards, Guides and Recommendations), discussed in Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 279.

73 World Health Organisation, Report of the Committee of Experts on Tobacco Industry Documents, ‘Tobacco Company Strategies to Undermine Tobacco Control Activities at the World Health Organization’ (July 2000), 244, cited in Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 283–4.

74 Teubner and Korth, ‘Two Kinds of Legal Pluralism’.

75 Cf. the OECD, which is a closed group representing only thirty developed countries; see further Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 282.

76 See Sasha Courville, ‘Understanding NGO-based Social and Environmental Regulatory Systems: Why We Need New Models of Accountability’ in Michael W. Dowdle (ed.), Public Accountability: Designs, Dilemmas and Experiences (Cambridge University Press, 2006), 271.

77 The United Nations, for example, requires NGOs to provide details about funding, but the World Intellectual Property Organisation does not. See further Young, Trading Fish, Saving Fish, 282–3. The guidelines issued by the WTO Appellate Body in the EC-Asbestos appeal (see above n. 55 and surrounding text) required amicus briefs to state the nature of their interest.

78 See e.g. the International Social and Environmental Accreditation Alliance (ISEAL Alliance), available at www.isealalliance.org.

79 See Gunther Teubner, ‘Constitutionalizing Polycontexturality’, Social and Legal Studies, 20 (2011), 210.

80 Gert Verschraegen, ‘Hybrid Constitutionalism, Fundamental Rights and the State: A Response to Gunther Teubner’, Netherlands Journal of Legal Philosophy, 40 (2011), 216.

81 Teubner and Korth, ‘Two Kinds of Legal Pluralism’.

82 See Nagoya Protocol on Access to Genetic Resources and the Fair and Equitable Sharing of Benefits Arising from their Utilisation to the Convention on Biological Diversity, foreshadowed in Teubner and Konth, ‘Two Kinds of Legal Pluralism’, 52; see also the United Nations Declaration on the Rights of Indigenous Peoples, A/RES/61/295, 2 October 2007 and UNFCCC Cancun Agreement, Decision 1/CP. 16, FCCC/CP/2010/7/Add. 1 (2010), Appendix I.

83 For related attempts to locate accountability structures in non-traditional sites of globalised law-making, see Benedict Kingsbury, Nico Krisch and Richard Stewart, ‘The Emergence of Global Administrative Law’, Law and Contemporary Problem, 68 (2005), 15.

84 On the classification of norms from global administrative law, see Teubner, ‘Constitutionalizing Polycontexturality’, 219.

85 Patrizia Nanz, ‘Democratic Legitimacy and Constitutionalisation of Transnational Trade Governance: A View from Political Theory’ in Christian Joerges and Ernst-Ulrich Petersmann (eds.), Constitutionalism, Multilevel Trade Governance and Social Regulation (Oxford: Hart, 2006), 80; see also Inger-Johanne Sand, ‘Polycontextuality as an Alternative to Constitutionalism’ in Christian Joerges, Inger-Johanne Sand and Gunther Teubner (eds.), Transnational Governance and Constitutionalism (Oxford: Hart, 2004), 41.

86 For one examination of whether sovereigns must incorporate in their decision-making the concerns of those they affect, see Eyal Benvenisti, ‘Sovereigns as Trustees of Humanity: On the Accountability of States to Foreign Stakeholders’, American Journal of International Law, 107 (2013), 295.

87 James Crawford, ‘Democracy and International Law’, British Yearbook of International Law, 63 (1993), 113, 133.

1 e.g. Public Statement on the International Investment Regime, 31 August 2010, available at www.osgoode.yorku.ca/public_statement.

2 Horacio D. Rosatti, ‘Los tratados bilaterales de inversión: el arbitraje internacional obligatorio y el sistema constitucional argentino’, La Ley, 58 (2003), 1.

3 Carlos S. Fayt, La Constitución Nacional y los tribunales internacionales de arbitraje (Buenos Aires: La Ley, 2007).

4 e.g. Draft Law 4504-S-04, presented by Senator Capitanich in February 2005 and 532-S-05 presented by Senator Müller in March 2005.

5 Sentencia de la Corte Constitucional de Colombia C-294/02, 23 April 2002, available at http://corte-constitucional.vlex.com.co/vid/-43618351. Sentencia del Tribunal Constitucional de Bolivia sobre constitucionalidad de leyes ratificadoras de Convenios y Tratados, No. 0031/2006, 10 May 2006, available at http://italaw.com/sites/default/files/treaty-interpretations/ita0940.pdf.

6 ‘Ecuadorian Constitutional Court rulings on the constitutionality of UK, German, Chinese and Finish bilateral investment treaties’, Investment Arbitration Reporter, 28 August 2010, available at http://iareporter.com/articles/20100830_2; ‘Ecuador to Set Up Commission to Audit Bilateral Investment Treaties’, Practical Law Arbitration, 16 October 2013.

7 Ontario Supreme Court of Justice, The Council of Canadians et al. v. Her Majesty in Right of Canada, Decision of 8 July 2005 and Ontario Court of Appeal Decision of 30 November 2006, available at http://italaw.com/sites/default/files/treaty-interpretations/ita0941.pdf.

8 Gillard Government Trade Policy Statement, ‘Trading Our Way to More Jobs and Prosperity’ (Department of Foreign affairs and Trade, April 2011), available at http://blogs.usyd.edu.au/japaneselaw/2011_Gillard%20Govt%20Trade%20Policy%20Statement.pdf.

9 George Monbiot, ‘This Transatlantic Trade Deal is a Full-frontal Assault on Democracy’, The Guardian, 4 November 2013.

10 ‘Professor Martti Koskenniemi: Finland’s Legislative Power May Be in Jeopardy’, Helsinki Times, 16 December 2013, available at http://www.helsinkitimes.fi/finland/finland-news/domestic/8717-professor-finland-s-legislative-power-may-be-in-jeopardy.html.

11 Devashish Krishan, ‘Thinking about BITs and BIT Arbitration: The Legitimacy Crisis that Never Was’ in Todd Weiler and Freya Baetens (eds.), New Directions in International Economic Law: In Memoriam Thomas Wälde (Leiden: Martinus Nijhoff, 2011), 107, providing a long list of references at n. 32.

12 For empirical research see Susan Franck, ‘Empirically Evaluating Claims about Investment Treaty Arbitration’, North Carolina Law Review, 86 (2007), 1; Susan Franck, ‘Empiricism and International Law: Insights for Investment Treaty Dispute Resolution’, Virginia Journal of International Law, 48 (2008), 767; Susan Franck, ‘Development and Outcomes of Investment Treaty Arbitration’, Harvard International Law Journal, 50 (2009), 435; Kassi Tallent, ‘State Responsibility by the Numbers: Towards an Understanding of the Prevalence of the Latin America Countries in Investment Arbitration’, Transnational Dispute Management, 1 (2010).

13 Paul D. Marquardt, ‘Law without Borders: The Constitutionality of an International Criminal Court’, Columbia Journal of Transnational Law, 33 (1995), 73; Gordon A. Christenson and Kimberly Gambrel, ‘Constitutionality of Binational Panel Review in Canada–U.S. Free Trade Agreement’, International Lawyer, 23 (1989), 401; Bruce Ackerman and David Golove, ‘Is NAFTA Constitutional?’, Harvard Law Review, 108 (1995), 4; John Jackson, ‘The Great 1994 Sovereignty Debate: United States Acceptance and Implementation of the Uruguay Round Results’, Columbia Journal of Transnational Law, 36 (1997), 157; Steven Croley and John Jackson, ‘WTO Dispute Procedures, Standard of Review, and Deference to National Governments’, American Journal of International Law, 90 (1996), 193; Robert Kushen and Kenneth Harris, ‘Surrender of Fugitives by the United States to the War Crimes Tribunals for Yugoslavia and Rwanda’, American Journal of International Law, 90 (1996), 510.

14 Monroe Leigh, ‘The Yugoslav Tribunal: Use of Unnamed Witnesses against Accused’, American Journal of International Law, 90 (1996), 238.

15 W. Michael Reisman, ‘Introductory Remarks’, Symposium: Constitutionalism in the Post-Cold War World, Yale Journal of International Law, 19 (1994), 192.

16 Joseph H. H. Weiler, ‘The Transformation of Europe’, Yale Law Journal, 100 (1991), 2411.

17 Denunciations by Bolivia (16 May 2007), Ecuador (5 December 2007) and Venezuela (26 January 2012). See https://icsid.worldbank.org/ICSID/ICSID/ViewNewsReleases.jsp.

18 ‘Ecuadorian President Reportedly Asks Congress to Terminate 13 Bits; Move Comes on Heels of Earlier Termination of Multiple BITs’, Investment Arbitration Reporter, 30 October 2009, available at www.iaireporter.com/articles/20091124_8.

20 e.g. North American Free Trade Agreement, Notes of Interpretation of Certain Chapter 11 Provisions, NAFTA Free Trade Commission, 31 July 2001, available at www.sice.oas.org/tpd/nafta/Commission/CH11understanding_e.asp.

21 Lluís Paradell Trius, ‘International Law in National Legal Systems: Constitutional Obstacles and Opportunities’, TDM5 (2005).

22 Arts. 27 and 46 of the 1969 Vienna Convention of the Law of Treaties (Vienna, adopted 22 May 1969, entered into force 27 January 1980), 1155 UNTS 331.

23 James Crawford, Democracy in International Law (Cambridge University Press, 1994), 8 (reprinted in British Yearbook of International Law, 64 (1993), 113).

24 James Crawford, ‘International Law and Australian Federalism: Past, Present and Future’ in Brian Opeskin and Donald R. Rothwell (eds.), International Law and Australian Federalism (Carlton: Melbourne University Press, 1997), 325.

25 Shelley v. Kraemer, 334 US 1 (1948).

26 Paul Sayre, ‘Shelley v. Kraemer and United Nations Law’, Iowa Law Review, 34 (1948), 1.

27 See generally Bert B. Lockwood, ‘The United Nations Charter and United States Civil Rights Litigation: 1946–1955’, Iowa Law Review, 69 (1984), 901.

28 Oyama v. California, 332 US 633 (1948).

29 Ibid., 649–50 (Black, J., concurring), 673 (Murphy, J., concurring).

30 Namba v. McCourt, 204 P2d 569 (1949).

31 Ibid., 579.

32 Sei Fujii v. State, 217 P2d 481 (Cal D Ct App 1950), rehearing denied 218 P2d 595 (1950), affirmed on other grounds 242 P2d 617 (1952).

33 Ibid., 217 P2d 481, 484–8 (Cal D Ct App 1950).

34 See on the controversy e.g. George Finch, ‘The Need to Restrain the Treaty-making Power of the United States within Constitutional Limits’, American Journal of International Law, 48 (1954), 57; Quincy Wright, ‘National Courts and Human Rights: The Fujii Case’, American Journal of International Law, 45 (1951), 62; Oscar Schachter, ‘The Charter and the Constitution: The Human Rights Provisions in American Law’, Vanderbilt Law Review, 4 (1951), 643. See also Lockwood, ‘The United Nations Charter and United States Civil Rights Litigation: 1946–1955’, 924 et seq. The main criticism of the decision came from the American Bar Association as reflected in the pages of its journal. See e.g. Frank E. Holman, ‘Treaty Law-making: A Blank Check for Writing a New Constitution’, American Bar Association Journal, 36 (1950), 707; and Frank Ober, ‘The Treaty-making and Amendment Powers: Do They Protect Our Fundamental Rights?’, American Bar Association Journal, 36 (1950), 715.

35 But not ratified (Senate advice and consent) until 1986.

36 See Ch. 1, nn. 29et seq., and accompanying text.

37 Sei Fujii v. State, 242 P2d 617 (1952).

38 Ibid., 619–22.

39 See Thomas Buergenthal, ‘Modern Constitutions and Human Rights Treaties’, Columbia Journal of Transnational Law, 36 (1997), 211; and Louis Henkin, ‘U.S. Ratification of Human Rights Conventions: The Ghost of Senator Bricker’, American Journal of International Law, 89 (1995), 341.

40 Vlissidis v. Anadell, 262 F2d 398 (7th Cir, 1959) (Arts. 55 and 56 of the UN Charter non-self-executing); Pauling v. McElroy, 164 FSupp 390 (1958), affirmed 278 F2d 252 (DC Cir, 1960), certiorari denied 364 US 835 (1960) (same); Camacho v. Rogers, 199 FSupp 155, 158 (SDNY 1961) (same); Frolova v. USSR, 761 F2d 370, 374 (7th Cir, 1985) (same); In re Alien Children Educ. Litig., 501 FSupp 544, 590 (SD Tex 1980), affirmed mem. (5th Cir, 1981), affirmed sub nom. Plyler v. Doe, 457 US 202 (1982) (OAS Charter non-self-executing); Bertrand v. Sava, 684 F2d 204, 218–19 (2nd Cir, 1982) (Refugees Protocol non-self-executing); Spiess v. C. Itoh & Co. (America), Inc., 643 F2d 353 (5th Cir, 1981) (UN Charter non-self-executing).

41 Lockwood, ‘The United Nations Charter and United States Civil Rights Litigation: 1946–1955’, 901.

42 See e.g. United States v. Postal, 589 F2d 862 (5th Cir, 1979), certiorari denied 444 US 832 (1979); and People of Saipan v. United States Dept of Interior, 502 F2d 90 (9th Cir, 1974), certiorari denied 420 US 1003 (1975). See also Stefan Riesenfeld, ‘The Doctrine of Self-Executing Treaties and U.S. v. Postal: Win at Any Price?’, American Journal of International Law, 74 (1980), 892; and Richard Lillich and Hurst Hannum, ‘Linkages between International Human Rights and U.S. Constitutional Law’, American Journal of International Law, 79 (1985), 161.

43 Thomas Buergenthal, ‘Self-executing and Non-self-executing Treaties in National and International Law’, Collected Courses of the Hague Academy of International Law, 235 (1992), 303; Charles Stotter, ‘Self-executing Treaties and the Human Rights Provisions of the United Nations Charter: A Separation of Powers Problem’, Buffalo Law Review, 25 (1976), 773; Wright, ‘National Courts and Human Rights: The Fujii Case’, 62; Carlos Manuel Vázquez, ‘The Four Doctrines of Self-Executing Treaties’, American Journal of International Law, 89 (1995), 696, 722–3 (argues that the doctrine has an ‘allocation of powers function’, and is thus a matter of the proper institutional role of national courts).

44 Stanford v. Kentucky, 492 US 361, 369 n. 1 (1989). This decision contrasts with the earlier one in Thompson v. Oklahoma, 487 US 815, 821 (1988), another case concerning the execution of juveniles, in which a different Supreme Court majority had favoured the use of international and comparative law in eighth amendment analysis. The new majority in the Supreme Court abandoned any attempt to reconcile international and internal law regarding the death penalty, and tended to exacerbate the differences between the two legal orders. See generally Joan Fitzpatrick, ‘The Relevance of Customary International Norms to the Death Penalty in the United States’, Georgia Journal of International and Comparative Law, 25 (1995–6).

45 Alec Stone Sweet, ‘Constitutional Dialogues in the European Community’ in Anne-Marie Slaughter, Alec Stone Sweet and Joseph H. H. Weiler (eds.), European Court and the National Courts – Doctrine and Jurisprudence: Legal Change in its Social Context (Oxford: Hart, 1998), 306.

46 On these developments see, among many others, ibid.; Weiler, ‘The Transformation of Europe’, 2403; Jean-Victor Louis, L’Ordre juridique communautaire, 5th edn (Luxembourg: Office des publications officielles des Communautés européennes, 1990).

47 For an excellent and comprehensive description of the reception of the EC ‘constitutional’ doctrines in the various legal orders of the Member States see Henry Schermers and Denis Waelbroeck, Judicial Protection in the European Communities (Deventer: Kluwer, 1992). See also Thibaut de Berranger, Constitutions nationales et construction communautaire (Paris: LGDJ, 1995); and Santiago Muñoz Machado, La Unión europea y las mutaciones del Estado (Madrid: Alianza Universidad, 1993).

48 Art. 11, Italian Constitution (1948); Art. 24(1), German Constitution (1949); Para. 15, Preamble to the French Constitution (1946), in force as part of the preamble of the 1958 Constitution.

49 Art. 67 Netherlands Constitution (as amended in 1953, now renumbered Art. 92); Art. 49(bis) Luxembourg Constitution (1956 amendment); Art. 25(bis) Belgian Constitution (1970 amendment); Art. 20(1) Danish Constitution (1953); Art. 28(2) and (3) Greek Constitution (1975); Art. 93 Spanish Constitution (1978); Art. 7(5) Portuguese Constitution (1976). In the UK a legislative act, the European Communities Act (1972), was adopted at the time of accession.

50 Title XIV of the French Constitution (as amended by Constitutional Law 92–554, 25 June 1992); Art. 23 German Constitution (as amended on 21 December 1992). In Ireland, a specific reference to the EC has existed since 1972, in Art. 29(4)(3)–(6) of the Constitution, amended to permit the ratification of the Single European Act (1986) and the Maastricht Treaty (1992).

51 See Andrew Oppenheimer (ed.), The Relationship between European Community Law and National Law: The Cases (Cambridge University Press, 1994), 4–5, and the cases there cited and compiled. In the UK, supremacy was accepted on the basis of s. 2(1) of the 1972 European Communities Act.

52 In Belgium and Luxembourg. See Oppenheimer, The Relationship between European Community Law and National Law.

53 Frontini et altri v. Ministro delle finanze et altri (C. cost., 27 December 1973 no. 183), Rivista di diritto internazionale, 57 (1974), 130; 93 ILR 514 (English translation).

54 Ibid., 93 ILR, 525.

55 Spa Granital v. Amministrazione delle finanze dello Stato (C. cost., 5 June 1984 no. 170), Rivista di diritto internazionale, 67 (1984), 360; 93 ILR 527, 536 (English translation).

56 Fragd v. Amministrazione delle Finanze dello Stato (C. cost., 21 April 1989 no. 232), Rivista di diritto internazionale, 72 (1989), 104; 93 ILR 538, 542–3 (English translation).

57 Solange I - Internationale Handelsgesellschaft von Einfuhr- und Vorratsstelle für Getreide und Futtermittel, decision of 29 May 1974, BVerfGE 37, 271 [1974] CMLR 540.

58 Ibid., 395.

59 Filippo Donati, Diritto comunitario e sindacato di costituzionalità (Milano: Giuffrè, 1995), 263; Enzo Cannizzaro, Trattati internazionali e giudizio di costituzionalità (Milano: Giuffrè, 1991), 340, and doctrinal references there cited.

60 F.a. Steinike & Weinlig v. Bundesamt für Ernährung & Forstwirtschaft (Vielleicht), BVerfG 25 July 1979, 52 BVerfGE 187; [1980] CMLR 531, 537 (English translation) (emphasis added). In the CMLR the word vielleicht is translated as ‘for instance’, although ‘maybe’ is a more common translation and also gives name to the decision.

61 Wünsche Handelsgesellschaft (Solange II), BVerfG 22 October 1986, 73 BVerfGE 339; 93 ILR 403 (English translation).

62 Ibid., 93 ILR, 427–8.

63 Ibid., 436.

64 Ibid., 420.

65 Case C-379/87, Groener v. Minister for Education and the City of Dublin [1989] ECR I-3967.

66 Case C-159/90, Society for the Protection of the Unborn Children Ireland v. Grogan [1991] ECR I-4685. See also Diarmuid Rossa Phelan, ‘Right to Life of the Unborn v. Promotion of Trade in Services’, Modern Law Review, 55 (1992), 670; Jason Coppel and Aidan O’Neill, ‘The European Court of Justice: Taking Rights Seriously?’, Common Market Law Review, 29 (1992), 669.

67 On this jurisprudence see e.g. Joseph H. H. Weiler, ‘Eurocracy and Distrust: Some Questions Concerning the Role of the European Court of Justice in the Protection of Fundamental Rights within the Legal Order of the European Communities’, Washington Law Review, 61 (1986), 1103. The status of human rights as an integral part of EC law is now clearly stated in Art. F of the European Union Treaty (1992), amended by the Amsterdam Treaty (1997). See generally on this evolution F. Sudre, ‘La Communauté européenne et les droits fondamentaux après le Traité d’Amsterdam: vers un nouveau système européen de protection des droits de l’homme?’, Juris classeur periodique, part I, 100 (1998).

68 Sweet, ‘Constitutional Dialogues in the European Community’, 319.

69 Joseph H. H. Weiler and Ulrich Haltern, ‘Constitutional or International? The Foundations of the Community Legal Order and the Question of Judicial Kompetence-Kompetence’ in Anne-Marie Slaughter, Alec Stone Sweet and Joseph H. H. Weiler (eds.), European Court and the National Courts – Doctrine and Jurisprudence: Legal Change in its Social Context (Oxford: Hart, 1998), 331.

70 Ibid., 336.

71 Ibid., 363.

72 Marta Cartabia, Principi inviolabili e integrazione europea (Milano: Giuffrè, 1995), 136–7.

73 Weiler and Haltern, ‘Constitutional or International?’, 363.

74 Stephan Schill, ‘System-building in Investment Treaty Arbitration and Lawmaking’, German Law Journal, 12 (2011), 1083.

75 See e.g. Stephan Schill, ‘International Investment Law and Comparative Public Law: An Introduction’ in Stephan Schill (ed.), International Investment Law and Comparative Public Law (Oxford University Press, 2010), 3; Anthea Roberts, ‘Clash of Paradigms: Actors and Analogies Shaping the Investment Treaty System’, American Journal of International Law, 107 (2013), 45.

76 Saar Papier Vertriebs GmbH v. Republic of Poland (UNCITRAL), Final Award, 16 October 1995.

77 Jarrod Hepburn, ‘Saar Papier v. Poland: Comparative Public Law and the Second-ever Investment Treaty Award’, EJIL: Talk!, 3 February 2014, available at www.ejiltalk.org/saar-papier-v-poland-comparative-public-law-and-the-second-ever-investment-treaty-award/.

78 Saar Papier Vertriebs GmbH v. Republic of Poland, para. 79.

79 Ibid., paras. 81, 83.

80 Ibid., para. 92.

81 Hepburn, ‘Saar Papier v. Poland: Comparative Public Law and the Second-ever Investment Treaty Award’.

82 Técnicas Medioambientales Tecmed, S.A. v. The United Mexican States (ICSID Case No. ARB (AF)/00/2), Award, 29 May 2003.

83 Total S.A. v. The Argentine Republic (ICSID Case No. ARB/04/01), Decision on Liability, para. 111.

84 Ibid., para. 128.

85 Toto Costruzioni Generali S.p.A. v. The Republic of Lebanon (ICSID Case No. ARB/07/12), Award, 7 June 2012, para. 166; see also para. 193.

86 W. Michael Reisman, ‘“Case Specific Mandates” versus “Systemic Implications”: How Should Investment Tribunals Decide? – The Freshfields Arbitration Lecture’, Arbitration International, 29 (2013), 131.

87 See e.g. the application for the ‘prima facie’ test of jurisdiction ratione materiae in Iberdrola Energía S.A. v. Republic of Guatemala (ICSID Case No. ARB/09/5), Award, 17 August 2012. See also similarly, Robert Azinian, Kenneth Davitian, & Ellen Baca v. The United Mexican States (ICSID Case No. ARB (AF)/97/2), Award, 1 November 1999.

88 Crawford, ‘International Law and Australian Federalism: Past, Present and Future’, 325.

* With acknowledgement to James Crawford, who along with Ivan Shearer, supervised my University of Sydney PhD entitled ‘The Polar Regions and the Development of International Law’ (1995).

1 Antarctica cases (UK v. Argentina; UK v. Chile), ICJ Pleadings (1956).

2 Antarctic Treaty (Washington, adopted 1 December 1959, entered in force 23 June 1961), 402 UNTS 71.

3 The seven claimant States are: Argentina, Australia, Chile, France, New Zealand, Norway and the United Kingdom.

4 David Day, Antarctica: A Biography (North Sydney: Random House/Knopf Australia, 2012), 434–91.

5 Shelagh D. Grant, Polar Imperative: A History of Arctic Sovereignty in North America (Toronto: Douglas & McIntyre, 2010), 193–246.

6 See e.g. Olya Gayazova, ‘China’s Rights in the Marine Arctic’, International Journal of Marine and Coastal Law, 28 (2013), 61–95.

7 Crawford’s contributions to matters associated with polar sovereignty can be found in James Crawford and Donald Rothwell, ‘Legal Issues Confronting Australia’s Antarctica’, Australian Yearbook of International Law, 13 (1992), 53–88; James Crawford, Brownlie’s Principles of Public International Law, 8th edn (Oxford University Press, 2012), 241–2.

8 Legal Status of Eastern Greenland (Norway v. Denmark), Judgment, 5 September 1933, PCIJ Series A/B, No. 53.

9 See e.g. Ivan Anthony Shearer (ed.), Starke’s International Law, 11th edn (London: Butterworths, 1994), 145; Robert Jennings and Arthur Watts (eds.), Oppenheim’s International Law, 9th edn, 2 vols. (London: Longman, 1992), I, Parts II–IV, 679 (who substitute subjugation for annexation).

10 In the case of Antarctica, see the discussion in Day, Antarctica: A Biography, 227–52.

11 The Netherlands v. United States of America (4 April 1928), Reports of International Arbitral Awards, II, 829.

12 Ibid., 840.

13 Legal Status of Eastern Greenland (Norway v. Denmark), 46.

14 See e.g. F. M. Auburn, Antarctic Law and Politics (Canberra: Croom Helm, 1982), 13; Gillian D. Triggs, International Law and Australian Sovereignty in Antarctica (Sydney: Legal Books, 1986), 82; Philip C. Jessup and Howard J. Taubenfeld, Controls for Outer Space and the Antarctic Analogy (New York: Columbia University Press, 1959), 141.

15 See e.g. A. C. Castles, ‘The International Status of the Australian Antarctic Territory’ in Daniel Patrick O’Connell (ed.), International Law in Australia (Sydney: Law Book Company, 1966), 355.

16 Charles Emmerson, The Future History of the Arctic (London: Vintage, 2010), 68.

17 United States Antarctic Program, United States Antarctic Program Participant Guide, 2010–12 edn (US Antarctic Program, 2010), 72.

18 Jennings and Watts, Oppenheim’s International Law, I, Parts II–IV, 693; Daniel Patrick O’Connell, International Law, 2nd edn, 2 vols. (London: Stevens and Son, 1970), I, 449; Gustav Smedal, Acquisition of Sovereignty over Polar Areas (Oslo: I Kommisjon Hos Jacob Dybwad, 1931), 54–76; Oscar Svarlien, ‘The Sector Principle in Law and Practice’, Polar Record, 10 (1960), 248–63.

19 Crawford, Brownlie’s Principles of Public International Law, 241; see also Auburn, Antarctic Law and Politics, 31.

20 Malcolm N. Shaw, International Law, 6th edn (Cambridge University Press, 2008), 535.

21 Crawford, Brownlie’s Principles of Public International Law, 241.

22 See the discussion in Crawford and Rothwell, ‘Legal Issues Confronting Australia’s Antarctica’, 79–82.

23 See discussion in Richard Woolcott, The Hot Seat: Reflections on Diplomacy from Stalin’s Death to the Bali Bombings (New South Wales: Harper Collins, 2003), 209–18.

24 Donald R. Rothwell, ‘Sovereignty and the Antarctic Treaty’, Polar Record, 46 (2010), 17–20.

25 Australian Antarctic Territory Acceptance Act 1933 (Australia).

26 Seas and Submerged Lands (Limits of Continental Shelf) Proclamation 2012 (Australia), Federal Register of Legislative Instruments F2012L01081 (24 May 2012).

27 The most thorough contemporary analysis can be found in Triggs, International Law and Australian Sovereignty in Antarctica; see also Crawford and Rothwell, ‘Legal Issues Confronting Australia’s Antarctica’, 59–61.

28 Environment Protection and Biodiversity Conservation Act 1999 (Australia), s. 229.

29 As to the issues arising regarding the enforcement of Australian law offshore the AAT see Crawford and Rothwell, ‘Legal Issues Confronting Australia’s Antarctica’, 78–85.

30 Commencing with Humane Society International, Inc. v. Kyodo Senpaku Kaisha Ltd [2004] FCA 1510.

31 See discussion in Tim Stephens and Donald Rothwell, ‘Japanese Whaling in Antarctica: Humane Society International, Inc. v. Kyodo Senpaku Kaisha Ltd’, Review of European Community and International Environmental Law, 16 (2007), 243–6.

32 Humane Society International, Inc. v. Kyodo Senpaku Kaisha Ltd [2008] FCA 3.

33 Ibid., para. 39.

34 Ibid., para. 55.

35 Peter Alford, ‘Aussie Judgment Served on Whalers’, The Australian (Sydney), 24 January 2008, 7.

36 In 2012 vessels from the Japanese whaling fleet entered the Australian Whale Sanctuary offshore Macquarie Island which brought about a response from the Australian government; see Nicola Roxon MP, ‘Japanese Whaling Vessels Nearing Macquarie Island’, Attorney-General for Australia Media Release, 25 February 2012, available at www.attorneygeneral.gov.au/Media-releases/.

37 For analysis see Andrew Serdy, ‘Towards Certainty of Seabed Jurisdiction beyond 200 Nautical Miles from the Territorial Sea Baseline: Australia’s Submission to the Commission on the Limits of the Continental Shelf’, Ocean Development and International Law, 36 (2005), 201–17.

38 United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (Montego Bay, adopted 10 December 1982, entered into force 10 November 1994), 1833 UNTS 397.

39 ‘Note from the Permanent Mission of Australia to the Secretary-General of the United Nations Accompanying the Lodgement of Australia’s Submission’, Note 89/2004 (November 2004) available at www.un.org/Depts/los/clcs_new/submissions_files/submission_aus.htm.

40 The States that directly commented on this matter were Germany, India, Japan, the Netherlands, Russian Federation and USA.

41 The Permanent Mission of Japan to the United Nations (SC/05/039) (19 January 2005) available at www.un.org/depts/los/clcs_new/submissions_files/aus04/clcs_03_2004_los_jap.pdf.

42 See discussion in Alan D. Hemmings and Tim Stephens, ‘The Extended Continental Shelves of Sub-Antarctic Islands: Implications for Antarctic Governance’, Polar Record, 46 (2010), 312–27.

43 See above n. 26.

44 Christopher Stevenson, ‘Hans Off! The Struggle for Hans Island and the Potential Ramifications for International Border Dispute Resolution’, Boston College International and Comparative Law Review, 30 (2007), 263–75.

45 The first time that consistent reports emerged of the Northwest Passage being ice-free was 2007, which coincided with a then record minimum sea ice extent being recorded for Arctic sea ice. See John Roach, ‘Arctic Melt Opens Northwest Passage’, National Geographic News, 17 September 2007, available at http://news.nationalgeographoc.com/news/pf/38614724.html.

46 See e.g. Timo Koivurova, ‘The Actions of Arctic States Respecting the Continental Shelf: A Reflective Essay’, Ocean Development and International Law, 42 (2011), 211–26.

47 See e.g. James Kraska (ed.), Arctic Security in an Age of Climate Change (Cambridge University Press, 2011); Scott G. Borgerson, ‘Arctic Meltdown: The Economic and Security Implications of Global Warming’, Foreign Affairs, 87 (2008), 63–77.

48 See e.g. Aldo Chircop, ‘The Growth of International Shipping in the Arctic: Is a Regulatory Review Timely?’, International Journal of Marine and Coastal Law, 24 (2009), 355–80; E. J. Molenaar, ‘Arctic Marine Shipping: Overview of the International Legal Framework, Gaps, and Options’, Journal of Transnational Law and Policy, 18 (2009), 289–325.

49 Also referred to as the Northeast Passage.

50 See Donat Pharad, Canada’s Arctic Waters in International Law (Cambridge University Press, 1988).

51 Ted L. McDorman, Salt Water Neighbors: International Ocean Law Relations between the United States and Canada (Oxford University Press, 2009), 93–5.

52 Arctic Council, Arctic Marine Shipping Assessment 2009 Report (Arctic Council, 2009) (AMSA Report).

53 Donald R. Rothwell, ‘International Straits and Trans-Arctic Navigation’, Ocean Development and International Law, 43 (2012), 267–82.

54 Chircop, ‘The Growth of International Shipping in the Arctic’, 356–7.

55 C. J. Chivers, ‘Russia Plants Underwater Flag at North Pole’, New York Times, 2 August 2007, available at www.nytimes.com/2007/08/02/world/europe/02cnd-artic.html?module=Search&mabReward=relbias%3; T. Parfitt, ‘Russian plants flag on North Pole seabed’, The Guardian, 2 August 2007, available at www.guardian.co.uk/world/2007/aug/02/russia.arctic.

56 See e.g. ‘Special Report: The Arctic’, The Economist, 16–22 June 2012. Some of the recent literature relevant includes Tessa Mendez, ‘Thin Ice, Shifting Geopolitics: The Legal Implications of Arctic Ice Melt’, Denver Journal of International Law and Policy, 38 (2010), 527–47; Tavis Potts and Clive Schofield, ‘An Arctic Scramble? Opportunities and Threats in the (Formerly) Frozen North’, International Journal of Marine and Coastal Law, 23 (2008), 151–76; Louise A. de La Fayette, ‘Oceans Governance in the Arctic’, International Journal of Marine and Coastal Law, 23 (2008), 531–66.

57 See the Ilulissat Declaration, available at www.arcticgovernance.org/the-ilulissat-declaration.4872424.html.

59 Outer Limits of the Continental Shelf: Argentine Submission (Executive Summary) (21 April 2009), available at www.un.org/depts/los/clcs_new/submissions_files/arg25_09/arg2009e_summary_eng.pdf.

60 Ibid., 8–9; Argentina refers to these islands as Islas Malvinas, Georgias del Sur and Sandwich del Sur.

61 See e.g. Permanent Mission of Japan to the United Nations (SC/09/390) (19 November 2009) available at www.un.org/Depts/los/clcs_new/submissions_files/arg25_09/jpn_re_arg_2009. Other States to have lodged communications on this matter were the United Kingdom, United States, the Russian Federation, India and the Netherlands.

62 Alex G. Oude Elferink, ‘The Outer Continental Shelf in the Arctic: The Application of Article 76 of the LOS Convention in a Regional Context’ in Alex G. Oude Elferink and Donald R. Rothwell (eds.), The Law of the Sea and Polar Maritime Delimitation and Jurisdiction (The Hague, New York: Martinus Nijhoff, 2001), 149.

63 See e.g. Andrew Jackson and Peter Boyce, ‘Mining and “World Park Antarctica”, 1982–1991’ in Marcus Haward and Tom Griffiths (eds.), Australia and the Antarctic Treaty System: 50 Years of Influence (Sydney: University of New South Wales Press, 2011), 300–19.

64 See, generally, James Crawford, ‘The Rights of Peoples: Some Conclusions’ in James Crawford (ed.), The Rights of Peoples (Oxford: Clarendon, 1988), 159–75.

* Part of this chapter is based on the presentation the author made at the 2011 ILA Asia-Pacific Regional Conference (Taipei, 29 May–1 June 2011) under the title ‘Territorial Questions in the East China Sea from a Trans-temporal Perspective’.

1 Mure Dickie, ‘China Economy Overtakes Japan’, Financial Times, 14 February 2011.

2 e.g. John J. Mearsheimer, The Tragedy of Great Power Politics (New York: W. W. Norton, 2001); ibid.,‘China’s Unpeaceful Rise’, Current History (April 2006), 160–2. For detailed discussions of the question, see Steve Chan, China, the U.S. and the Power-Transition Theory: A Critique (London and New York: Routledge, 2008); Barry Buzan, ‘China in International Society: Is “Peaceful Rise” Possible?’, The Chinese Journal of International Politics, 3 (2010), 5–36.

3 Cui Tiankai and Pang Hanzhao, ‘China–US Relations in China’s Overall Diplomacy in the New Era: On China and US Working Together to Build a New-Type Relationship Between Major Countries’ (20 July 2012), available at www.fmprc.gov.cn/ce/cggb/eng/gyzg/xwdt/t953682.htm.

4 Henry Kissinger, On China (New York: Penguin, 2012), 546.

5 Wang Tieya, ‘International Law in China: Historical and Contemporary Perspectives’, Recueil des Cours, 221 (1990), 288; Li Zhaojie, ‘Legacy of Modern Chinese History: Its Relevance to the Chinese Perspective of the Contemporary International Legal Order’, Singapore Journal of International and Comparative Law, 5 (2001), 318. For a detailed discussion of the principle of sovereignty from Chinese perspective, see Xue Hanqin, Chinese Contemporary Perspectives on International Law: History, Culture and International Law (Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, 2012), 68–96; Yang Zewei, Zhuquanlun: Guojifa shangde Zhuquan Wenti ji qi Fazhan Qushi Yanjiu [On Sovereignty: Sovereignty and Its Development Tendency in International Law] (Peking University Press, 2005).

6 For a detailed discussion of the relationship between souveraineté territoriale (territoriale Souveränität) and suprématie territoriale (Gebietshoheit), see Julio A. Barberis, ‘Les Liens juridiques entre l’état et son territoire: perpspectives théoriques et évolution du droit international’, Annuaire Français de Droit International, 45 (1999), 132–46; Alfred Verdross, Bruno Simma and Rudolf Geiger, Territoriale Souveränität und Gebietshoheit: Zur völkerrechtlichen Lage der Oder-Neiße-Gebiete (Bonn: Kulturstiftung der Deutschen Vertriebenen, 1980).

7 Reiji Yoshida, ‘Japan Protests China’s Okinawa Commentary’, Japan Times, 10 May 2013.

8 The principle of mutual respect for sovereignty and territorial integrity is the first among the Five Principles of Peaceful Co-existence that were promulgated by China and India in 1954. Xue, Chinese Contemporary Perspectives on International Law, 36.

9 For a classical discussion of this subject, see John King Fairbank (ed.), The Chinese World Order: Traditional China’s Foreign Relations (Harvard University Press, 1968).

10 Due to space constraints, I will not provide a detailed description of the Senkaku/Diayudao question, which one can find elsewhere. For instance, Tao Cheng, ‘The Sino-Japanese Dispute over the Tiao-yu-tai (Senkaku) Islands and the Law of Territorial Acquisition’, Virginia Journal of International Law, 14 (1974), 221–65; Yoshiro Matsui, ‘International Law of Territorial Acquisition and the Dispute over the Senkaku (Diaoyu) Islands’, Japanese Annual of International Law, 40 (1997), 3–31; Han-yi Shaw, The Diaoyutai/Senkaku Islands Dispute: Its History and an Analysis of the Ownership Claims of the P.R.C., R.O.C., and Japan (Occasional Papers/Reprints Series in Contemporary Asian Studies No. 3–1999 (152)); Unryu Suganuma, Sovereign Rights and Territorial Space in Sino-Japanese Relations: Irredentism and the Diaoyu/Senkaku Islands (Hawaii University Press, 2000); Seokwoo Lee, ‘Territorial Disputes among Japan, China and Taiwan Concerning the Senkaku Islands’, Boundary and Territory Briefings, 3 (2002), 1–37; Junwu Pan, Toward a New Framework for Peaceful Settlement of China’s Territorial and Boundary Disputes (Leiden: Martinus Nijhoff Publishers, 2009); Masahiko Asada, ‘Diaoyu/Senkaku Islands’, Max Planck Encyclopedia of Public International Law, 10 vols. (Oxford University Press, 2011), III, 90–3.

11 Information Office of the State Council, The Peoples’ Republic of China, ‘Diaoyu Dao, an Inherent Territory of China’ (Foreign Language Press, 2012), available at www.fmprc.gov.cn/eng/topics/diaodao/t973774.htm.

12 Supplement to the American Journal of International Law, 38 (1944), 8.

13 James Crawford, The Creation of States in International Law, 2nd edn (Oxford University Press, 2006), 198.

14 Information Office of the State Council, PRC, ‘Diaoyu Dao, an Inherent Territory of China’, 12.

15 Committee for Co-ordination of Joint Prospecting for Mineral Resources in Asian Offshore Areas, United Nations Economic Commission for Asia and the Far East, ‘Geological Structure and Some Water Characteristics of the East China Sea and Yellow Sea’, Technical Bulletin2 (1969), 39–40.

16 According to the PRC, ‘On December 30, 1971, the Chinese Ministry of Foreign Affairs issued a solemn statement, pointing out that “it is completely illegal for the government of the United States and Japan to include China’s Diaoyu Dao Islands into the territories to be returned to Japan in the Okinawa Reversion Agreement and that it can by no means change the People’s Republic of China’s territorial sovereignty over the Diaoyu Dao Islands”. The Taiwan authorities also expressed firm opposition to the backroom deal between the United States and Japan.’ Above n. 11, at 13.

17 For the Japanese position on whether the question was shelved in 1972 and 1978, see Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Japan, ‘Q&A on the Senkaku Islands’ (in particular, Question No. 14), available at www.mofa.go.jp/region/asia-paci/senkaku/qa_1010.html#qa14.

18 Steven Wei Su, ‘The Territorial Dispute over the Tiaoyu/Senkaku Islands: An Update’, Ocean Development and International Law, 36 (2005), 45.

19 For a detailed discussion of this question, see Gao Jianjun, ‘Joint Development in the East China Sea: Not an Easier Challenge than Delimitation’, The International Journal of Marine and Coastal Law, 23 (2008), 39–75.

20 ‘Statement of the Government of the People’s Republic of China on the Baselines of the Territorial Sea of Diaoyu Dao and Its Affiliated Islands’ (September 10, 2012), available at www.un.org/depts/los/LEGISLATIONANDTREATIES/PDFFILES/DEPOSIT/chn_mzn89_2012_e.pdf.

21 Martin Fackler, ‘Japan Says China Aimed Radar at Ship’, New York Times, 5 February 2013.

22 Duan Jielong (ed.), Zhongguo Guojifa Shijianyu Anli (International Law in China: Cases and Practice) (Beijing: Law Press China, 2011).

23 Above n. 11.

24 The publication is available from the following website: www.soa.gov.cn/soa/news/specialtopic/diaoyudao/gylt/webinfo/2012/09/1347338540445425.htm.

25 Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Japan, ‘Japan’s Inalterable Position on the Sovereignty of Takeshima’, available at www.mofa.go.jp/region/asia-paci/takeshima/index.html.

26 Ibid., and ‘The Basic View on the Sovereignty over the Senkaku Islands’ (May 2013), available at www.mofa.go.jp/region/asia-paci/senkaku/basic_view.html.

27 For a concise discussion of historic title, see Andrea Gioia, ‘Historic Titles’, Max Planck Encyclopedia of Public International Law, 10 vols. (Oxford University Press, 2011), IV, 814–23.

28 For a detailed discussion of various modes of territorial acquisition, see James Crawford, Brownlie’s Principles of Public International Law, 8th edn (Oxford University Press, 2012), ch. 9.

29 Information Office of the State Council, PRC, ‘Diaoyu Dao, an Inherent Territory of China’, 5; Shaw, The Diaoyutai/Senkaku Islands Dispute, 55–7; Cheng, ‘The Sino-Japanese Dispute over the Tiao-yu-tai (Senkaku) Islands and the Law of Territorial Acquisition’, 256–7.

30 Information Office of the State Council, PRC, ‘Diaoyu Dao, an Inherent Territory of China’, 6; Shaw, The Diaoyutai/Senkaku Islands Dispute, 55.

31 Su, ‘The Territorial Dispute over the Tiaoyu/Senkaku Islands: An Update’, 52.

33 e.g. Toshio Okuhara, ‘Senkaku Retto no Ryoyuken Kizoku Mondai’ (The Problem of To Whom the Territorial Sovereignty over the Senkaku Islands Belongs), Asahi Asia Review, 3 (1972).

34 Above n. 7.

35 The most recent version is effective as of May 2013. The following discussion is based on this version.

36 The ‘Basic View on the Sovereignty over the Senkaku Islands’.

39 Ministry of Foreign Affairs of Japan, ‘Q&A on the Senkaku Islands’ (in particular, Question No. 4).

40 e.g. Shaw discusses the relevance of the ‘East Asian World Order’ throughout his book The Diaoyutai/Senkaku Islands Dispute.

41 Xue observes that ‘China’s persistent stand on the primacy of State sovereignty has its deep roots embedded in the miserable experience in its modern history’, Chinese Contemporary Perspectives on International Law, 71.

42 The English version of the 1972 ‘Basic View’ of Japan is available from the following source: Jerome Alan Cohen and Hungdah Chiu, People’s China and International Law: A Documentary Study, 2 vols. (Princeton University Press, 1974), I, 351–2.

43 Cases involving territorial sovereignty in which arguments based on ‘pre-modern’ legal concepts or practices were rejected by international judicial organs include, among others, Western Sahara (Advisory Opinion) (1975), Case concerning the Territorial Dispute (Libya/Chad) (1994) and Eritrea-Yemen Arbitration, Phase I Award (1998).

44 Wang, ‘International Law in China’, 219. See also Fairbank, The Chinese World Order, 5 (‘the traditional Chinese world order can hardly be called international’).

45 For discussions on the history of international law in East Asia, see Keishiro Iriye, ‘The Principles of International Law in the Light of Confucian Doctrine’, Recueil des Cours, 120 (1967), 1–57; Onuma Yasuaki, ‘When Was the Law of International Society Born? – An Inquiry of the History of International Law from an Intercivilizational Perspective’, Journal of the History of International Law, 2 (2000), 27–32, 51–4.

46 Charles Taylor, Hegel (Cambridge University Press, 1975), 112.

47 e.g. Toshio Okuhara, ‘Senkaku Retto no Ryoyuken Kizoku Mondai’ (The Problem of to Whom the Territorial Sovereignty over the Senkaku Islands Belongs), Asahi Asia Review, 3 (1972).

48 Shaw, The Diaoyutai/Senkaku Islands Dispute, 55.

49 China could argue that under the standard of modern international law the inclusion of these uninhabited and remote islands in an official map can amount to not only ‘symbolical’ but ‘effective’ occupation. On the other hand, Japan could invoke the case law as elaborated in the Island of Palmas arbitration and regard the 1863 act of China, at most, as creating an ‘inchoate’ title. For a detailed discussion of discovery creating only an inchoate title, see Island of Palmas or (Miangas), United States v. Netherlands, Arbitration (1928), Reports of International Arbitral Awards, vol. 2, 843–6.

50 For a detailed discussion of the subject, see Grigory I. Tunkin, ‘Coexistence and International Law, Recueil des Cours, 95 (1958), 1–81.

51 Han-Key Lee and MyongWhai Kim, ‘Background Paper on Hongkong Conference in International Law’, Korean Journal of International Law, 12 (1967), 181–2.

1 James Crawford, International Law as an Open System (London: Cameron May, 2002), 17.

2 Ibid., 37.

3 James Crawford, The Creation of States in International Law, 2nd edn (Oxford University Press, 2006), 40–1.

4 Ibid., 41.

5 Ibid., 41–2.

6 Status of Eastern Carelia (USSR v. Finland), Advisory Opinion, 23 July 1923, PCIJ Series B, No. 5 (1923), 27.

7 Nationality Decrees Issued in Tunis and Morocco (French Zone), Advisory Opinion, 7 February 1923, PCIJ Series B, No. 4 (1923), 25.

8 Ibid., 24.

9 SS Lotus (France v. Turkey), Judgment, 7 September 1927, PCIJ Series A, No. 10 (1927), 18.

10 Legality of the Threat of Using Nuclear Weapons, Advisory Opinion, 8 July 1996, ICJ Reports (1996), 226, para. 21.

11 Max Weber, ‘Observations de M. Huber’, Annuaire de l’institut de droit international, 36-I (1931), 79.

12 Michel de la Grotte, ‘Les Affaires traitées par la Cour Permanente de Justice Internationale pendant la période 1926–1928’, Revue de droit international et de législation comparée, 10 (1929), 387.

13 SS Wimbledon (United Kingdom v. Germany), Judgment, 17 August 1923, PCIJ Series A, No. 1 (1923), 25.

14 Ibid., 24–5.

15 James Crawford, ‘Sovereignty as a Legal Value’ in James Crawford and Martti Koskenniemi (eds.), The Cambridge Companion to International Law (Cambridge University Press, 2012), 117, para. 123.

16 Jurisdiction of Courts of Danzig, Advisory Opinion, 3 March 1928, PCIJ Series B, No. 15 (1928), 17–18.

17 Dionisio Anzilotti, Cours de droit international (1929), 407–8. [Translation: ‘The Court’s opinion does not say that a treaty can, in itself, create rights and obligations for individuals, obviating the need to incorporate the rules pertaining to it into internal law: it only says that the contracting parties might resolve to adopt specific rules which create rights and obligations for individual and can be applied by national tribunals.’]

18 Jurisdiction of Courts of Danzig, 26–7.

19 LaGrand case (Germany v. United States of America), Judgment, 27 June 2001, ICJ Reports (2001), 466, para. 77.

20 Crawford, The Creation of States in International Law, 29.

21 Ibid., 30, note 132.

22 Crawford, International Law as an Open System, 21.

Save book to Kindle

To save this book to your Kindle, first ensure coreplatform@cambridge.org is added to your Approved Personal Document E-mail List under your Personal Document Settings on the Manage Your Content and Devices page of your Amazon account. Then enter the ‘name’ part of your Kindle email address below. Find out more about saving to your Kindle.

Note you can select to save to either the @free.kindle.com or @kindle.com variations. ‘@free.kindle.com’ emails are free but can only be saved to your device when it is connected to wi-fi. ‘@kindle.com’ emails can be delivered even when you are not connected to wi-fi, but note that service fees apply.

Find out more about the Kindle Personal Document Service.

  • Sovereignty
  • Edited by Christine Chinkin, London School of Economics and Political Science, Freya Baetens, Universiteit Leiden
  • Book: Sovereignty, Statehood and State Responsibility
  • Online publication: 05 February 2015
Available formats
×

Save book to Dropbox

To save content items to your account, please confirm that you agree to abide by our usage policies. If this is the first time you use this feature, you will be asked to authorise Cambridge Core to connect with your account. Find out more about saving content to Dropbox.

  • Sovereignty
  • Edited by Christine Chinkin, London School of Economics and Political Science, Freya Baetens, Universiteit Leiden
  • Book: Sovereignty, Statehood and State Responsibility
  • Online publication: 05 February 2015
Available formats
×

Save book to Google Drive

To save content items to your account, please confirm that you agree to abide by our usage policies. If this is the first time you use this feature, you will be asked to authorise Cambridge Core to connect with your account. Find out more about saving content to Google Drive.

  • Sovereignty
  • Edited by Christine Chinkin, London School of Economics and Political Science, Freya Baetens, Universiteit Leiden
  • Book: Sovereignty, Statehood and State Responsibility
  • Online publication: 05 February 2015
Available formats
×